Tr7500 series software_en-v6-7-0

TR7500 Series High-Speed Automated Optical Inspection System

Users Guide -- Software

ver. 6.7.0 January, 18, 2012

Software version: v4.4

Test Research Inc.

TR7500 High-Speed Automated Optical Inspection System Users Guide -- Software ver. 6.7.0

Copyright © 2007-2009 Test Research Inc. All rights reserved.

This document can only be printed or photocopied by the authorized customers or agents of Test Research Inc. (TRI) for sole use by their employees working with TRI test systems. Any other use of this document must be approved by TRI.

TRI has rights to change both TRI AOI’s hardware and software without notice. TRI will do its best to inform its existing customers about any product upgrade, change or phase out.

All registered trademarks, trademarks, and trade names are the properties of their owners.

Virus Check Process: There is no virus exists in TRI released CDs. The software on the TRI CD was checked by the latest anti-virus software before being copied to the disk. Before installing TRI software or importing the files from external equipment, please use anti-virus software to ensure the system security. Also, please upgrade your anti-virus software to the latest version.

For any comments>corrections to this guide, please address them to – [email protected] with “TR7500 SERIES USERS GUIDE” in the Subject field.

www.tri.com.tw

WARNING: Risk of electric shock and mechanical injury. Only fully-trained persons should be allowed to install, operate, and>or maintain this system.

WARNING: Do not reach in the machine when it is operating.

mailto:[email protected]?subject=TR7530%20Series%20User%20Guide

Test Research Inc.

TR7500 Series User Guide –Software ver. 6.7.0 i

Table of Contents

1 INTRODUCTION _______________________________________________ 1

1.1 About This Manual .......................................................................................... 1

1.2 AOI Introduction ............................................................................................. 1

1.3 Programming Flow Chart ................................................................................. 2

1.4 Format Definitions .......................................................................................... 2

1.5 Optional Equipment ........................................................................................ 3

2 AOI STANDARD PROJECT CREATION _________________________________ 4

2.1 Creating a Project in ATPG ............................................................................... 4

2.2 Creating the Board Information ....................................................................... 5

2.3 Editing Component Data ................................................................................ 12

2.4 Generating the Multi-Board CAD Data ............................................................ 16 2.4.1 Setting the Multi-Board Arrangement Data .....................................16 2.4.2 Getting the Board Rotation Angle (Finding R1, R2) ..........................18 2.4.3 Finding the Selected Component ....................................................23 2.4.4 Setting the Board Size ....................................................................27

2.5 Setting the Fiducial Marks.............................................................................. 29

2.6 Editing the Component Library ...................................................................... 38

2.7 Merging the Component Library with the Board Information .......................... 41

2.8 Generating FOV Images ................................................................................. 43

2.9 Verifying FOV Images .................................................................................... 48

2.10 Train Mode ................................................................................................... 50

2.11 Fine-Tuning Mode ......................................................................................... 52

2.12 Selecting a Applied Type ................................................................................ 55

3 MENU BAR INTRODUCTION ______________________________________ 57

3.1 File Tab ......................................................................................................... 57 3.1.1 Opening a Program ........................................................................57 3.1.2 Saving a Program ...........................................................................57

3.2 View Tab ....................................................................................................... 58

3.3 Parameter Tab .............................................................................................. 59 3.3.1 User Mode .....................................................................................59 3.3.2 System ..........................................................................................65 3.3.3 Panel Parameter ............................................................................72 3.3.4 Software Barcode (Optional) ..........................................................99 3.3.5 Assign Serial Code ....................................................................... 117 3.3.6 Connect Project Server & connect project server Setting ................ 118

Test Research Inc.

TR7500 Series User Guide –Software ver. 6.7.0 ii

3.3.7 Path Setting ................................................................................. 121 3.3.8 Setting of barcode in the double-track (Optional) .......................... 121 3.3.9 Auto Conveyor Width Output (Optional) ....................................... 121 3.3.10 Overall Equipment Effectiveness .................................................. 125 3.3.11 Barcode and Image Output ........................................................... 126 3.3.12 Buzzer Alarm .............................................................................. 127 3.3.13 Inspection Box Color Setting ........................................................ 127

3.4 Program Tab ................................................................................................129 3.4.1 ATPG ........................................................................................... 129 3.4.2 TRAIN ......................................................................................... 130 3.4.3 Pass Level ................................................................................... 130 3.4.4 Auto Pass Level ........................................................................... 136 3.4.5 Add FOV ...................................................................................... 137 3.4.6 Remove FOV ................................................................................ 139 3.4.7 Rotate 180° ................................................................................. 139 3.4.8 Relocate All Box ........................................................................... 139 3.4.9 Non CAD ..................................................................................... 140 3.4.10 Multi Panel Alignment Setting ...................................................... 168 3.4.11 BOM Check .................................................................................. 169 3.4.12 Type and Placer Check ................................................................. 170 3.4.13 AOI Check .................................................................................... 171 3.4.14 Pin Number Check ....................................................................... 171 3.4.15 aoi/bom/PLACER CHECK ............................................................. 172

3.5 Inspection Tab .............................................................................................172 3.5.1 Inspect Panel ............................................................................... 172 3.5.2 Debug for Single Board Set ........................................................... 172 3.5.3 Inspect FOV Images ..................................................................... 172 3.5.4 Manual Skip Board Setting ........................................................... 172 3.5.5 Inspect Offline Backup FOV Images .............................................. 173 3.5.6 Enable Two Panel Mode (In-line Fiducial Marks)........................... 173 3.5.7 Shop Flow Control ....................................................................... 174

3.6 Operation Tab ..............................................................................................180 3.6.1 Auto Mode ................................................................................... 180 3.6.2 Confirm-Pass Mode ...................................................................... 180 3.6.3 ByPass Mode ............................................................................... 180 3.6.4 Auto-Confirm Mode ..................................................................... 180 3.6.5 On Machine Confirm .................................................................... 180

3.7 Utilities Tab .................................................................................................182 3.7.1 Camera Alignment ....................................................................... 183 3.7.2 Capture Panel Map ....................................................................... 185 3.7.3 Capture FOV Images .................................................................... 185 3.7.4 Capture FOV Images with Multi-Panel .......................................... 185 3.7.5 Capture bare board fov image ...................................................... 185 3.7.6 Fiducial Mark Alignment .............................................................. 185 3.7.7 Fiducial Mark Setting ................................................................... 186 3.7.8 Reset X Y Table ............................................................................ 189 3.7.9 Unload Panel ............................................................................... 189 3.7.10 Panel Standby Test ...................................................................... 189 3.7.11 Inline Component Analysis ........................................................... 190

Test Research Inc.

TR7500 Series User Guide –Software ver. 6.7.0 iii

3.7.12 Gauge Tool .................................................................................. 195 3.7.13 Resend Image Data for Repair ...................................................... 195 3.7.14 Enable Inspection Data Collection ................................................ 196 3.7.15 Component Status ....................................................................... 196 3.7.16 Generate Real Image Data ............................................................ 197 3.7.17 Inline Component Data Output to SPC ........................................... 197 3.7.18 Second Project ............................................................................. 198 3.7.19 Inspection Box Operation ............................................................. 199 3.7.20 System Parameter Display ........................................................... 201 3.7.21 Bare Board .................................................................................. 201 3.7.22 Inspection Type Setting................................................................ 202 3.7.23 Auto Loading ............................................................................... 202 3.7.24 Users Manager ............................................................................. 206 3.7.25 Change Password ........................................................................ 208 3.7.26 Coverage Report .......................................................................... 208 3.7.27 Auto Conveyor Width Setting ....................................................... 214 3.7.28 Yield Management System Setting ................................................ 214 3.7.29 Link Printer ................................................................................. 214 3.7.30 First Board Check ........................................................................ 215 3.7.31 Version Compare ......................................................................... 217 3.7.32 Offline Tune Mode ....................................................................... 217 3.7.33 Set Board No to RS ....................................................................... 220 3.7.34 Multiboard Copy .......................................................................... 220 3.7.35 Link Eyes Checker........................................................................ 221 3.7.36 Enable Barcode Pre-Check ........................................................... 221 3.7.37 Bosch AMS Support ..................................................................... 221 3.7.38 Liteonit Check Barcode ................................................................ 221 3.7.39 Generate Asteel Coverage Report ................................................. 221 3.7.40 Test Result Report ....................................................................... 221 3.7.41 Quality Validation ........................................................................ 222 3.7.42 Merging ICT Result with AOI Result .............................................. 228 3.7.43 Create Barcode File to ICT ............................................................ 229 3.7.44 Offline Monitor ............................................................................ 234

3.8 Diagnostic Tab .............................................................................................242 3.8.1 Machine I>O Test ......................................................................... 242 3.8.2 Self Diagnosis .............................................................................. 242 3.8.3 Project Test ................................................................................. 243 3.8.4 Motion Alignment ........................................................................ 244 3.8.5 Enable Standard Project Check ..................................................... 245 3.8.6 Checking Situation ....................................................................... 245 3.8.7 Function Introduction .................................................................. 245

3.9 Help Tab ......................................................................................................247 3.9.1 Help Topics ................................................................................. 247 3.9.2 About TRAOI ............................................................................... 247

4 AOI ATPG FUNCTION INSTRUCTION _______________________________ 248

4.1 CAD File Translator for AOI Files ...................................................................248 4.1.1 Load Data File.............................................................................. 248 4.1.2 File Translator ............................................................................. 251

Test Research Inc.

TR7500 Series User Guide –Software ver. 6.7.0 iv

4.1.3 Import ........................................................................................ 252

4.2 Edit Component Data....................................................................................253 4.2.1 Board View.................................................................................. 254 4.2.2 Find (Next F3) ............................................................................. 260 4.2.3 Replace ....................................................................................... 262 4.2.4 Merge Name (By Type) ................................................................ 263 4.2.5 Change T>B (Top>Lower) ............................................................ 266 4.2.6 Rotate ......................................................................................... 267 4.2.7 Mirror ......................................................................................... 268 4.2.8 Change to CCW (Counterclockwise) .............................................. 269 4.2.9 Edit>View Mode .......................................................................... 270 4.2.10 Test>Untest ................................................................................. 271 4.2.11 Top>Bottom ................................................................................ 272 4.2.12 Change Board No. (Number) ........................................................ 273 4.2.13 Merge Top>Bottom (By Board 1) .................................................. 274 4.2.14 Change to CCW (By Selected) ....................................................... 274 4.2.15 Add ............................................................................................. 275 4.2.16 Delete ......................................................................................... 276 4.2.17 Inch to mm> Mil to mm> 10µm to mm .......................................... 277

4.3 Generate Multi-Board CAD Data ....................................................................278 4.3.1 Set .............................................................................................. 278 4.3.2 Generate ..................................................................................... 279 4.3.3 View ........................................................................................... 279 4.3.4 Right-Click Menu ......................................................................... 280

4.4 Set Fiducial Mark ..........................................................................................286 4.4.1 Set .............................................................................................. 286 4.4.2 Mosaic......................................................................................... 289

4.5 Library ........................................................................................................290 4.5.1 Verify .......................................................................................... 290 4.5.2 Merge.......................................................................................... 290

4.6 FOV Generate ...............................................................................................291 4.6.1 Function ...................................................................................... 291

4.7 Motion Control Panel ....................................................................................292

4.8 Light Adjustment ..........................................................................................294 4.8.1 Lighting Control Editor ................................................................ 294 4.8.2 Set Specific Lighting ..................................................................... 299

4.9 Edit Component Library ...............................................................................301 4.9.1 Library Introduction .................................................................... 301 4.9.2 Component Type Command ......................................................... 302 4.9.3 Edit Command ............................................................................. 311 4.9.4 View Command ........................................................................... 316 4.9.5 Add Command ............................................................................. 317 4.9.6 Zoom Command .......................................................................... 321 4.9.7 Tool Command ............................................................................ 322 4.9.8 Setting Command ........................................................................ 339 4.9.9 Tool bar ...................................................................................... 363 4.9.10 Example: Edit Component Library ................................................ 367

Test Research Inc.

TR7500 Series User Guide –Software ver. 6.7.0 v

4.10 Image Matching Principles and Pass Level Settings ........................................378 4.10.1 Methods of Image Matching ......................................................... 378 4.10.2 Inspection Principles and Settings ................................................ 378 4.10.3 Color Check Method and RGB Weighting ....................................... 401 4.10.4 Structure of Inspection Boxes ....................................................... 405

4.11 Principles for Special Plane ...........................................................................406 4.11.1 Irregular Panel ............................................................................ 406 4.11.2 Data Fusion ................................................................................. 407 4.11.3 Change Multi-Board Layout .......................................................... 408 4.11.4 Different Gaps Within Multi-Boards .............................................. 409 4.11.5 Creating a Project by Bare Board .................................................. 411

5 TRAIN MODE FUNCTION ________________________________________ 414

5.1 Main Frame ..................................................................................................414

5.2 Train mode ..................................................................................................415

5.3 Panel Map ....................................................................................................415

5.4 Real FOV ......................................................................................................415

5.5 Capture FOV .................................................................................................416 5.5.1 Tools ........................................................................................... 417 5.5.2 FOV Image Boxes>Colors ............................................................. 441 5.5.3 Mouse Function in FOV Image ...................................................... 441

5.6 Function Area ..............................................................................................442 5.6.1 Function Frame ........................................................................... 442 5.6.2 Component List ........................................................................... 443 5.6.3 New Comp & Reset Win. ............................................................... 457 5.6.4 Warp Setting ............................................................................... 459 5.6.5 ROI Setting .................................................................................. 461 5.6.6 Tool ............................................................................................ 465 5.6.7 Switch FOV .................................................................................. 467 5.6.8 Merge.......................................................................................... 467 5.6.9 Histogram ................................................................................... 468 5.6.10 Change Lighting ........................................................................... 469 5.6.11 Train>Untrain>Test>Untest ......................................................... 470 5.6.12 Image Library .............................................................................. 470 5.6.13 Find FOV by Type>Name .............................................................. 473 5.6.14 Change FOV ................................................................................. 474 5.6.15 Information Bar ........................................................................... 475 5.6.16 Weighting.................................................................................... 475

6 INSPECTION DIALOG FUNCTION ___________________________________ 477

6.1 Image Diagram Functions .............................................................................478

6.2 Panel Defect Map ..........................................................................................480

6.3 Results Dialog ..............................................................................................482

7 SPECIAL FUNCTIONS __________________________________________ 488

Test Research Inc.

TR7500 Series User Guide –Software ver. 6.7.0 vi

7.1 Warning Shift ...............................................................................................488 7.1.1 Procedure of Setting .................................................................... 488 7.1.2 Example ...................................................................................... 488

7.2 Save All FOV Images During Inspection .........................................................489 7.2.1 Enable and Setting ....................................................................... 489

7.3 Login System by Reading Barcode on Employee ID Card ................................490 7.3.1 Constraint ................................................................................... 490 7.3.2 Procedure ................................................................................... 490

7.4 Multi-Language Method ................................................................................492 7.4.1 Definition of Lang File .................................................................. 492 7.4.2 Result Display ............................................................................. 492

7.5 Read Special Characters by Barcode Reader ..................................................494

7.6 Do Not Display [Communicate Table Wait] Message ......................................498

7.7 Limiting the Number of Alternative Images ...................................................498

7.8 Sending Signals to Hella-Samlip Magazine ....................................................498

7.9 Saving Support Pin Height Data to a Project ...................................................501

7.10 [New Multi-Panel] function :Setting a multi-panel as a single board ...............507

7.11 Adding component leads automatically by epac files ......................................507

7.12 Combining Several Projects ..........................................................................512

7.13 Displaying Instant PLC Status........................................................................514

7.14 Displaying the cycle time of previous waiting board .......................................515

7.15 Sending Board Width Information to the Plate Turnover Machine in the Next Station ................................................................................................................515

7.16 Using “Synchronic PLC inspection ” function ................................................525

7.17 Using “New Void UI” Function .....................................................................526

7.18 Setting “Lot Serial Number Requirement” Function .......................................526

7.19 Using “Polar Shift” Function ..........................................................................527

7.20 Sending Signals to Halle-Samlip Magazine .....................................................527

7.21 Offline Fine-tuning New Feature ...................................................................530

7.22 Using “Check Result” System .........................................................................539

7.23 Saving Library data to an Excel file ...............................................................540

8 START TO INSPECT ___________________________________________ 542

8.1 Power On .....................................................................................................542

8.2 Open Program ..............................................................................................542

8.3 Check Barcode .............................................................................................544

8.4 Link to Repair Station ...................................................................................544

8.5 Inspect on Another Machine .........................................................................544

Test Research Inc.

TR7500 Series User Guide –Software ver. 6.7.0 vii

8.6 Stop Testing and Shut Down .........................................................................545

9 OFFLINE EDITOR ____________________________________________ 546

9.1 Software ......................................................................................................546

9.2 Setting .........................................................................................................546

9.3 Procedure ....................................................................................................546 9.3.1 Editing Component Library .......................................................... 546 9.3.2 Train mode .................................................................................. 547 9.3.3 New Offline Editor Editing Flow ................................................... 549

9.4 Auto Feedback Function ...............................................................................557 9.4.1 Objective ..................................................................................... 557 9.4.2 Settings ....................................................................................... 557 9.4.3 Operation Instructions ................................................................. 560

10 APPENDIX 1 LIGHTING COMPENSATION _____________________________ 561

10.1 Lighting Compensation .................................................................................561

10.2 Lighting Decay Auto Check............................................................................563

11 APPENDIX 2 OCR OPERATION ___________________________________ 565

11.1 Flowchart to Create an OCR Window .............................................................565

11.2 Buttons Related to the OCR Function in Train mode .......................................566

11.3 Creating OCR Box by Auto-Train ...................................................................567

11.4 Menu Introduction .......................................................................................571 11.4.1 OCR - Auto Train mode ................................................................ 571 11.4.2 Training Result Verify Dialog Interface ......................................... 572

11.5 OCR - Manual Train mode .............................................................................574

11.6 Training .......................................................................................................577

11.7 Run Time Test ..............................................................................................578

11.8 Tools ...........................................................................................................578 11.8.1 Font Library Manager .................................................................. 578 11.8.2 CheckSum ................................................................................... 581

11.9 Show Font Library Dialog .............................................................................584

11.10 Font Delete Dialog ........................................................................................584

11.11 Notice of In-Line >Run-Time Inspection .......................................................586 11.11.1 Build an OCR inspection window .................................................. 586

11.12 Constraints of TRI-OCR .................................................................................587

Test Research Inc.

TR7500 Series User Guide –Software ver. 6.7.0 viii

Table of Figures

Figure 1: Programming Flow Chart ................................................................................. 2

Figure 2: Opening the AOI Program ................................................................................. 4

Figure 3: Creating a New AOI File .................................................................................... 4

Figure 4: List of ATPG Steps ............................................................................................ 4

Figure 5: Loading a CAD file ............................................................................................ 5

Figure 6: Entering the Translator Tool ............................................................................. 6

Figure 7: Translator Function Dialog Box ........................................................................ 7

Figure 8: Selecting a File for Translator ........................................................................... 8

Figure 9: Selecting a Translator Unit ................................................................................ 8

Figure 10: Starting to Transfer the File ............................................................................ 9

Figure 11: Successful Transferring Message ................................................................... 10

Figure 12: Quitting the Translator Program ................................................................... 10

Figure 13: Specifying a AOI File ..................................................................................... 11

Figure 14: Loading an AOI File ...................................................................................... 11

Figure 15: Component Data Table ................................................................................. 12

Figure 16: Pop-Up Menu in Component Data Table ........................................................ 13

Figure 17: Choosing Board View Function ..................................................................... 13

Figure 18: Board View -- Finding Component Positions .................................................. 14

Figure 19: Proceeding to the Next Step in ATPG Process ................................................. 14

Figure 20: Completing the Edit Board Information Step ................................................. 15

Figure 21: Setting a Multi-Board Program ...................................................................... 16

Figure 22: Setting a Multi-Board Program Manually ....................................................... 17

Figure 23: Setting the Board Angle ............................................................................... 17

Figure 24: The Result of Rotating Board Angle ............................................................... 18

Figure 25: Selecting an Object Component in Board 1 ..................................................... 19

Figure 26: Inputting the Component Name .................................................................... 19

Figure 27: Locating the Component 1 ............................................................................ 20

Figure 28: Motion Control Panel .................................................................................... 20

Figure 29: Confirming the Setting of Component 1 ......................................................... 21

Figure 30: Selecting a Component Manually ................................................................... 21

Figure 31: Locating the Component 2 ............................................................................ 22

Figure 32: Confirming the Setting of Component 2 ......................................................... 22

Figure 33: Confirming the Board Angle .......................................................................... 22

Figure 34: Selecting a Dummy Component in Board 2 .................................................... 23

Figure 35: Setting a Component for Dummy 1 ................................................................ 24

Figure 36: Confirming the Dummy 1 Setting .................................................................. 24

Figure 37: Setting the Dummy in the Second Board ........................................................ 25

Figure 38: Setting the Dummy Component in Other Board.............................................. 25

Figure 39: The Result of Locating Boards ....................................................................... 26

Test Research Inc.

TR7500 Series User Guide –Software ver. 6.7.0 ix

Figure 40: Setting the Board Size ................................................................................... 26

Figure 41: The Warning Message, “Set Board Size First” ................................................. 27

Figure 42: Setting the Upper-Left Position of the Board 1 ............................................... 27

Figure 43: Confirming the Setting of Board Position ....................................................... 28

Figure 44: Setting the Lower-right Position of Board 1 ................................................... 28

Figure 45: Setting the Fiducial Marks............................................................................. 29

Figure 46: Using the CAD File to Find the First Fiducial Mark .......................................... 29

Figure 47: Finding a Fiducial Mark Manually.................................................................. 30

Figure 48: Confirming the Rotation Angle ...................................................................... 30

Figure 49: Set Lighting for First Fiducial Mark ............................................................... 31

Figure 50: Setting the Weighting of the First Fiducial Mark ............................................ 32

Figure 51: The Weighting Dialog Box ............................................................................. 32

Figure 52: The Process of Getting the Fiducial Mark ....................................................... 32

Figure 53: Confirming to Use Standard Fiducial Mark Image ........................................... 33

Figure 54: Selecting a Standard Fiducial Mark Image ...................................................... 33

Figure 55: Confirming the Fiducial Mark Coordinates ..................................................... 33

Figure 56: Completing the Setting of the 1st Fiducial Mark Image .................................... 34

Figure 57: Not Using Standard Fiducial Mark Image ....................................................... 34

Figure 58: Confirming the Fiducial Mark Coordinates ..................................................... 35

Figure 59: Grabbing a Standard Image of the 1st Fiducial Mark ....................................... 35

Figure 60: Setting the 2nd Fiducial Mark ....................................................................... 36

Figure 61: Inputting the Name of the 2nd Fiducial Mark .................................................. 36

Figure 62: Confirming the 2nd Fiducial Mark Coordinates .............................................. 36

Figure 63: Grabbing a Standard Image of the 2nd Fiducial Mark ....................................... 37

Figure 64: Clearing All FM Data ..................................................................................... 37

Figure 65: Finishing the Fiducial Mark Setting ............................................................... 38

Figure 66: Entering the Component Library ................................................................... 39

Figure 67: Confirming the Primary Name Change ........................................................... 39

Figure 68: The Component Type List ............................................................................. 40

Figure 69: Reviewing a Specified Component in Component Library .............................. 40

Figure 70: Merging the Selected Components ................................................................ 41

Figure 71: Confirming the Merge Setting ....................................................................... 41

Figure 72: Completing the Merging Process .................................................................. 42

Figure 73: Capturing the Board Map .............................................................................. 43

Figure 74: The Successful Message of Capturing Board Map ........................................... 43

Figure 75: Setting FOV Distribution Rules ...................................................................... 44

Figure 76: The Warning Message of Generating FOVs ..................................................... 44

Figure 77: A Dialog Box of Selecting Two Panel Mode ..................................................... 45

Figure 78: A Dialog Box of Locating Scan Lines ............................................................... 45

Figure 79: The Failed Message of Merging FM ................................................................ 45

Figure 80: The Failed Message of Running Two Panel Mode ........................................... 46

Test Research Inc.

TR7500 Series User Guide –Software ver. 6.7.0 x

Figure 81: Selecting to Capture FOVs Automatically ....................................................... 46

Figure 82: Selecting to Relocate Inspection Boxes .......................................................... 46

Figure 83: Displaying All FOV Allocations on the Board Map ........................................... 47

Figure 84: The Main Window of Verifying FOV Images ................................................... 48

Figure 85: The Main Window of Verifying FOV Images ................................................... 48

Figure 86: Completing All ATPG Process ........................................................................ 49

Figure 87: Entering the Train Mode ............................................................................... 50

Figure 88: The Main Window of Train Mode .................................................................. 50

Figure 89: The Tool Bar for Finding FOVs ...................................................................... 51

Figure 90: Inspect Result Window in Fine-tuning Mode .................................................. 52

Figure 91: Reviewing Failed Images by Number ............................................................. 53

Figure 92: Confirming Failed Components ..................................................................... 53

Figure 93: Fine-Tuning Tool Bar .................................................................................... 54

Figure 94: Inspection Results in Fine-Tuning Mode ........................................................ 54

Figure 95: A Dialog Box of Selecting an Applied Type ..................................................... 55

Figure 96: Applied Type: By Board ................................................................................ 55

Figure 97: Applied Type: By Set..................................................................................... 56

Figure 98: AOI Menu Bar – File Tab ............................................................................... 57

Figure 99: File Tab – Version Controller ........................................................................ 58

Figure 100: AOI Menu Bar – View Tab ........................................................................... 58

Figure 101: AOI Toolbar ............................................................................................... 59

Figure 102: AOI Menu Bar – Parameter Tab ................................................................... 59

Figure 103: AOI Menu Bar – Parameter Tab>User Mode ................................................. 60

Figure 104: Project Management Dialog Windows in Client Mode .................................. 62

Figure 105: An Error Message in Client Mode ................................................................ 63

Figure 106: Project Management Dialog Windows in Server Mode .................................. 64

Figure 107: Edited Information Dialog windows in Server Mode .................................... 64

Figure 108: Parameter Tab – System Function ............................................................... 65

Figure 109: Setting Halt Machine Test Count.................................................................. 66

Figure 110: A Warning Message for Halt Machine When Repeat Fail ............................... 66

Figure 111: A Warning Message for Halt Machine When Fiducial Fail ............................. 66

Figure 112: A Warning Message of Halt Machine When Barcode Fail .............................. 67

Figure 113: A Dialog Box for Inputting Barcode ............................................................. 67

Figure 114: A Warning Dialog Box of Halt Machine When Abnormal Fail_board Rate ....... 67

Figure 115: A Dialog Box for Inputting Password .......................................................... 68

Figure 116: Setting Share Library Item .......................................................................... 68

Figure 113: Share Library – Explanation 1 ..................................................................... 70





Test Research Inc.

TR7500 Series User Guide –Software ver. 6.7.0 xi

Figure 121: Specific Path Setting ................................................................................... 71

Figure 122: Panel Parameter Screen – Bar Code Tab ...................................................... 72

Figure 123: Train Prefix & Suffix Setting 1 ..................................................................... 73






Figure 129: Setting Assign Barcode .............................................................................. 76

Figure 130: Barcode Assignment Dialog Box .................................................................. 77

Figure 131: Setting Barcode Count ................................................................................ 77

Figure 132: An Error Message When the Setting Count is Wrong ................................... 78

Figure 133: Enable Barcode Tokenizer .......................................................................... 78

Figure 134: Enable Barcode Tokenizer Setting ............................................................... 79

Figure 135: Enable Barcode Tokenizer-Result ............................................................... 79

Figure 136: Panel Input Direction from Left or Right ...................................................... 80

Figure 137: Multi-Barcode Layout Setting Dialog Box ..................................................... 81

Figure 138: Check H/W Barcode on Bottom ................................................................... 82

Figure 139: Multi Barcode Assignment Setting ............................................................... 82

Figure 140: Manual Barcode Setting ............................................................................. 83

Figure 141: Board Number Setting Dialog Box ............................................................... 84

Figure 142: A Error Message, “Cannot Find the Barcode” ................................................ 84

Figure 143: The Successful Multi-Barcode Layout Setting Result .................................... 85

Figure 144: Board Rotation Angle Measurement Setting ................................................. 86

Figure 145: Setting [Assign multi-barcode by reading one barcode] function .................. 87

Figure 146: Multi-Barcode Layout Dialog ....................................................................... 87

Figure 147: Input the end digit for each board manually ................................................ 88

Figure 148: Show Barcode Dialog – 0 degree ................................................................. 88

Figure 149: Show Barcode Dialog – 180 degree.............................................................. 89

Figure 150: Barcode Setting Dialog ................................................................................ 89

Figure 151: Barcode “Quiet Zone” ................................................................................. 90

Figure 152: Barcode Laser Scan Position ....................................................................... 90

Figure 153: Scanner Adjusted to Read Barcode .............................................................. 90

Figure 154: Interlaced Barcodes, Dual Scanners ............................................................. 91

Figure 155: Panel Parameter – Bar Code Tab Check Bar Code ......................................... 92

Figure 156: Barcode Reader Window ............................................................................ 92

Figure 157: Barcode Reader Window ............................................................................ 93

Figure 158: Panel Parameter –Multi-board Tab.............................................................. 93

Figure 159: Panel Parameter – Panel Info Tab ................................................................ 94

Figure 160: Project Version in Title Bar ......................................................................... 95

Figure 161: Panel Parameter – AutoLink Tab ................................................................. 96

Test Research Inc.

TR7500 Series User Guide –Software ver. 6.7.0 xii

Figure 162: Panel Parameter – Repair Station Tab ......................................................... 97

Figure 163: Panel Parameter – Offline Editor Tab .......................................................... 98

Figure 164: The Software Barcode Window ................................................................... 99

Figure 165: The License Manager Path of Coreco Processing 5.4 ................................... 100

Figure 166: The License Manager Path of Coreco Processing 5.6 ................................... 100

Figure 167: Sapera Processing License Manager Window ............................................. 101

Figure 168: Checking License Loading Status ............................................................... 101

Figure 169: Location Setup—Single FOV ...................................................................... 102

Figure 170: Capturing The Single FOV Image ............................................................... 102

Figure 171: Location Setup—Multi FOV ....................................................................... 103

Figure 172: Multi FOV Image--Start Point .................................................................... 103

Figure 173: Multi FOV Image--End Point...................................................................... 104

Figure 174: Scan and Compose the Barcode Image ....................................................... 104

Figure 175: Train and Decode Barcode ........................................................................ 105

Figure 176: Panel Barcode or Board Barcode ............................................................... 106

Figure 177: TestRun ................................................................................................... 106

Figure 178: Procedure of Assign Multi-Boards ............................................................. 107

Figure 179: Manual Setup Multi-Board Position ........................................................... 108

Figure 180: Procedure of Manual Setup Multi-Board Position ....................................... 109

Figure 181: Interface of Manual Setup Multi-Board Position ........................................ 110

Figure 182: Location Setup--Single FOV ....................................................................... 111

Figure 183: Selection box, [Count] field and [Del] ......................................................... 111

Figure 184: Set Barcodelight ....................................................................................... 111

Figure 185: General Parameters .................................................................................. 112

Figure 186: 1D Barcode Parameter Setting Dialog ........................................................ 113

Figure 187: Enable Setup ROI-Strip of Joined Image ..................................................... 114

Figure 188: Image Binarization ................................................................................... 115

Figure 189: Rotation Angle of Barcode ........................................................................ 115

Figure 190: DataMatrix Parameters Setting Interface ................................................... 116

Figure 191: DataMatrix Construction........................................................................... 116

Figure 192: Pre-location of the Barcode ....................................................................... 116

Figure 193: QR-Code Parameter Setting Dialog ............................................................ 117

Figure 194: Assign Serial Code .................................................................................... 117

Figure 195: Assign Serial Code – Input Initial Number .................................................. 118

Figure 196: Select [Parameter> Project Server Setting] ................................................ 118


Figure 198: Project Server Setting Dialog ..................................................................... 119


Figure 200: Uploading to Project Server ...................................................................... 120

Figure 201: Path Setting.............................................................................................. 121

Figure 202: Path Setting-Browse the Path .................................................................... 121

Test Research Inc.

TR7500 Series User Guide –Software ver. 6.7.0 xiii












Figure 214: Program Tab ............................................................................................ 127

Figure 215: The Inspection Box Color Setting Table ..................................................... 128

Figure 216: The Color Selection Table ......................................................................... 128

Figure 217: The Custom Color Setting Table ................................................................ 129

Figure 218: AOI Menu Bar – Program Tab .................................................................... 129

Figure 219: Program Tab– Pass Level .......................................................................... 130

Figure 220: Sample Component List ............................................................................ 131

Figure 221: Four Fields to Edit in Component List ........................................................ 131

Figure 222: Sample Pass Level Graph .......................................................................... 132

Figure 223: Detailed Component Information .............................................................. 132

Figure 224: Example: Model Image - Similarity ............................................................ 133

Figure 225: Example: Changing Component Pass Level ................................................ 134

Figure 226: Example: Model Image – Similarity with New Pass Level ............................ 134

Figure 227: Component List Window .......................................................................... 135

Figure 228: Model Image Pass Levels .......................................................................... 135

Figure 229: Program –Auto Pass Level ........................................................................ 136

Figure 230: Auto Pass Level Setting ............................................................................. 136

Figure 231: Confirm Recover Pass Level Window ........................................................ 137

Figure 232: Add FOV................................................................................................... 138

Figure 233: Select Capture FOV Images ....................................................................... 138

Figure 234: Select Program > Non-CAD > Teach Function ............................................. 140

Figure 235: Non-CAD Teach Window & Functions ........................................................ 141

Figure 236: Box Tool Examples ................................................................................... 142

Figure 237: Cross Line Tool Example ........................................................................... 142

Figure 238: Angle Measuring Tool Example ................................................................. 143

Figure 239: Theta Alignment Window ......................................................................... 144

Figure 240: Large Component Tool, Step 1................................................................... 145

Figure 241: Large Component Tool, Step 2................................................................... 145

Figure 242: Large Component Tool, Result .................................................................. 146

Figure 243: CAD Origin Not Defined Warning .............................................................. 146

Test Research Inc.

TR7500 Series User Guide –Software ver. 6.7.0 xiv

Figure 244: CAD Origin by Mouse Click ........................................................................ 147

Figure 245: Non-CAD Teach Procedure 1 ..................................................................... 148



Figure 248: Theta Data Field ....................................................................................... 151

Figure 249: Set Theta Data When Using Box Tool ......................................................... 152

Figure 250: Edit Theta Angle Directly .......................................................................... 152

Figure 251: CAD File>New .......................................................................................... 153

Figure 252: Name & Type Setting ................................................................................ 153

Figure 253: Move to Component Center ....................................................................... 154

Figure 254: Select Component Angle ........................................................................... 154

Figure 255: Select Top or Lower .................................................................................. 154

Figure 256: Add a Component ..................................................................................... 155

Figure 257: Save CAD File ........................................................................................... 155

Figure 258: Close Non CAD Dialog ............................................................................... 155

Figure 259: Load an Existing AOI File .......................................................................... 156

Figure 260: Add Component in Prj. .............................................................................. 157

Figure 261: Non-CAD Teach Window .......................................................................... 158

Figure 262: Non-CAD Teach v.2.4 Interface .................................................................. 159

Figure 263: Select [Non CAD> Teach] .......................................................................... 160

Figure 264: Load Old Non CAD Data? ........................................................................... 160

Figure 265: Non-cad programming in In-line AOI? ....................................................... 160

Figure 266: Set Board Position .................................................................................... 161

Figure 267: 8x8 Panel Map .......................................................................................... 162

Figure 268: Add a New Component ............................................................................. 162

Figure 269: Select [Non CAD> Teach] .......................................................................... 163

Figure 270: Setting the Weighting ............................................................................... 163

Figure 271: Set Mask .................................................................................................. 164

Figure 272: Set Angle .................................................................................................. 164

Figure 273: Input Component Information .................................................................. 165

Figure 274: Copy Component Information ................................................................... 165

Figure 275: Add a Component by Copy Function .......................................................... 165

Figure 276: Box Color ................................................................................................. 166

Figure 277: FOV Image Dialog ..................................................................................... 166

Figure 278: Move the Box to Correct Position .............................................................. 167

Figure 279: New-Mouse Drag ...................................................................................... 167

Figure 280: Set the Upper-left Corner and Lower-right Corner ..................................... 168

Figure 281: Save Function ........................................................................................... 168

Figure 282: Multi-Panel Algorithm Setting ................................................................... 169

Figure 283: BOM Check ............................................................................................... 170

Figure 284: Type and Place Check ............................................................................... 170

Test Research Inc.

TR7500 Series User Guide –Software ver. 6.7.0 xv

Figure 285: Type and Place Check—Load AOI File ....................................................... 171

Figure 286: Version Controller .................................................................................... 171

Figure 287: AOI Menu Bar – Inspection Tab ................................................................. 172

Figure 288: Manual Skip Board Setting Window .......................................................... 173

Figure 289: Enable Two Panel Mode (In-line Fiducial Marks) ....................................... 174

Figure 290: AOI Menu Bar – Operation Tab .................................................................. 180

Figure 291: On Machine Confirm Window ................................................................... 181

Figure 292: AOI Menu Bar – Utilities Tab ..................................................................... 182

Figure 293: Camera Alignment Window ...................................................................... 183

Figure 294: Camera Alignment Window--Alignment .................................................... 184

Figure 295: Bare Board Checking Dialog Box ............................................................... 185

Figure 296: Fiducial Mark Not Found Message ............................................................. 186

Figure 297: Fiducial Setting Screen ............................................................................. 186

Figure 298: Move Camera to Fiducial Mark .................................................................. 187

Figure 299: Confirm Change Fiducial Mark Position ..................................................... 187

Figure 300: Adjust Fiducial Mark Search Range ........................................................... 188

Figure 301: Confirm Fiducial Search Range .................................................................. 188

Figure 302: Fiducial Mark Parameter Setting ............................................................... 188

Figure 303: Fiducial Mark Parameter Setting—Search ................................................. 189

Figure 304: Panel Standby Test & Set Test Count ......................................................... 190

Figure 305: Inline Component Analysis ....................................................................... 190

Figure 306: Cpk Criterion Setting Dialog ...................................................................... 191

Figure 307: Cpk Data Report ....................................................................................... 192

Figure 308: Cpk Data Table ......................................................................................... 192

Figure 309: Time Sequence Graph ............................................................................... 194

Figure 310: Utilities Tab -- Gauge Tool Options ............................................................ 195

Figure 311: Confirm Static or Board In>Out Test .......................................................... 195

Figure 312: A Dialog Box of Resend Successful ............................................................. 196

Figure 313: Component Status Dialog .......................................................................... 197

Figure 314: Inline Component Data Output to SPC ....................................................... 197

Figure 315: Second Project Data Setting Dialog ............................................................ 198

Figure 316: Inspection Box Operation Dialog ............................................................... 199

Figure 317: System Parameter Display ........................................................................ 201

Figure 318: Bargeboard Dialog .................................................................................... 202

Figure 319: Select Type Dialog .................................................................................... 202

Figure 320: Auto-Loading Selections ........................................................................... 202

Figure 321: Auto-Loading Flow Chart .......................................................................... 203

Figure 322: Auto-Loading Setting Dialog...................................................................... 204

Figure 323: Auto-Load Barcode Setting Dialog ............................................................. 204

Figure 324: Auto-Load Barcode Rule Table .................................................................. 205

Figure 325: Auto-Load Barcode—Browse Path ............................................................ 205

Test Research Inc.

TR7500 Series User Guide –Software ver. 6.7.0 xvi

Figure 326: Auto-Load Barcode—Specify Path ............................................................. 206

Figure 327: Auto-Load Barcode—Specify Path ............................................................. 206

Figure 328: Users Manager Dialog ............................................................................... 207

Figure 329: Users Update Dialog ................................................................................. 207

Figure 330: Change Password Dialog ........................................................................... 208

Figure 331: Coverage Report Screen ............................................................................ 209

Figure 332: Coverage Report Saved Screen .................................................................. 209

Figure 333: Pad Count Dialog ...................................................................................... 210

Figure 334: Coverage Report with HTML format .......................................................... 211

Figure 335: First Layer--Defect List ............................................................................. 211

Figure 336: First Layer--Defect List--defect.txt ............................................................. 212

Figure 337: First Layer--Total Table ............................................................................ 213

Figure 338: Second Layer-Example-0201 .................................................................... 213

Figure 339: Second Layer-Example-TQFP64 ................................................................ 213

Figure 340: Auto Conveyor Width Setting .................................................................... 214

Figure 341: Yield Management System Setting ............................................................. 214

Figure 342: First Board Check Menu ............................................................................ 215

Figure 343: Check CAD Dialog ..................................................................................... 215

Figure 344: Result of CAD Check ................................................................................. 216

Figure 345: Polarity Check Result ................................................................................ 216

Figure 346: Version Compare Screen ........................................................................... 217

Figure 347: Offline Tune Mode Dialog Box ................................................................... 218

Figure 348: Set Board Number to Repair Station .......................................................... 220

Figure 349: Set Board Number Dialog .......................................................................... 220

Figure 350: Multiboard Copy ...................................................................................... 221

Figure 351: Link Eyes Checker .................................................................................... 221



Figure 354: Repair Station-Setting> Others> Quality Validation .................................... 224

Figure 355: Image Replacement Selection.................................................................... 225

Figure 333: Applied-Camera Selection ......................................................................... 225

Figure4: Inspection Box Operation] dialog ................................................................... 226

Figure 356: Inspection Process Dialog Box................................................................... 226

Figure 357: Component Re-inspection Report.............................................................. 227

Figure 358: Component Re-inspection Report-2 .......................................................... 227

Figure 359: Merge ICT Result with AOI Result .............................................................. 229


Figure 361: Related Software Barcode Parameters Setup ............................................. 230

Figure 362: Create Barcode File to ICT-Result Screen ................................................... 231

Figure 363: Create Barcode File to ICT......................................................................... 232

Figure 364: Barcode File Setting .................................................................................. 232

Test Research Inc.

TR7500 Series User Guide –Software ver. 6.7.0 xvii

Figure 365: barcode.barcode File ................................................................................ 232

Figure 366: Contents of barcode.barcode ..................................................................... 233

Figure 367: Create Barcode File to ICT - TechniSat ....................................................... 233

Figure 368: Create Barcode File to ICT – Barcode File Setting ....................................... 233

Figure 369: Create Barcode File to ICT –Export File Path .............................................. 234

Figure 370: Create Barcode File to ICT –Result ............................................................ 234

Figure 371: Enable Offline Monitor .............................................................................. 235

Figure 372: Offline Monitor> Show Offline Monitor ...................................................... 235

Figure 373: Offline Monitor Dialog-Offline Setting ........................................................ 236

Figure 374: Offline Station Setting ............................................................................... 236

Figure 375: Add Link> Remove Link ............................................................................ 237

Figure 376: Select an inline machine ........................................................................... 237

Figure 377: Failed Link ............................................................................................... 238

Figure 378: Successful Link ......................................................................................... 239

Figure 379: Select an Inline Machine to Fine-tuning ..................................................... 240

Figure 380: Open Link Successfully ............................................................................. 240

Figure 381: Inspect> Inspect FOV Images .................................................................... 241

Figure 382: AOI Menu Bar – Diagnostic Tab ................................................................. 242

Figure 383: PC>PLC I>O Test Screen ........................................................................... 242

Figure 384: Self Diagnosis Options .............................................................................. 243

Figure 385: Project Test Function................................................................................ 243

Figure 386: Project Test Warning Message .................................................................. 244

Figure 387: Project Test Display on Panel Map ............................................................. 244

Figure 388: Pressing the [Inspect] Button .................................................................... 245

Figure 389: Saving a Project ........................................................................................ 245

Figure 390: Check Standard Project Result Dialog ........................................................ 245

Figure 391: Check Standard Project Result Dialog-Different Situation ........................... 246

Figure 392: Set the Current Project to be the Standard Project ..................................... 246

Figure 393: Display Details ......................................................................................... 246

Figure 394: AOI Menu Bar – Help Tab .......................................................................... 247

Figure 395: Load Data File Screen ............................................................................... 248

Figure 396: Select BOM File (left) & BOM File Format .................................................. 249

Figure 397: Load Data File Dialog ................................................................................ 249

Figure 398: BOM File Components Set to ‘Test’ ............................................................ 250

Figure 399: File Translator Window & Functions ......................................................... 251

Figure 400: Import AOI Translator Window & Functions .............................................. 252

Figure 401: Edit Component Data Main Screen ............................................................ 253

Figure 402: Select Board View Command .................................................................... 254

Figure 403: Board View Window ................................................................................. 255

Figure 404: Board View Window – View & Find Options .............................................. 256

Figure 405: Board View Window – Find Command ...................................................... 256

Test Research Inc.

TR7500 Series User Guide –Software ver. 6.7.0 xviii

Figure 406: Board View Window – Find Result ............................................................ 257

Figure 407: Board View Window –Export Image .......................................................... 257

Figure 408: Board View Window –Result of Export Image ............................................ 258

Figure 409: Board View Window –Change to Top> Change to Lower ............................ 259

Figure 410: Tile Windows Command ........................................................................... 259

Figure 411: Tile Windows Result -- Board View (top) & Component Data...................... 260

Figure 412: Select Find Command ............................................................................... 261

Figure 413: Find Command Dialog Box ........................................................................ 261

Figure 414: Select Replace Command .......................................................................... 262

Figure 415: Replace Dialog.......................................................................................... 262

Figure 416: Replace>Change Type by Part Input & Result ............................................ 263

Figure 417: Merge Name by Type Process & Result ...................................................... 264

Figure 418: Merge Multiple Name by Type Process & Result ......................................... 265

Figure 419: Select Change T>B Command .................................................................... 266

Figure 420: Change Top>Lower Confirm Window ........................................................ 266

Figure 421: Select Rotate Command ............................................................................ 267

Figure 422: Set Rotate Angle Dialog ............................................................................. 267

Figure 423: Select Mirror Command ............................................................................ 268

Figure 424: Mirror Dialog box ..................................................................................... 268

Figure 425: Counterclockwise & Clockwise Rotation .................................................... 269

Figure 426: Select Change to CCW Command ............................................................... 269

Figure 427: Change to CCW Confirm Window .............................................................. 269

Figure 428: Select Edit>View Command ...................................................................... 270

Figure 429: Select Test>Untest Command .................................................................... 271

Figure 430: Change Component Test Status ................................................................. 271

Figure 431: Select Top>Bottom Command ................................................................... 272

Figure 432: Change Component Top>Bottom Data ....................................................... 272

Figure 433: Select Change Board Number Command .................................................... 273

Figure 434: Change Board No. Dialog........................................................................... 273

Figure 435: Merge Top>Bottom Process ...................................................................... 274

Figure 436: Select Change to Counterclockwise ........................................................... 274

Figure 437: Change to Counterclockwise Process ......................................................... 275

Figure 438: Select Add Command ................................................................................ 275

Figure 439: Add Component Dialog ............................................................................. 276

Figure 440: Select Delete Command ............................................................................ 276

Figure 441: Delete Component Dialog ......................................................................... 277

Figure 442: Confirm Delete Components Window ........................................................ 277

Figure 443: Set Command ........................................................................................... 278

Figure 444: Multi-Board Setup Dialog .......................................................................... 278

Figure 445: Generate Multi-Board Data Window .......................................................... 279

Figure 446: Save AOI File Command ............................................................................ 279

Test Research Inc.

TR7500 Series User Guide –Software ver. 6.7.0 xix

Figure 447: View Command ........................................................................................ 279

Figure 448: Menu from Right-Clicking Mouse .............................................................. 280

Figure 449: Copy & Paste Step 1 .................................................................................. 281



Figure 452: Confirm New Row or Column .................................................................... 283

Figure 453: Load CAD Command ................................................................................. 284

Figure 454: Load Data File Dialog ................................................................................ 284

Figure 455: New CAD File Loaded ............................................................................... 285

Figure 456: Set Fiducial Mark Command ..................................................................... 286

Figure 457: Set Fiducial Mark Range ........................................................................... 286

Figure 458: Confirm Fiducial Mark Search Range ......................................................... 287

Figure 459: Set In-Line Direction Dialog ...................................................................... 287

Figure 460: Set Stop Sensor Position ........................................................................... 288

Figure 461: Confirm Stop Position ............................................................................... 288

Figure 462: RGB Weighting Dialog ............................................................................... 289

Figure 463: RGB Weighting Dialog ............................................................................... 289

Figure 464: Library Verify Tab .................................................................................... 290

Figure 465: Library Merge Tab .................................................................................... 290

Figure 466: FOV Function Tab ..................................................................................... 291

Figure 467: Motion Control Outlook & Functions ......................................................... 292

Figure 468: Motion Control Outlook – Lock & Unlock ................................................... 293

Figure 469: Minimize Motion Control Panel ................................................................. 293

Figure 470: Light Button for Lighting Control Editor .................................................... 294

Figure 471: Lighting Control Editor ............................................................................. 294

Figure 472: LED Control ............................................................................................. 295

Figure 473: LED Brightness Adjustment ...................................................................... 296

Figure 474: Select>Unselect LED ................................................................................. 297

Figure 475: Rename Lighting Set Dialog ...................................................................... 297

Figure 476: Delete Light Setting Dialog box .................................................................. 298

Figure 477: Lighting Control Editor - Type ................................................................... 299

Figure 478: Confirm Copy Sideview Lighting ............................................................... 299

Figure 479: the differences between coaxial light and non-coaxial light ........................ 300

Figure 480: ATPG Component Main Screen .................................................................. 301

Figure 481: Use Mouse to Select Boxes ........................................................................ 302

Figure 482: Component Type Command ...................................................................... 302

Figure 483: Set Component Type Dialog ...................................................................... 303

Figure 484: Component Library Dialog Box ................................................................. 304

Figure 485: Component Library Icon Result ................................................................. 306

Figure 486: Confirm Components as Same Type .......................................................... 307

Figure 487: Primary & Secondary Component Names .................................................. 308

Test Research Inc.

TR7500 Series User Guide –Software ver. 6.7.0 xx

Figure 488: Confirm Change Component Type Window ............................................... 308

Figure 489: New Primary Component Type ................................................................. 309

Figure 490: Confirm Save Window .............................................................................. 309

Figure 491: Set Users Library Path .............................................................................. 310

Figure 492: Close All>Save All Confirm Window .......................................................... 310

Figure 493: Rotate Command Result ........................................................................... 311

Figure 494: Edit Command Menu ................................................................................ 311

Figure 495: Copy to all Pins ......................................................................................... 312

Figure 496: Align Selected Boxes Command ................................................................. 312

Figure 497: Align Selected Boxes Result ...................................................................... 312

Figure 498: Link Command Result ............................................................................... 313

Figure 499: Unlink Command Result ........................................................................... 313

Figure 500: Mirror Command Dialog ........................................................................... 314

Figure 501: Rotate Copy Command Dialog ................................................................... 314

Figure 502: Rotate Copy Command Result ................................................................... 314

Figure 503: Rotate Pin Direction Command Result ....................................................... 315

Figure 504: Change Window Shape Command Result ................................................... 315

Figure 505: Change Window Shape Command Result ................................................... 315

Figure 506: Edit Pin Name .......................................................................................... 316

Figure 507: View Command Menu ............................................................................... 316

Figure 508: Example of Show Side Function ................................................................. 316

Figure 509: View Command Menu ............................................................................... 317

Figure 510: Adding a Body Box ................................................................................... 317

Figure 511: Existing Body Box Warning Message ......................................................... 317

Figure 512: Adding a Pin with the Pin Box Function ..................................................... 318

Figure 513: Adding 4 Pins with the Pin Box Function ................................................... 319

Figure 514: Adding Void Window with Add Window Function ..................................... 319

Figure 515: Add All Window Dialog ............................................................................. 320

Figure 516: Confirm Window Arrangement in Same FOV ............................................. 320

Figure 517: Add Polarity Pair Function ........................................................................ 321

Figure 518: Zoom Command Menu .............................................................................. 321

Figure 519: Zoom In (left) & Zoom Out ........................................................................ 322

Figure 520: Tool Command Menu................................................................................ 322

Figure 521: Name Index Dialog ................................................................................... 323

Figure 522: Create Secondary Name, Step 1 ................................................................. 323

Figure 523: Create Secondary Name, Step 2 ................................................................. 324

Figure 524: Name Index Load Function Result ............................................................. 324

Figure 525: Confirm Name Index Data Save ................................................................. 325

Figure 526: Capturing Offline Image Process ............................................................... 326

Figure 527: Capture Component Icon Command .......................................................... 326

Figure 528: Inspect Single Inspection Box .................................................................... 327

Test Research Inc.

TR7500 Series User Guide –Software ver. 6.7.0 xxi

Figure 529: Body & Pin Boxes ..................................................................................... 328

Figure 530: Model Library Dialog ................................................................................ 329

Figure 531: Example – Icon Label ................................................................................ 329

Figure 532: Select Default Model ................................................................................. 330

Figure 533: Create Model Library Result ..................................................................... 331

Figure 534: Create Component Library ........................................................................ 332

Figure 535: Edit Model Library-Missing ....................................................................... 333

Figure 536: Edit Model Library-Void ........................................................................... 334

Figure 537: Save for Model Library ............................................................................. 335

Figure 538: Save Model Library Dialog ........................................................................ 335

Figure 539: Model Library Application Menu ............................................................... 336

Figure 540: Model Library Saved Path ......................................................................... 337

Figure 541: Set Max and Min value .............................................................................. 338

Figure 542: Setting Command Menu ............................................................................ 339

Figure 543: Algorithm Dialog & Functions ................................................................... 339

Figure 544: Click on List Item to Fill Logic Field ........................................................... 340

Figure 545: Click [Get] for One Inspection Window ...................................................... 341

Figure 546: Get Several Inspection boxes ..................................................................... 342

Figure 547: Get Several Inspection boxes separately .................................................... 342

Figure 548: Group Windows by Group Process ............................................................ 343

Figure 549: Group Windows by Window Process ......................................................... 343

Figure 550: Group Other Groups & Windows Process ................................................... 344

Figure 551: Delete Group(s) ........................................................................................ 344

Figure 552: Delete Defect Logic ................................................................................... 345

Figure 553: Create Defect Logic ................................................................................... 345

Figure 554: Windows Set on an IC Lead ....................................................................... 346

Figure 555: Confirm Copy Logic by Pin & Results Message ........................................... 346

Figure 556: Confirm [Change Defect] ........................................................................... 347

Figure 557: View Inspection Box ................................................................................. 348

Figure 558: Select Inspection Boxes ............................................................................ 349

Figure 559: Click on [Group] to Display Inspection Boxes ............................................. 349

Figure 560: Add Name to [Defect] Field, Click on [New Defect] ..................................... 350

Figure 561: Copy IC Pin Logic ...................................................................................... 350

Figure 562: Set Inspection Box Properties Dialog ......................................................... 351

Figure 563: Select & Display [Search Range] ................................................................ 352

Figure 564: Setting the Search Range .......................................................................... 352

Figure 565: Select & Display [Search Range] ................................................................ 353

Figure 566: Image with Mask Set ................................................................................. 353

Figure 567: Image with Mask Set ................................................................................. 354

Figure 568: The differences between Mask Inside and Mask Outside in Rectangle Mask and Circle Mask .......................................................................................................................... 354

Test Research Inc.

TR7500 Series User Guide –Software ver. 6.7.0 xxii

Figure 569: [Set Pass Level] Dialog .............................................................................. 355

Figure 570: Directory ................................................................................................. 356

Figure 571: Add Component Library Directory Path Process ........................................ 356

Figure 572: Pin Directivity Dialog ................................................................................ 357

Figure 573: Set Weighting ........................................................................................... 358

Figure 574: Set Distance Table Dialog-Point to Point .................................................... 359

Figure 575: Set Distance Table Dialog-Point to Line or Line to Line ............................... 359

Figure 558: Set Distance Table Dialog-Point to Line or Line to Line ............................... 360

Figure 576: Set Distance Table Dialog-Advanced Add ................................................... 360

Figure 577: Set Distance Table Dialog-Line Difference .................................................. 361

Figure 578: Set Distance Table Dialog-Light Bar ........................................................... 361

Figure 579: Set Distance Table Dialog-Component Distance ......................................... 362

Figure 580: Set Distance Table Dialog-Target Setting ................................................... 362

Figure 581: Set Distance Table Dialog-Parameter Setting ............................................. 362

Figure 582: Set Distance Table Dialog-Application Area ............................................... 363

Figure 583: Other Window Options ............................................................................. 363

Figure 584: Display Active Box Link ............................................................................ 363

Figure 585: Show Active Windows .............................................................................. 364

Figure 586: Select Window Type ................................................................................. 365

Figure 587: Select Window Type ................................................................................. 365

Figure 588: Selecting Component Group ...................................................................... 366

Figure 589: Selecting Component Type ........................................................................ 366

Figure 590: Choose a Component, Resize Body Window ............................................... 367

Figure 591: Selecting an Inspection Box....................................................................... 367

Figure 592: Adjust Void Windows ............................................................................... 368

Figure 593: Setting Property, Pass Level, & Set Algorithm Icons ................................... 368

Figure 594: Mask Center of Image ............................................................................... 369

Figure 595: Setting the Component Weighting ............................................................. 369

Figure 596: Creating a Box for Inspection the Component Type Number ....................... 369

Figure 597: Setting the Inspection Condition ............................................................... 370

Figure 598: Create a [Body] box for IC component ....................................................... 371

Figure 599: Create a [Body] box for IC component ....................................................... 371

Figure 600: Use [Mirror Copy] to Set Pins in First & Last Lead Area .............................. 372

Figure 578: Use [Mirror Copy] to Set Pins in First & Last Lead Area .............................. 372

Figure 601: Choose First & Last Pins, Add Pins ............................................................. 373

Figure 579: Choose First & Last Pins, Add Pins ............................................................. 373

Figure 602: Add Inspection boxes ............................................................................... 374

Figure 603: Choose [Rotate Copy] or [Mirror] .............................................................. 375

Figure 604: Results of [Mirror} Command ................................................................... 376

Figure 605: Example: Set Pass Level ............................................................................ 377

Figure 606: Model Image (Missing) Window ................................................................ 378

Test Research Inc.

TR7500 Series User Guide –Software ver. 6.7.0 xxiii

Figure 607: Model Image Pass Level Settings ............................................................... 379

Figure 608: Compare Lead Images .............................................................................. 379

Figure 609: Lead Pass Level Settings ........................................................................... 380

Figure 610: Lead Pass Level Settings-Shift Mode .......................................................... 380

Figure 611: Void Pass Level Settings ............................................................................ 381

Figure 612: Lead Void Pass Level Settings.................................................................... 381

Figure 613: 100% & Low Solder, Over Solder Settings .................................................. 382

Figure 614: Pin Pass Level Settings.............................................................................. 382

Figure 615: Solder Pass Level Settings ......................................................................... 383

Figure 616: Solder Pass Level Settings ......................................................................... 384

Figure 617: Solder Pass Level Settings-Round Box ....................................................... 384

Figure 618: Set Two Polarity Pair Windows ................................................................. 385

Figure 619: Align Window .......................................................................................... 385

Figure 620: Align Pass Level Settings ........................................................................... 386

Figure 621: ROI Inspection Box ................................................................................... 386

Figure 622: ROI Parameter Dialog ............................................................................... 387

Figure 623: Extra Blob Window Settings ...................................................................... 387

Figure 624: Edge Window Dialog ................................................................................ 388

Figure 625: RGB Cuboid .............................................................................................. 389

Figure 626: Color Window Parameter Setting .............................................................. 389

Figure 627: Color Window Parameter Setting-2 ........................................................... 390

Figure 628: Caliper Pair .............................................................................................. 391

Figure 629: Caliper Pair-Testing Comparison ............................................................... 391

Figure 630: Caliper Pair Parameter Setting .................................................................. 392

Figure 631: CalDistance-Distance ................................................................................ 393

Figure 632: CalDistance-Distance- Parameter Setting ................................................... 393

Figure 633: CalDistance-Example ................................................................................ 394

Figure 634: CalDistance-Example ................................................................................ 395

Figure 635: CalDistance-Inspection Result ................................................................... 395

Figure 636: CalDistance-Angle- CalDistance-Angle ....................................................... 396

Figure 637: CalDistance-Angle-Inspection Box Position ................................................ 396

Figure 638: CalDistance-Angle-Inspection Box Position -2 ............................................ 396

Figure 639: CalDistance-Angle- Parameter Setting ....................................................... 397

Figure 640: Add a Black Component Box ..................................................................... 397

Figure 641: Black Component Inspection Result .......................................................... 398

Figure 642:Black Component Parameter Setting .......................................................... 398

Figure 643: Selecting RIM Model ................................................................................. 399

Figure 644:Proper Size of [Body] Box .......................................................................... 399

Figure 645:[RIM_Body] Box ........................................................................................ 400

Figure 646:[RIM_Window] Box ................................................................................... 400

Figure 647: Resistor: Monochrome Image (left) & 3-Color CCD Image ........................... 401

Test Research Inc.

TR7500 Series User Guide –Software ver. 6.7.0 xxiv

Figure 648: SOP Designator: Monochrome Image (left) & 3-Color CCD Image ................ 402

Figure 649: RGB Weighting Dialog Box ........................................................................ 402

Figure 650: Gray and Enlarged Image .......................................................................... 403

Figure 651: RGB Weighting Dialog-Weighting .............................................................. 403

Figure 652: Missing Designator: Color (left) & Monochrome(right) Images ................... 404

Figure 653: Monochrome (above) vs. RGB Values ........................................................ 405

Figure 654: Inspection Box Structure .......................................................................... 405

Figure 655: Set Number of Boards ............................................................................... 406

Figure 656: Load Boards ............................................................................................. 406

Figure 657: Set Number of CAD Files ........................................................................... 407

Figure 658: Select Merge to Board 1 ............................................................................ 408

Figure 659: [Set > Edit Mode] ...................................................................................... 408

Figure 660: Right-Click Menu ...................................................................................... 409

Figure 661: 3 Main Types of Multi-Boards ................................................................... 410

Figure 662: Setting X & Y Gaps in Type 1 Boards .......................................................... 410

Figure 663: Setting X & Y Gaps in Type 2 & 3 Boards .................................................... 411

Figure 664: Add a Locate Window ............................................................................... 412

Figure 665: Bare Board Asking Dialog ......................................................................... 412

Figure 666: Capture FOV Again ................................................................................... 413

Figure 667: Click on Panel to Show Fiducial Marks ....................................................... 414

Figure 668: Find Component Dialog ............................................................................ 414

Figure 669: Train mode Screen ................................................................................... 415

Figure 670: Group and Fail String are shown in FOV Image ......................................... 416

Figure 671: Weighting Shown in Upper-right ............................................................... 416

Figure 672: Tools Menu Commands ............................................................................ 417

Figure 673: View Menu ............................................................................................... 418

Figure 674: Setting the Search Range .......................................................................... 418

Figure 675: Setting the Links....................................................................................... 418

Figure 676: View Other Boxes ..................................................................................... 419

Figure 677: Move Inspection Boxes ............................................................................. 419

Figure 678: Show Pin Direction ................................................................................... 419

Figure 679: Data Collection Chart 1 – Selecting Data Point ............................................ 420

Figure 680: Data Collection Chart 2 –Change Pass Level ............................................... 421

Figure 681: Check [For This Box] ................................................................................ 422

Figure 682: Mode 2 Drawing ....................................................................................... 423

Figure 683: Mode 2-Change Pass Level ........................................................................ 424

Figure 684: Mode 2-The Result, 72, happens 6 times .................................................... 425

Figure 685: Confirm Copy Size and>or Position ........................................................... 425

Figure 686: Confirm Copy Size and>or Position ........................................................... 426

Figure 687: Add Component Dialog Box ...................................................................... 427

Figure 688: Move All Boxes Dialog .............................................................................. 427

Test Research Inc.

TR7500 Series User Guide –Software ver. 6.7.0 xxv

Figure 689: Train mode -- Test Function Options ......................................................... 428

Figure 690: Train mode -- UnTest Function Options ..................................................... 428

Figure 691: Set to Library Menu .................................................................................. 428

Figure 692: Rotate Control Bo Process......................................................................... 429

Figure 693: Display Solder Shape ................................................................................ 429

Figure 694: Bad Mark ................................................................................................. 430

Figure 695: Set Bad Mark - 1 ....................................................................................... 430

Figure 696: Bad Mark Dialog Box ................................................................................ 430

Figure 697: Select Algorithm Dialog ............................................................................ 430

Figure 698: The Applied Range ................................................................................... 431

Figure 699: Set Bad Mark - 2 ....................................................................................... 431

Figure 700: Get Inspection Data Dialog ........................................................................ 432

Figure 701: Action List ................................................................................................ 432

Figure 702: Query Modify History ............................................................................... 433

Figure 703: Query Modify History Parameter Setting ................................................... 433

Figure 704: Query Modify History Parameter Setting-Time .......................................... 434

Figure 705: By Action ................................................................................................. 434

Figure 706: By Users................................................................................................... 434

Figure 707: Start to query ........................................................................................... 435

Figure 708: Line Difference Setting ............................................................................. 435

Figure 709: Line Difference-Defect Tree ...................................................................... 436

Figure 710: Pad Reposition ......................................................................................... 436

Figure 711: Pad Reposition Operation Dialog Box ........................................................ 437

Figure 712: General Component and IC Type Component ............................................. 437

General Component: Compensates X and Y Shift .......................................................... 437

IC Type Component: Compensates only X Shift in this direction .................................... 437

Figure 713: Pad Reposition ......................................................................................... 438

Figure 714: Chip Reposition ........................................................................................ 439

Figure 715: Chip Reposition Operation Dialog Box ....................................................... 439

Figure 716: Algoritm1 ................................................................................................ 440

Figure 717: Algorithm2 .............................................................................................. 440

Figure 718: Relocate the Component Center ................................................................ 440

Figure 719: Train mode – Press [F1] to Toggle Hot Keys ............................................... 442

Figure 720: Select View Search Range ......................................................................... 443

Figure 721: Adjust Multi-Function Window ................................................................. 443

Figure 722: Symmetrical Search Range ........................................................................ 444

Figure 723: Confirm Relocate & Train Align Window ................................................... 444

Figure 724: Move Multi-Function Box to Alternative Image .......................................... 445

Figure 725: Press Set to Add Alternative Image ............................................................ 445

Figure 726: Edit Component Type & Angle .................................................................. 446

Figure 727: View Standard Images .............................................................................. 447

Test Research Inc.

TR7500 Series User Guide –Software ver. 6.7.0 xxvi

Figure 728: Inspect Function with Magnification Shown .............................................. 447

Figure 729: Confirm Remove Image ............................................................................ 448

Figure 730: Remove Image Dialog ............................................................................... 448

Figure 731: Mask Image Dialog ................................................................................... 449

Figure 732: Enhance Image Process ............................................................................ 449



Figure 735: Blurred Alternative Image ........................................................................ 451

Figure 736: Enable R Channel only .............................................................................. 451

Figure 737: Enable G Channel only .............................................................................. 452

Figure 738: Enable B Channel only .............................................................................. 452

Figure 739: The Better Alternative Image .................................................................... 453

Figure 740: Save Image to Library Process .................................................................. 453

Figure 741: Adjust Multi-Function Window ................................................................. 454

Figure 742: Add 1 Box & Select Algorithm ................................................................... 454

Figure 743: Select Dialog Box ...................................................................................... 455

Figure 744: Finish Adding an Inspection Box ............................................................... 455

Figure 745: Select Inspection Box (Red) & Adjust Multi-Function Window (Purple) ...... 456

Figure 746: Add Linked Inspection boxes .................................................................... 456

Figure 747: Inspection Window Pass Level .................................................................. 457

Figure 748: Add Component Dialog ............................................................................. 458

Figure 749: Reset Multi-Function Box .......................................................................... 458

Figure 750: Adjust Multi-Function Box ........................................................................ 459

Figure 751: Select Warp Copy Rules ............................................................................ 460

Figure 752: Warp Set on FOV Image ............................................................................ 460

Figure 753: Warp Model in Component List ................................................................. 460

Figure 754: Warp Model Score .................................................................................... 461

Figure 755: Change Warp Algorithm ........................................................................... 461

Figure 756: Enlarge Multi-Function Box ...................................................................... 462

Figure 757: Set ROI Inspection Box ............................................................................. 462

Figure 758: Select ROI Copy Rule ................................................................................ 462

Figure 759: Mask Zone Options ................................................................................... 463

Figure 760: Default Mask Zone .................................................................................... 463

Figure 761: Mask Dark Zone ....................................................................................... 463

Figure 762: Mask Bright Zone ..................................................................................... 464

Figure 763: ROI Parameters Dialog ............................................................................. 464

Figure 764: ROI Parameters Dialog ............................................................................. 465

Figure 765: 2X Image .................................................................................................. 466

Figure 766: Switch FOV Panel ..................................................................................... 467

Figure 767: Merge Library Dialog ................................................................................ 468

Figure 768: Histogram Curve ...................................................................................... 468

Test Research Inc.

TR7500 Series User Guide –Software ver. 6.7.0 xxvii

Figure 769: Change FOV Lighting ................................................................................ 469

Figure 770: Save Lighting Name Options ..................................................................... 470

Figure 771: Load a Saved Image .................................................................................. 471

Figure 772: Save a New Image from Image Area ........................................................... 472

Figure 773: Auto-Search & Change Type ...................................................................... 473

Figure 774: Information Bar ....................................................................................... 475

Figure 775: Original Image. ......................................................................................... 476

Figure 776: Displays the Binary Image in Multi-Function Box ....................................... 476

Figure 777: Checks Desired Phase and Adjusts the Weighting ....................................... 476

Figure 778: Inspection Function Dialog Box ................................................................. 477

Figure 779: Image Diagram Functions-1680x1050 ....................................................... 478

Figure 780: Displaying Panel Defect Map .................................................................... 480

Figure 781: Panel Defect Map ...................................................................................... 481

Figure 782: Test Results Dialog ................................................................................... 482

Figure 783: Alarm Setting Dialog Box ......................................................................... 483

Figure 784: PPY Defect Statistics ................................................................................. 483

Figure 785: FPY Defect Statistics ................................................................................. 484

Figure 786: Blank Fields ............................................................................................. 484

Figure 787: Fail Rank .................................................................................................. 485

Figure 788: Example: Defect Tree ................................................................................ 485

Figure 789: Results Screen with Yield & Fail Statistics Hidden ...................................... 486

Figure 790: Results Screen with Yield & Fail Statistics Hidden ...................................... 487

Figure 791: Save JPG FOV Image Dialog ....................................................................... 489

Figure 792: Save JPG FOV Image Dialog ....................................................................... 490

Figure 793: Users Manager Dialog ............................................................................... 491

Figure 794: Users Data Update Dialog ......................................................................... 491

Figure 795: Set a Hint in Language File ........................................................................ 492

Figure 796: Display Hint ............................................................................................. 493

Figure 797: Barcode.config ......................................................................................... 495

Figure 798: Add a New Code in Barcode.config ............................................................ 495

Figure 799: ASCII Table .............................................................................................. 497

Figure 800: Communication Port Setting .................................................................... 500

Figure 801: The Dialog Box for the Successful Communication Setting ......................... 500

Figure 802: The Dialog Box for the Failed Communication Setting ................................ 500

Figure 803: The Flow Chart of Opening a Project in Support Pin Function ..................... 502

Figure 804: The Flow Chart of Saving a Project in Support Pin Function ........................ 503

Figure 805: Saving the Height of Support Pin – PLC Setting 1 ....................................... 504

Figure 806: Saving the Height of Support Pin – PLC Setting 2 ........................................ 504




Test Research Inc.

TR7500 Series User Guide –Software ver. 6.7.0 xxviii




Figure 813: Applying Origin Value to PLC .................................................................... 507

Figure 814: Applying Height Value to PLC .................................................................... 507

Figure 815: Saving Support Pin Data to the Project ...................................................... 507


Figure 817: Adding Pin Information According to the Epac File-Library...................... 509

Figure 818: Loading a File For Auto Add Pin .............................................................. 510

Figure 819: Selecting an Epac File ............................................................................. 510

Figure 820: Auto Add Pin Enabled ............................................................................. 511

Figure 821: The Process of Creating the Pins ............................................................. 511

Figure 822: A Warning Message, “ Cannot Find Matching Componant” ..................... 512


Figure 824: File/ Open Multi-Program ........................................................................ 513

Figure 825: File/ Open Multi-program/ File Selection .................................................. 513

Figure 826: Display Real Time PLC Status ................................................................ 514

Figure 827: Result Dialog Screen ............................................................................... 514

Figure 828: the Cycle Time of the Previous Board ..................................................... 515

Figure 829: Port Settings for Sending Board Width Information to the Plate Turnover Machine in the Next Station ..................................................................................................... 517

Figure 830: Hyper Terminal ........................................................................................ 518

Figure 831: Select Com Port ...................................................................................... 518

Figure 832: Com Port Properties ................................................................................ 519

Figure 833: Disconnect the Link ................................................................................. 519

Figure 834: Viewing the Contents .............................................................................. 520

Figure 835: Properties Settings ................................................................................... 520

Figure 836: ASCII Settigs ............................................................................................. 521

Figure 837: ASCII Settigs ............................................................................................. 521

Figure 838: [Auto Conveyor Width Output/ Send Width to Next Station] ...................... 522

Figure 839: Adding a New RS232 Device .................................................................. 523

Figure 840: RS232 Information .................................................................................. 523

Figure 841: RS232 Information .................................................................................. 524

Figure 842: An Error Message of RS232 Device ........................................................ 524

Figure 843: Enable the [Auto Conveyor Width Output] Function ................................. 525

Figure 844: The Comparsim of Old and New Void UIs ................................................ 526

Figure 845: Port Setting for Sending Signals to Halle-Samlip Magazine ......................... 528

Figure 846: A Successful Message of Sending Signals to Halle-Samlip Magazine ............. 529

Figure 847: An Error Message of Sending Signals to Halle-Samlip Magazine .................. 529

Figure 848: Connecting Status Setting ......................................................................... 531

Figure 849: Fine-Tuning Status Setting ....................................................................... 531

Test Research Inc.

TR7500 Series User Guide –Software ver. 6.7.0 xxix

Figure 850: The Locked Status in Inspection Mode ...................................................... 531

Figure 851: Abnormal Connection Status ..................................................................... 532

Figure 852: Reconnecting Setting ................................................................................ 532

Figure 853: Resending the Light Setting to Inline Machine ............................................ 532

Figure 854: Closing Offline Fine-Tuning Function ........................................................ 533

Figure 855: Different Offline Fine-Tuning Function Setting ........................................... 533

Figure 856: Showing Offline Monitor ........................................................................... 533

Figure 857: Offline Setting .......................................................................................... 534

Figure 858: Alarm Setting (1) ...................................................................................... 535

Figure 859: Alarm Setting (2) ...................................................................................... 535

Figure 860: Clicking Open Link.................................................................................... 536

Figure 861: A Dailog Box of Succesful Open Link .......................................................... 536

Figure 862: Disconnecting the Selected Link ................................................................ 537

Figure 863: Firewall Setting ........................................................................................ 538

Figure 864: Displaying the Result in the Sencond Monitor ............................................ 539

Figure 865: Check Result Dialog Box ........................................................................... 540

Figure 866: Showing Inspection Results in Excel Format .............................................. 541

Figure 867: Selecting Save Library to Excel Function .................................................... 541

Figure 868: Breaker .................................................................................................... 542

Figure 869: Push Reset on HCI to Start X-Y Table ......................................................... 542

Figure 870: Click on Open File Icon, Select Project to Open ........................................... 543

Figure 871: Auto Conveyor Width? .............................................................................. 543

Figure 872: Click Inspect Button ................................................................................. 544

Figure 873: Select Fiducial Mark Alignment ................................................................. 544

Figure 874: Select Fiducial Mark Setting ...................................................................... 545

Figure 875: Close System & Save File ........................................................................... 545

Figure 876: Offline Editor Editing Flow........................................................................ 549

Figure 877: Capture Offline ATPG Data ........................................................................ 550

Figure 878: Clear All data ............................................................................................ 550

Figure 879: Capture Panel Map ................................................................................... 550

Figure 880: Capture FOV Images. ................................................................................ 551

Figure 881: Select Phase ............................................................................................. 551

Figure 882: Continue to Capture FOV Image ................................................................ 551

Figure 883: An FOV size Image .................................................................................... 552

Figure 884: Offline ATPG Editor/ Set Body Size in Map ................................................. 552

Figure 885: Frame the Body Size ................................................................................. 553

Figure 886: Angle Camera Display ............................................................................... 554

Figure 887: Merge ...................................................................................................... 554


Figure 889: Tune Project on Offline Editor ................................................................... 555

Figure 890: Connect AOI with Offline Editor PC............................................................ 557

Test Research Inc.

TR7500 Series User Guide –Software ver. 6.7.0 xxx

Figure 891: Select Offline Editor Path .......................................................................... 558

Figure 892: Inspect Offline Backup FOV Images ........................................................... 558

Figure 893: Inspect Offline FOV Image Dialog .............................................................. 559

Figure 894: Lighting Compensation Parameters ........................................................... 561

Figure 895: Camera Alignment Dialog ......................................................................... 562

Figure 896: Confirm Save Gray Card Position ............................................................... 563

Figure 897: Confirm Perform Lighting Compensation 1 ................................................ 563



Figure 900: Create an OCR Window Flowchart ............................................................. 565

Figure 901: Select OCR Dialog Train Process ................................................................ 566

Figure 902: Tolerance of OCR Boundaries .................................................................... 567

Figure 903: Examples of OCR Boundaries .................................................................... 567

Figure 904: Select Font Type ....................................................................................... 567

Figure 905: Auto-Train Progress Meter ....................................................................... 568

Figure 906: Confirm Train Results ............................................................................... 568

Figure 907: Set Date and Click on Auto-Learning .......................................................... 569

Figure 908: Auto-Learn Progress Meter ....................................................................... 569

Figure 909: Confirm Auto-Training Result ................................................................... 570


Figure 911: Training Result Verify Dialog .................................................................... 572

Figure 912: Manual Train mode .................................................................................. 574

Figure 913: Training Command Details 1 ..................................................................... 575

Figure 914: Training Command Details 2 ..................................................................... 576

Figure 915: Font Training Frame ................................................................................. 578

Figure 916: Framing Thin Character “1” ...................................................................... 579

Figure 917: Framing Alphanumeric Characters Together ............................................. 579

Figure 918: Steps to Add New Font.............................................................................. 580

Figure 919: Input String to Be Taught .......................................................................... 580

Figure 920: Add Multi-Font ......................................................................................... 581

Figure 921: Checksum Conditions ............................................................................... 582

Figure 922: Date-Code List .......................................................................................... 583

Figure 923: Show Font Library .................................................................................... 584

Figure 924: Delete Font Options .................................................................................. 585

Figure 925: Sample Warp Box ..................................................................................... 586

Figure 926: Uniform Background ................................................................................ 586

Test Research Inc.

TR7500 Series User Guide –Software ver. 6.7.0 xxxi

Test Research Inc.

TR7500 User Guide –Software ver. 6.1.0 1

1 INTRODUCTION

1.1 About This Manual

Test Research Inc.’s (TRI’s) TR7500 series are high-speed Automated Optical Inspection (AOI) testers for detecting defects on Printed Circuit Boards and Assemblies (PCBs/PCBAs). By TRI’s dynamic image scanning technology, TRI 7500 can provide clear and stable images for analyzing the defect causes made by PCB assembling manufacturing process, especially in Surface-Mount Technology (SMT).

This manual, TR7500 Users Guide – Software, provides the information about how to use TR7500’s Graphical Users Interface (GUI), TRIAOI.. For convenience purpose, the abbreviation “AOI” is used to represent all TRI’s testers in the rest part of this manual. The specific functions which only can be used in TR7500 series will be marked as “TR7500 only”. If you want to get more specification information, please contact with our sales representatives.

1.2 AOI Introduction

TRI's AOI are designed to meet the need of measuring light, thin and high-density electronic products. Through TRI’s advanced optical image inspection technology, users can effectively find out the defects without any destructive detection such as product fixtures, and IC test. Moreover, compared to non-computer inspection, AOI provides better performances in reducing inspection errors, inspection time, and maintenance cost and increasing the throughput.

TR7500 series uses advanced dynamic image technology that allows users to receive vibration-free images of PCBAs with high speed. Also, it can be used in both pre>post reflow inspections without any additional hardware or software assistants.

Test Research Inc.


1.3 Programming Flow Chart

Figure 1: Programming Flow Chart

1.4 Format Definitions

ModelName*.PRE – A project file.

ModelName*.AOI -- A CAD file that can be read in TRIAOI software directly.

ModelName.BMP – An image of panel map.

Test Research Inc.


ModelName_2x2.BMP -- A 2x2 image of panel map for reviewing 2 times size of image in Results dialog.

ModelName.BMP_8x8 – An 8x8 image of panel map for First Board Check and NonCAD function.

ModelName.PRE.BAK -- A backup file of the project. If the [*.PRE] file is corrupt, users can rename this file’s extension from [*.PRE.BAK] to [*.PRE] and then replace the original .PRE file.

ModelName.PRE.BAK1 –- Another backup file of the project. Using method is the same as .BAK file.

1.5 Optional Equipment

Barcode system -- the selections includes 3 types: one dimension, two dimensions or software (only can read barcode from the top side).

OCR – The abbreviation of Optical Character Recognition. It is a character recognition system which has a font library. The library can verify the characters according to the character features

Auto Conveyor Width System–A system can record conveyor widths and adjust the widths automatically after loading a project. It can save time for adjusting conveyor width.

Support Pin System– A system provide a mechanical support to the measuring PCB>PCBAs. It can support the warpage measurement.

Repair Station – A system for repairing the inspection results. It includes the Repair Station software, the SPC software, a PC and a monitor. The detail functions of Repair Station are listed in the Repair Station Manual. After installing this system, AOI will transfer the inspection results to the Repair Station. It helps users to confirm the test results or modify the inspection conditions. In addition, the SPC software can generate many different kind of statistical reports from the collected inspection data.

Offline Editor -- AOI Offline Editor includes software, a PC and a monitor. It allows users to edit projects without connecting to the AOI testers. Refer to Chapter 8- AOI Standard Project Creation

Test Research Inc.


2 AOI STANDARD PROJECT CREATION

2.1 Creating a Project in ATPG

34) Double click on the icon TRI-AOI to open AOI main program.

Figure 2: Opening the AOI Program

35) Choose [File] > [New Program] to create a new project.

Figure 3: Creating a New AOI File

36) After you select the [New Program], the ATPG flow chart will appear automatically as below. You need to follow the list steps one by one to complete the new project setting. The detail of each step will be described in the following chapters.

Figure 4: List of ATPG Steps

Test Research Inc.


37) Click [Yes] in the dialog box to load a CAD file.

Figure 5: Loading a CAD file

2.2 Creating the Board Information

TRI’s AOI testers only can read an AOI file (*.AOI), so users have to create their own AOI files first by transferring CAD files. There are two types of translators included in the system: FABMaster and Default.

If your file is ASC format (ex.xxxxx.ASC), you can transfer its format from ASC to AOI directly by using FABMaster translator. However, if your file is not ASC format, you have to create a TXT file first by using Text Document in Windows system. In the TXT file, you have to provide the components’ information including all components’ names, X and Y positions, rotation angles, and types. Then, you can transfer the TXT file to AOI file by using Default translator.

Notice: in the TXT file, your components’ names only can include characters, figures or symbols which can be inputted directly from the keyboard. Also, the type of your components only can include characters, figures or symbols which can be inputted directly from the keyboard or underline symbol, “_”. The translator program cannot work correctly if you provide the wrong format contents.

The following steps will describe how to transfer the file in detail.

1) Click [Translator] button to load the program.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 6: Entering the Translator Tool

Test Research Inc.


2) In the translator program, check [AOI translator] and then select the translator type, FABMaster or Default.

Figure 7: Translator Function Dialog Box

3) Specify a file in the [Source File] column.

Browse CAD file path

Select AOI translator

Different Translators for different SMT machine vendors

Test Research Inc.


Figure 8: Selecting a File for Translator

4) Select the same unit as CAD file.

Figure 9: Selecting a Translator Unit

5) Click [Translate] button to run transferring process.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 10: Starting to Transfer the File

6) If the transfer process is successful, the dialog box “Transfer successfully” will appear. Click [OK] to do the next step.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 11: Successful Transferring Message

7) Click [Quit] button to leave the program

Figure 12: Quitting the Translator Program

Test Research Inc.


8) Browse and select the AOI file you created in the column AOI File. (Generally your AOI file will be located in the same folder as your original ASC or TXT format file after the transferring process.)

Figure 13: Specifying a AOI File

9) Click [Load] button.

Figure 14: Loading an AOI File

NOTE: The Translator will be described in Section 4.1.2.

Test Research Inc.


2.3 Editing Component Data

The purpose of this procedure is to edit your component data for fitting the measuring board set on the AOI. If your test board is a single-board, all of your component data will be listed on the table shown as Figure 15. If your test board is a multi-board, the program will only list one board’s component data. For example, for a 4-combination board, the program only display the component data in the upper-left panel (for convenient purpose, we called it Board 1 in the following parts).

1)

Figure 15: Component Data Table

2) Right-click on the component table, the pop-up menu will display. You can edit any component data directly through these functions in the menu. The detail of these functions is shown in Figure 16.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 16: Pop-Up Menu in Component Data Table

3) Select [Board View], and then the top-view component sketch will appear as Figure 17. You can easily check if the component positions are correct and modify the component data.

Figure 17: Choosing Board View Function

Test Research Inc.


Figure 18: Board View -- Finding Component Positions

4) After you make sure the component data is correct, click [Next].

Figure 19: Proceeding to the Next Step in ATPG Process

5) The program will display a dialog box to ask if you want to close the window. Click [OK] to the next step.

Finish board viewer then go to next step

Test Research Inc.


Figure 20: Completing the Edit Board Information Step

Test Research Inc.


2.4 Generating the Multi-Board CAD Data

For a single board, please input “1” in both Col(X) and Row(Y) columns in the Multi-board Setup window, and then click [OK] to the next step, Fiducial Mark Setting (See the detail in section 2.5).

For a multi-board, please follow the steps below to generate a multi-board data.

2.4.1 SETTING THE MULTI-BOARD ARRANGEMENT DATA

1) Input the numbers in Col(X) and Row(Y) based on your measuring board. Figure 21 shows an example for the setting of a 4 (2x2) combination board.

Figure 21: Setting a Multi-Board Program

[Manual box]－When you check it, it means the measuring board is a special panel. The

differences between regular panel and irregular panel are shown in the table below. The default setting is blank in this box.

Regular Panel Irregular Panel

a. A panel that can be described by MxN boards, Including single board.

b. FOV will be arranged in multi-board.

c. Multi-board layout can be changed directly without reprograming.

a. A panel with different kinds of multi-boards, it cannot be described by MxN.

b. FOV will be arranged in a single board.

c. If the multi-board layout is changed, users have to reprogram.

d. Users only have to input the total number of boards.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 22: Setting a Multi-Board Program Manually

2) Because the component data of Board 1 has been set in the Edit Component Data, you only have to set the angle and top or lower side in other panels. The way to change board status is: left click on the panel you want to edit, and then right click to select a function. Press [Ctrl] on the keyboard for selecting multiple panels. Figure 23 shows an example how to rotate the 2 lower panels.

Figure 23: Setting the Board Angle

3) The 2 lower panels are rotated 180 degree successfully as Figure 24.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 24: The Result of Rotating Board Angle

2.4.2 GETTING THE BOARD ROTATION ANGLE (FINDING R1, R2)

Because the CAD file is based on the rectangular coordinate system and the board-in angle is not 0 degree, the system has to calculate the actual board-in angle first. In order to get the accurate board-in angle, the system uses the distance and the angle between one component and another component to measure the angle. Generally, the chip components with the same size are the best choices.

For a single board or a board with two sides, the board-in angle can be measured from the positions of two components on the board. According to the basic physics principle, the best way to set these two reference components is, setting them as far as possible. For example, set one component in the upper-left corner of Board 1, and then set another component in the lower-right corner of Board 1.

For a multi-board, you can use the same method as single board setting to set the Board 1 first, and then set one component in other panel for measuring the board-in angle. Generally, the system will automatically select the same component in other panel to be a reference component. The detail of the setting process is shown below. The example is for a 4(2x2) combination board. You can apply the approach to other situation.

1) Double click on the object component in Board 1.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 25: Selecting an Object Component in Board 1

2) Input the object component name in column Comp Name and then click [OK].

Figure 26: Inputting the Component Name

3) After you click [OK] from the previous step, you will see a top-view from camera shown as Figure 27. Here, you can see a red cross line and a red frame in the middle of the windows. In order to locate the specific component, move the intersection of red cross line to the center of the component and use the red frame to surround the component. There are two ways to move the red frame: one is to use [Motion Control] panel and another is to click right button of the mouse directly.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 27: Locating the Component 1

Figure 28: Motion Control Panel

The detail function of [Motion Control] panel will be described in Section 4.7.

4) Click [Set Component 1] to get the position of first component. The dialog box will show automatically to identify the location of the component. Click [OK] to the find the second component.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 29: Confirming the Setting of Component 1

5) Generally, the system will specify the corresponding second component (R2). If system does not specify, you have to set the second component on Board 1 manually by inputting the component name in the Column Comp Name.

Figure 30: Selecting a Component Manually

6) Using the same approach to locate the second component. . Click [Set Component 2] to get the position of the second component, and then click [OK] to the next step.

Notice: if you want to reset the 1st or 2nd component, you can click [Find Component 1] icon or [Find Component 2] icon to relocate the new component.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 31: Locating the Component 2

Figure 32: Confirming the Setting of Component 2

7) The system will find out the board angle automatically. Click [OK] to confirm the measurement result.

Figure 33: Confirming the Board Angle

Test Research Inc.


2.4.3 FINDING THE SELECTED COMPONENT

The purpose of this step is to measure the gap between each board in the panel. In the following example, we will discuss how to find the selected component on the 4 combination board.

Here, the upper-left board is called Board 1, the upper-right board is called Board 2, the lower-left board is called Board 3, and the lower-left board is called Board 4. Because the component on the Board 1 has already been located in previous steps, you will start to find the components on Board 2, 3 and 4.

Notice: the located board will be displayed in gray color. Select a component on Board 2, right click on the component and select [Locate].

Figure 34: Selecting a Dummy Component in Board 2

1) Move the intersection of the red cross line to the component center, use red frame to surround the component, and click [Set Dummy 1].

Test Research Inc.


Figure 35: Setting a Component for Dummy 1

2) The system will automatically find the position of this component, and the message will appear as below. Click [OK] to confirm the location.

Figure 36: Confirming the Dummy 1 Setting

3) After the setting, the Board 2 will be displayed as Figure 37.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 37: Setting the Dummy in the Second Board

4) Repeat the same approach to find the dummy 2 in Board 3 or Board 4.

Figure 38: Setting the Dummy Component in Other Board

Test Research Inc.


5) The system only needs to find 2 dummy components; the gap in final board will be estimated automatically after you find the dummy components on the other two boards. For example, if you set the dummy 1 in Board 2 and set the dummy 2 in Board 4, you don’t have to locate Board 3. Figure 39 displays the result after you locate all boards.

Figure 39: The Result of Locating Boards

6) Click [Set Board Size] icon.

Figure 40: Setting the Board Size

7) Click [Next] in the menu bar.

8) If you forget to set the board size, the error message will appear as below. Click [OK] and then go setting the board size.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 41: The Warning Message, “Set Board Size First”

2.4.4 SETTING THE BOARD SIZE

The purpose of this step is to identify the measured panel size. If measured panel is a single board, you need to set the upper-left and lower-right positions of the board for it. If measured panel is a multi-board, you only have to set the upper-left and lower-right positions of the board on Board 1.

1) After you click the [Set Board Size] icon, the system will ask you to find the left top position of the board. Move the intersect of red cross line to the upper-left corner of Board 1, and then click [Set Left Top] to get the position.

Figure 42: Setting the Upper-Left Position of the Board 1

2) The system will appear the message below. Click [OK] to the next step.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 43: Confirming the Setting of Board Position

3) Move the intersect of red cross line to the lower-right corner of Board 1, and then click [Set Right Down] to get the position.

Figure 44: Setting the Lower-right Position of Board 1

4) Click [Next] to confirm the previous board size setting.

Test Research Inc.


2.5 Setting the Fiducial Marks

1) The purpose of this step is to offset the board shift. In order to check the board-in position, you have to capture at least 2 fiducial marks’ screenshots. (Here, we recommend having 3 fiducial marks because it can prevent the incorrect measurement results in the board

bending situation.) Click the [Set Fiducial Mark] icon.

Figure 45: Setting the Fiducial Marks

2) There are two ways to set the fiducial marks. One is to set the fiducial marks with CAD, and another one is to set the fiducial marks manually. The detail will be described below.

With CAD

Input the component name and the board number of the fiducial mark and then click [OK]. The system will move to the fiducial mark automatically.

Figure 46: Using the CAD File to Find the First Fiducial Mark

Test Research Inc.


.

Without CAD

Step1. Click [No CAD].

Figure 47: Finding a Fiducial Mark Manually

Step2. Click [OK].

Step3. Move the intersection of red cross line to the position of fiducial mark manually.

If the measured board is a single board with [No CAD] situation, the system will ask the board rotation angle first. The procedure for getting rotation angle is in 2.4.2

Figure 48: Confirming the Rotation Angle

Test Research Inc.


Sometimes, the shape images of fiducial marks are unclear to see in the camera. In this situation,

you have to adjust the light setting manually. Click [Light] icon in the tool bar, and then you can

adjust the light intensity in the Lighting Control Editor windows. The detail of Light Control

Editor windows is shown as below. There are only three steps to adjust the light setting. First,

select [Fiducial0] in the Set Name column. Second, adjust the light intensity. Third, click [Save].

Figure 49: Set Lighting for First Fiducial Mark

4) After setting the light, you can adjust the weighting to get the better screenshots of fiducial marks. Click [Set] in the Menu bar, and then select [Image Weighting] to enter the weighting window. Click [OK] after you set the appropriate weighting.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 50: Setting the Weighting of the First Fiducial Mark

Figure 51: The Weighting Dialog Box

5) Click icon [Get Fiducial Mark].

Figure 52: The Process of Getting the Fiducial Mark

6) A dialog box will appear automatically as below after you click [Get Fiducial Mark] icon.

Test Research Inc.


If the captured screenshot is not clear,

1) Click [Yes].

Figure 53: Confirming to Use Standard Fiducial Mark Image

2) [Select Standard Fiducial Mark] dialog box will appear. Select a clear default image and then click [OK].

Figure 54: Selecting a Standard Fiducial Mark Image

3) The system will provide the X-Y coordinate values of the fiducial mark. Click [OK].

Figure 55: Confirming the Fiducial Mark Coordinates

Test Research Inc.


4) The system will use the selected image as the standard image for searching the 1st fiducial mark.

Figure 56: Completing the Setting of the 1st Fiducial Mark Image

5) If the captured screenshot is clear, click [No].

Figure 57: Not Using Standard Fiducial Mark Image

6) The system will provide the X-Y coordinate values in the current fiducial mark’s position. Click [OK].

Test Research Inc.


Figure 58: Confirming the Fiducial Mark Coordinates

7) The system will capture a screenshot of the fiducial mark your selected and use this screenshot as the standard image to search for the 1st fiducial mark.

Figure 59: Grabbing a Standard Image of the 1st Fiducial Mark

8) Repeat the steps 1) to 6) to set the fiducial mark 2 and 3.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 60: Setting the 2nd Fiducial Mark

9) In the Find second Fiducial mark window, input the component name and board number

of the 2nd fiducial mark and click [OK]. If you don’t know the component information, click

“No CAD” and find a clear mark to be the 2nd fiducial mark manually

Figure 61: Inputting the Name of the 2nd Fiducial Mark

Figure 62: Confirming the 2nd Fiducial Mark Coordinates

Test Research Inc.


Figure 63: Grabbing a Standard Image of the 2nd Fiducial Mark

10) If you want to reset all the fiducial marks, click [Set] on the menu bar, and then select [Clear All FM Data].

Figure 64: Clearing All FM Data

11) After setting all the fiducial marks, click [Next] on the tool bar.

12) The dialog window [Confirm Close Window] will appear. Click [OK].

13) So far, you have completed the first part of programming, creating board information. Notice: The completed steps will be marked . See the example in Figure 66.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 65: Finishing the Fiducial Mark Setting

2.6 Editing the Component Library

The purpose of this procedure is to build a specific system for storing the inspection conditions of each type of the components located on the measured panel (We call “Library” in the rest part of this manual). In this procedure, you have to complete several inspection setting, such as creating inspection boxes, arranging the sizes and locations of the inspection boxes, setting the parameters of the inspection boxes, capturing the components’ images, and so on. The inspection conditions data is saved under the folder [C:\AOI\TRI_USERS_LIB].

1) At the lower-left side of [WorkSpace], change the page from Program Wizard to [Tune]. In the Tune model, click [Library], and then double click label [Component Type]. The system will find the fiducial marks first automatically and then list all component types under the label [Component Type].

Test Research Inc.


Figure 66: Entering the Component Library

2) When entering [ATPG>Library], a dialog box will appear as Figure 68. If there is a type listed on the [Secondary Name] of [Name Index], the system will ask automatically if you want to change the type name to the corresponding [Primary Name]. To change, select [Yes].

Figure 67: Confirming the Primary Name Change

3) On the component type list, the component type with a blue mark means the inspection conditions have been set completely in this component type. On the other hand, the components with red mark means the inspection conditions have not been set in this component type. For example, in Figure 69, the inspection conditions of component type 402, SOIC20, YC12 have been set. However, the inspection conditions of other components haven’t been set.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 68: The Component Type List

4) You can click any component type on the list to review or edit the component inspection condition.

Figure 69: Reviewing a Specified Component in Component Library

5) The detail of inspection setting (or called Library setting) will be described in Section 4.9.

6) If all the inspection conditions have been set, close the dialog box and go back to the next ATPG step.

Test Research Inc.


2.7 Merging the Component Library with the Board Information

The purpose of this procedure is to merge the CAD file with the corresponding Library.

1) Click [Merge All] icon to merge all component types or click [Merge Component Type] icon to merge the selected component types only.

Figure 70: Merging the Selected Components

2) Because the merging process will overwrite the previous inspection condition setting, a dialog message will appear. Click [Yes] to confirm the new setting or click [No] to keep the original setting.

Figure 71: Confirming the Merge Setting

3) Click [OK] in the dialog box “Merge [OK]!!” On the right side of windows, the system will list the merging situation. If the merging process is successful, the component types will be marked in blue. On the other hand, the component types with incorrect merging process will be marked in red or yellow.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 72: Completing the Merging Process

4) Click [Next] to the next step.

Test Research Inc.


2.8 Generating FOV Images

The purpose of this procedure is to allocate the field of views (FOVs) on the measured panel. The project will inspect the board based on the FOV arrangement.

1) If the board map does not exist, the system will ask you to capture it first. Click [OK] to the next step.

Figure 73: Capturing the Board Map

2) The system will capture the board map automatically. After capturing successfully, the system will appear a dialog box as below. Click [OK] to the next step.

Figure 74: The Successful Message of Capturing Board Map

3) A [FOV Generation Function] dialog box will appear as Figure 76. There are four types of FOV allocation you can select. The detail of each selections is described below. Click [OK] after you check the selections.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 75: Setting FOV Distribution Rules

[Locating IC pin first] – The system will use FOVs as less as possible to inspect IC pins

[Auto Locating in Y-direction]– The system will shift FOVs in Y direction automatically if necessary.

[Windows auto separated by cutting] – If an inspection window range exceeds one FOV, the system will generate extra inspection boxes according to the number of FOVs that the inspection boxes covers. For example, one inspection box range is over 3 FOVs, the system will generate 2 more inspections windows.

[Move Windows in the Edge of FOV] – The system will move inspection boxes automatically when the distance between inspection boxes and FOV edge is less the setting value. It will prevent the inspections windows from locating in the FOV edge.

4) When the board gap is too short and the component locations are too closed, the density of FOV allocations will be really high. The system has to slow down the inspection speed in order to generate better FOV allocations. When the following dialog box appears, you have 3 choices.

Figure 76: The Warning Message of Generating FOVs

1. Click [OK]: the system will slow down the scanning and inspecting speed. The FOV allocation will be the same as original setting. However, it takes longer inspect time.

2. Click [Cancel]: the scanning and inspecting speed will keep the same as original, but the FOV allocation will be set as a panel. It means that the parameters [By Set] cannot be applied afterward in the programming process.

Test Research Inc.


3. Go back to Library. Review the components which are located in the edge of FOVs. Try to reduce the size of the inspection boxes and see if the problem will be solved.

5) The system will ask if you want to run the [Two Panel Mode] function. This function can save time for scanning fiducial marks. When this function is running, the system will quick scan the 1st panel without analyzing the data of fiducial marks. The system will do the 1st panel data analysis while the system is inspecting the 2nd panel. Moreover, this function only works when the multi-fiducial function is used. Because the function occupies huge memory, it is recommended for small board use. If the panel is too big, the system will face the problems such as memory lack and the system restarting. Click [OK] if you want to use it or [Cancel] to quit.

Figure 77: A Dialog Box of Selecting Two Panel Mode

If [Two Panel Mode] function is running, the system will ask if you want to find fiducial mark 1 (FM0) in order to calculate the shift of stopping position.

Figure 78: A Dialog Box of Locating Scan Lines

6) If the multi-fiducial function is not used or the fiducial marks cannot be allocated in FOVs, the following dialog box will appear. Click [OK].

Figure 79: The Failed Message of Merging FM

Test Research Inc.


Figure 80: The Failed Message of Running Two Panel Mode

7) The system will ask if you want to capture all FOV images. Click [OK] to confirm the process or click. [Cancel] to skip it.

Figure 81: Selecting to Capture FOVs Automatically

When a new project runs at the first time, the system will do state-dynamic compensation. The system will capture FOV images for three times. At the first time, it will use standard speed to capture the images. At the second time, it will use slower speed to capture the images. Finally, the system will find the new capturing position based on the compensation results and then capture the images in the standard speed.

If you want to cancel the compensation, set 0 in the [FovPosCalibration] column under Windows Registry. On the other hand, if you want to use the function, set 1. The value of [FovPosCalibrationStaticSpeed] under Windows Registry means the scanning and inspecting speed at the second time.

8) If you click [OK] in the previous step, the following dialog box will appear. Click [Yes]. The system will check, in any FOV, if there is any image which is similar to the captured image in Library. If the similar image exists, the system will apply all the inspection boxes setting on this similar image. Click [No] if you don’t want to use the relocate process described above.

Figure 82: Selecting to Relocate Inspection Boxes

9) After the setting, the system will display the FOV allocation on the board map as Figure 84.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 83: Displaying All FOV Allocations on the Board Map

10) Click [Next] to confirm the FOV allocation setting.

11) Click [OK] to close the FOV generate windows.

Test Research Inc.


2.9 Verifying FOV Images

In this process, the system will list the information of the panel. You can get the FOV information from the list.

12) Click [Next] in the tool bar to confirm FOV verify process.

Figure 84: The Main Window of Verifying FOV Images

13) A dialog box will appear as below. Click [OK] to close the FOV information windows.

Figure 85: The Main Window of Verifying FOV Images

14) When all the process have done, click [ ] button at the upper-right corner of ATPG windows to return to the main windows. .

Test Research Inc.


Figure 86: Completing All ATPG Process

Test Research Inc.


2.10 Train Mode

The purpose of this step is to check if all the inspection boxes have been set correctly in each of the components.

1) Click [Train] icon to enter the train mode.

Figure 87: Entering the Train Mode

The main screen will appear as below.

Figure 88: The Main Window of Train Mode

Click Train

Test Research Inc.


2) Here, you can review all the FOVs in sequence. Click [INSPECT] button or press hotkey [I] on the key board to see the inspection results in each inspection window.

3) You can modify the inspection box setting in the train mode if necessary. The most common used functions are listed below::

Add inspection boxes

Add alternative images

Adjust the size and the position of the inspection boxes

Set the search range

Set pass level

Change the light setting of FOVs

Add or delete FOV

Set [Warp] boxes

4) Generally, you can check [Untrained] and click [Next] to look for untrained inspection boxes.

Figure 89: The Tool Bar for Finding FOVs

5) After you confirm all the inspection boxes setting in the FOVs, click [OK] to close the [Train] mode.

Test Research Inc.


2.11 Fine-Tuning Mode

The purpose of this step is to double check and modifies the inspection box setting.

1) Choose [Inspection > Inspect Fov Images]

2) The test result will be shown as Figure 91.

Figure 90: Inspect Result Window in Fine-tuning Mode

3) Click [Next] to review the failed inspection boxes in sequence or input the component number to see the specific inspection box.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 91: Reviewing Failed Images by Number

4) Click on the failed inspection boxes in the FOV image or click the component name in the component list, the system will display the failed information. .

Figure 92: Confirming Failed Components

Test Research Inc.


5) If you want to modify the inspection box setting, use the tool bar to do fine-tuning process.

Figure 93: Fine-Tuning Tool Bar

6) After the fine-tuning process, click [Insp.] or press hotkey [I] to check the new inspection result.

Figure 94: Inspection Results in Fine-Tuning Mode

7) After you have done the fine-tuning process for all failed inspection boxes, click button [Save prj.].

8) Click [Close &Stop] to close the result dialog.

9) Choose [Operation > Confirm Mode] and click [Insp.] to inspect the whole board by real time images.

10) Repeat the steps 1) to 8) until the inspection result is stable.

11) Start to inspect the real panels.

Test Research Inc.


2.12 Selecting a Applied Type

During the Train or Fine-tuning process, a dialog box will appear as below every time when you change the inspection box setting. The detail of these selections will be described below.

Figure 95: A Dialog Box of Selecting an Applied Type

[Only for this] – The new setting will only apply to the selected component.

[By Board] – The new setting will apply to all the components with the same name on the panel. See the example below. If you change the setting in component C1 and select this function, the new setting will apply to the component C1 on other boards.

Figure 96: Applied Type: By Board

[By Camera] – The new setting will apply to the component with the same camera.

[By Set] – The new setting will apply to other components with the same set. See the example below.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 97: Applied Type: By Set

[By Type (Same Name)] – The new setting will apply to other components which have the same name.

[By Type (Same Algorithm)] – The new setting will apply to other components which use the same algorithm.

[By Component] – The new setting will apply to other same type of the inspection boxes in this component.

[For all type] – The new setting will apply to all components on the panel.

[Set to library] – The current setting will be saved to Library as the default setting.

Test Research Inc.


3 MENU BAR INTRODUCTION

3.1 File Tab

Figure 98: AOI Menu Bar – File Tab

3.1.1 OPENING A PROGRAM

Select [File > Open program], and then you can open an old file from your computer. If the project loads successfully, the system will create a backup automatically. The format of the backup file is [*pre.BAK1]. When the old project file is corrupt, you can use the backup file to replace it by changing the extension of the backup file name from *pre.BAK1 to *pre.

3.1.2 SAVING A PROGRAM

Select [File > Save program As], and then you can save the current project to the specific folder in your computer. If the project saves successfully, the system will create a backup automatically. The format of the backup file is [*pre.BAK]. When the old project file is corrupt, you can use the backup file to replace it by changing the extension of the backup file name from *pre.BAK to *pre. . If the saving process has any problem, a “warming” dialog box will appear and the system will not save any backup file. In this situation, contact to TRI FAE directly

During the saving process, if you have changed the [Test>Untest] property of the component, the system will display the components that have changed the [Test>Untest] property and you can edit the version of this setting by Version Controller. See the example in Figure 99. In the [Current Version] field, you can select an existing version to save or input a new version directly.

Test Research Inc.


The system lists the [Test>Untest] property, component type and the merged situation after doing [Check AOI] of all components that have changed [Test>Untest] property between loading the project and saving it. [Save To File] is to save the data to [C:\AOI\VersionController.txt]. You should note that all the operations in [Current Version] cannot be recovered.

Figure 99: File Tab – Version Controller

3.2 View Tab

Figure 100: AOI Menu Bar – View Tab

The functions of [View Tab] are described below.

Test Research Inc.


[Toolbars] － Displays AOI toolbar on the table.

Figure 101: AOI Toolbar

[Status Bar] － Displays the current status.

[Yield Display] － Displays the inspection yield rate.

[Language] － Sets the system language. The OS default setting is English.

3.3 Parameter Tab

Figure 102: AOI Menu Bar – Parameter Tab

The functions of [Parameter Tab] are described below.

3.3.1 USER MODE

The functions of [User Mode] are described as below.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 103: AOI Menu Bar – Parameter Tab>User Mode

3.3.1.1 Link to Repair Station

When this item is selected, the system will send the inspection results to the repair station automatically. However, if the system does not connect to the repair station, the inspection result will be saved under the folder [C:\AOI_Repair_Data].

3.3.1.2 Link to Offline Editor

When this item is selected, the system will send the inspection results to the Offline Editor automatically. This item displays [Link to Machine?] when the value of [Offline] under Windows Registry is set 1. See the detail in Chapter 8 .

3.3.1.3 Operator Mode/Engineer Mode

You can select [Operator Mode] or [Engineer Mode] to run a project. The initial setting will be the same as the previous user setting. In the [Operator Mode], you have no authority to edit the project. The default password for changing from [Operator Mode] to [Engineer Mode] is 7100.

3.3.1.4 Link to Control Center

When [Link to Control Center] is selected (in both enabled or disabled), the AOI main PC will send a “Reset” signal to the PLC and Repair Station.

When this item is selected, the tested board will have different deliver ways based on the test result. If the test result is “PASS”, the board will be sent to the next station directly; if the test result is “FAIL”, the board will stay in the conveyor and wait for the confirmation from Repair Station. See more detail in the chapter Control Center.

Test Research Inc.


3.3.1.5 RS Confirm One by One

When this item is selected, the conveyor will not deliver the inspected board until the inspected board is confirmed by Repair Station. Before running this function, [Link to Repair Station?] should be selected first.

After the function is selected, the inspected board will not be delivered directly after the inspection, unless one of the following conditions occurs.

Repair Station sends a board-out signal. (The file name is [onebyone.txt].)

Press [ESC] on the keyboard to quit the inspection process.

3.3.1.6 Server Mode/ Client Mode

When [Client Mode] is selected, you only can revise the program but cannot save it. (You only can save the revised contents after you verify them in [Server Mode]). This function can prevent the program change from other users.

When this function is selected, the following setting is recommended: Set one PC as a Server Mode and save all the projects in it, and then set other AOIs in [Client Mode].

1) Client Mode

Step1. Choose [Parameter> Client Mode].

Step2. Specify a path for saving Server Mode project.

Step3. Open a file from the setting path set in the step 2.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 104: Project Management Dialog Windows in Client Mode

Step4. Start to edit the project. The available functions are listed as below.

Main Program

Set pass level

Untrained box

Add 1 box

Del box

Test/untested box

Test/untested component

Link/unlink box

Add/delete warp

Set search range

Set weighting

Test Research Inc.


Add alternative

Edit component

Set lighting

Library

Set property

Set passlevel

Set weighting

Link/unlink box

Add/remove alternative

Step5. As mentioned before, you cannot save the file in the [Client Mode]. When you click [Save], the warning dialog box will appear as below. Click [Yes] to the next step.

Figure 105: An Error Message in Client Mode

2) Server Mode

Step1. Choose [Parameter > Server Mode].

Step2. Check [Client Request Project], and then the system will display the projects which have already edited in Client PCs. Select a wanted project name and click OK to open the file.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 106: Project Management Dialog Windows in Server Mode

Step3. After open the file, you will see a dialog box as below which provides the edited information.

Figure 107: Edited Information Dialog windows in Server Mode

Test Research Inc.


After you highlight the edited item, you will see the editor name in the edited date in the [Date] column and the editor name in the [Engineer] column.

You can select the Client PC (AOI) in the [AOI Machine ID] column.

Check either [Project] or [Library] to see the related edited information.

If you want to permit the edited item, check the box next to the item and click [Check In].

In this dialog box, the right part window shows the alternative component image. When the item is selected, the system will move FOV to the position of the selected component automatically.

3.3.2 SYSTEM

Figure 108: Parameter Tab – System Function

3.3.2.1 Halt Machine when Repeat Fail

When an inspection box has repeated errors and is over the error limitation setting, the AOI will stop inspecting and show a “warming” dialog box. specific. In the [Inline] mode, when the AOI stops working and the signal tower shows in red light and make an alarm, you have to click Confirm on the screen to resume testing. When this item is selected, you can see all the component types and inspection boxes in the dialog box. You can set the value for repeated error limitation in column [Repeat Count]. The default value is 5 times. (It means, if the inspection boxes occurs repeated errors more than 5 times, the system will alarm.).. You also can decide which type of inspections windows does not need to calculate the repeated errors. After you select these inspection windows, the repeated error limitation value of them will be 0.

Check [Enable] at upper-left corner of dialog box to enable the function. When the function is enabled, you can click [Reset] to reset all the limitations of repeated errors. Click [OK] to confirm your setting.

Notice: if you do not check the [Enable] before setting, the edited limitations of repeated errors will not be saved after you click [OK].

Test Research Inc.


Figure 109: Setting Halt Machine Test Count

A warning dialog box will appear as below when the repeated error occur more the than the edited limitation.

Figure 110: A Warning Message for Halt Machine When Repeat Fail

3.3.2.2 Halt Machine when Fiducial Fail

When the item is selected, the system will stop working if the system cannot find the fiducial marks on the measured panel. A warming dialog box will appear as below. Click [OK] and try to find the fiducial marks manually. When the item is selected in [Inline] mode, the AOI will stop working and the signal tower will show in red light and make an alarm. Click [Confirm] to exit the board.

Figure 111: A Warning Message for Halt Machine When Fiducial Fail

3.3.2.3 Halt Machine when Barcode Fail

When the item is selected, the system will stop running if the barcode is failed. A warming dialog box will appear as below.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 112: A Warning Message of Halt Machine When Barcode Fail

When the item is selected in [Inline] mode, the AOI will stop working and the signal tower will show in red light and make an alarm. Click [Confirm] to exit the board.

If there is only one set of barcode for the measured panel, a dialog box will appear as below. You can input the barcode directly in [Key in Barcode] column.

Figure 113: A Dialog Box for Inputting Barcode

3.3.2.4 Halt Machine when Abnormal Fail_board Rate

If this item is selected, the system will stop running and show a warming dialog box as below when the failed board percentage value is over the limitation setting. Click [OK] to continue inspection process.

Figure 114: A Warning Dialog Box of Halt Machine When Abnormal Fail_board Rate

3.3.2.5 Inverse Pass/Fail Output Signal

In the default setting, the output signal of the test result [PASS] is “shortage” and the output signal of [FAIL] is “open circuit”. When this item is selected, the output signal will be reversed. The default password is 7100.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 115: A Dialog Box for Inputting Password

3.3.2.6 Set Share Library Item

When this function is enabled, the alternative images can be shared and used by all projects.

Figure 116: Setting Share Library Item

1) Alternative Image

[Add an alternative image]: When you add an alternative image in a project, a dialog box will appear and ask if you want to save the image to Library. If you click [Yes], the new alternative image will be saved in both all the project and Library In this case, the alternative image is called “global image”. However, if you click “No”, the new alternative image will only be saved to the current project. In this case, the alternative image is called “local image”.

[Delete an alternative image]: When you delete an alternative image in a project, the system will appear a dialog box to ask if you want to delete the image from Library. If you select [Yes],

Test Research Inc.


the alternative image will be deleted in both all the projects and Library. If you select [No], the system will only deletes the alternative image from the current project.

[Auto refreshing alternative images when loading a project]: When this item is selected, the system will automatically refresh all the global images in the projects based on the images in Library

Test Research Inc.


Example:

See Figure 113.The system has Project A and Project B. In this example, image 1is the global image. Image 2 and 3 are the local images for Project A, and Image 4 and 5 are the local images for Project B.

Project A Project B Library

Image 1 Image 1 Image 1

Image 2 Image 4

Image 3 Image 5

Figure 113: Share Library – Explanation 1

When you want to add an alternative image 2 in the Project A,

(1). If you click “Yes” in the dialog box dialog box, the system status will be shown as below. The alternative image 2 will exist in both Project B and Library




Image 3 Image 4

Image 5


.

(2). If you click t “No” in the dialog box, the system status will be shown as below. The alternative image 2 will only exist in Library.




Image 3 Image 5


Following the previous steps, when you want to delete an alternative image 1 in the Project A,

Test Research Inc.


(1). If you click “Yes” in the dialog box, the system status will be shown as below. The alternative image 1 will be deleted in the Project A, Project B and Library.



Image 3 Image 5


(2). If you click t “No” in the dialog box, the system status will be shown as below. The alternative image 2 will only be deleted in the Project 1and Library.


Image 1


Image 3 Image 5


2) Passlevel, RGB Weighting, Search Range, Test/Untest, Inverse Logic, Size and Position (only for child box), Fail String

When this function is selected, the edited items will be uploaded to Library automatically. Also, when you open a project, all the setting in Library will be applied to the inspection boxes in the project automatically. When the function is enabled, you only can edit the parameters in [By Type]. If the component does not exist in Library, nothing will be applied.

3.3.2.7 Set Share Library Path

There are two ways to set your shared library path. The details of them are described below.

[Merge Path]: After checking [Merge Path], the system will use the same library which you use when you are editing.

[Specific path]: specifies a path for the shared library. it could be the network disc or local disc. You also can assign an internet location or a local disc.

Figure 121: Specific Path Setting

Test Research Inc.


3.3.3 PANEL PARAMETER

3.3.3.1 Bar Code Tab

Figure 122: Panel Parameter Screen – Bar Code Tab

1) Function

[Setting] – Enters to the Barcode Setting dialog box.

[Barcode count in one panel] – Inputs a number of barcodes for the measured panel.

[Panel input direction] – Selects the input direction, [From left side] or [From right side].

[Train Prefix & Suffix] – This function is to set the prefix and suffix automatically by scanning a barcode. The default prefix and suffix are .STX and .ETX, but sometimes customers’ handy barcode cannot set .STX and .ETX successfully; then they can use this function to set the prefix and suffix successfully.

Test Research Inc.


Required version: TRAOI 3.8 or above.

The setting will disable after the TRAOI program is closed. You should train the prefix and suffix every time after executing the program.

Procedure:

Step 1. Select [Parameter/ Panel/ Train Prefix & Suffix].

Step 2. After the following dialog appears, the handy barcode will be triggered. It means the system is waiting for the user to scan a barcode.

Figure 123: Train Prefix & Suffix Setting 1

Displays the handy barcode reader information. A.

Check to use the USB handy barcode reader. B.

Step 3. After the system reads a barcode, the code will be displayed in [Barcode String] field. Users can click [Find Prefix & Suffix] button to set the prefix and suffix automatically.


Test Research Inc.


Display the barcode the system is currently reading. If there is a special character, the A.system also displays it. (The special characters are ASCII Codes 0-31).

[Find Prefix & Suffix] button. B.

Step 4. The system will display the prefix and suffix it judges automatically. In this case, the prefix is [STX] and suffix is [ETX].


Step 5. If the system judges failed, you should input the prefix and suffix manually by clicking [Edit].


Step 6. The system will display the special character table as below.

Test Research Inc.



Special character table (ASCII Code 0-31). After double click on the table, the selected A.special character will be listed in the editing field.

Display the current selected special character. B.

Clear the editing field. C.

Step 7. After the setting is finished, click [Train]. The system will update the setting automatically.

Step 8. After the training, a dialog will appear as below. Click [Yes] if you want to confirm the Prefix and Suffix setting.

Test Research Inc.



[Check Barcode] –Checks to start the function of reading barcode. It must read barcode before inspecting.

[H/W Barcoder on Bottom] – Only for special case, see more information in Section Related Application for Multi-barcode Layout.

[Barcode Sticker on Bottom] –Only for special case, see more information in Section Related Application for Multi-barcode Layout.

[Skip board out when barcode fail] – When this item is checked, the system reads the barcode failed, the PCB will be sent out without inspection.

[Enable handy barcode pre-scan function] – The function only works when using handy barcode. User can pre-scan a barcode before the barcode-scanning dialog appears, and the pre-scanned barcode will be applied to the next board inspected.

[Assign Barcode]– Assigns the sequence of barcodes manually.

You can specify the corresponding barcode for each board on a panel. For example, the barcode reader reads four barcodes, and they are 004, 003, 002, and 001. If the function is not enabled, the barcode for Board 1 to Board 4 are in order of 004, 003, 002, and 001; if the function is enabled, the barcode for Board 1 to Board 4 could be specific in order of 004, 003, 002, and 001. The procedure is described below.

Step4. Check the items to enable the functions.

Figure 129: Setting Assign Barcode

Step5. After the items are checked, the system will show a dialog box as below. You can assign the barcode sequence.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 130: Barcode Assignment Dialog Box

Step6. After right clicking on the board, a dialog box will appear as Figure 131. You can input the number manually based on the need. The number cannot be over the total barcode count. For example, you cannot input 5 in the column when the total barcode number is 4. If you input the wrong number, a dialog box will appear as Figure 132.

Figure 131: Setting Barcode Count

Test Research Inc.


Figure 132: An Error Message When the Setting Count is Wrong

Enable Barcode Tokenizer– Sets the separator for long-string barcodes (XXX-XXXXX-XXX). One number grouping can be chosen from [Assign multi-board by reading one barcode] function. Then, the system will show the complete barcode string.

Required version: TRAOI 3.8 or above

Example: The system reads a barcode [97G-B001022-X-K4CC2], set the separator [-] and take the second group to do [Assign multi-board by reading one barcode]. The system will display the barcodes as [97G-B001022-X-K4CC2, 97G-B001023-X-K4CC2, 97G-B001024-X-K4CC2, etc.].

Procedure:

Step 1. Select [Parameter/ Panel] and check [Enable Barcode Tokenizer]. The parameter will be recorded in the project.

Step 2. Click [Setting].

Figure 133: Enable Barcode Tokenizer

Test Research Inc.


Step 3. Input the separator in [Separator] field and the select the wanted group. The separator cannot be [@], because [@] has been used to be the default to separate multi-barcodes.

Figure 134: Enable Barcode Tokenizer Setting

Step 4. After setting is finished, the system displays the results. In this sample case, the system will take the third section contents to generate the other barcodes. Refer to the figure below.

Figure 135: Enable Barcode Tokenizer-Result

[Assign multi-barcode by reading one barcode] – Assigns the multiple barcodes by reading one barcode when the barcode arrangement is regular. If the test board is sent from the left side to the machine, the system will read the barcode on the upper-right corner of the board. On the other hand, if the test board is sent from the right side to the machine, the system will read the barcode on the upper-left corner of the board. See the illustration in Figure 136. (Please set the arrangement in [Multi Barcode Layout] before using this function.)

Test Research Inc.


Figure 136: Panel Input Direction from Left or Right

[Multi Barcode Layout] – Sets the barcode layout. This function only can be used when the value in [Barcode count in one panel] is greater than 1. The setting dialog box is shown as Figure 137. The function of each item is described below.

Manual Setting

[Set Barcode Manually] – Sets the coding method of barcode manually.

[Use Double Digits as Board Index] –Skips the end two digits of the barcode number that has read.

[Change Barcode]– Inputs the end number of barcode for each board. The relative application is in the next section, Relative Application for Multi-barcode Layout.

[Decimal/Hex/36digit] – Sets the barcode type.

[Enable Setup Prefix Characters/ Set Last Variable Number of Characters] –If the barcode is ABC1234500001, the [ABC12345] might be the lot number and it will not be changed during production; only the following [00001] is the serial number and it is accumulate by Decimal. In this case, user can enable the [Enable Setup Prefix Characters] and set the [Set Last Variable of Characters] to 5. The function is the same in all kinds of number generation.

[Barcode layout] – Sets the corresponding layout of the multi-board.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 137: Multi-Barcode Layout Setting Dialog Box

2) Related Application for Multi-barcode Layout

Create barcodes by reading one barcode, and diagnose which side is the top of the inspection panel.

This is for you to specify the last 2 digits of the barcode on each board (BoardInfo/ m_iBoardNumber) and save the setting in the [*.PRE] file. The system will determine the side (top or bottom) of current inspected board according to the scanned barcode number, then change the [Barcode List].

If customer uses the hardware barcode and it reads the barcode on the bottom side, the position of the hardware barcode should be set.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 138: Check H/W Barcode on Bottom

Step7. Check [Assign Multi Barcode].

Figure 139: Multi Barcode Assignment Setting

Step8. Check [Set Board Number Manually].

Test Research Inc.


Figure 140: Manual Barcode Setting

Step9. Set [Barcode Number] manually (words, space and repeat are forbidden).

Test Research Inc.


Figure 141: Board Number Setting Dialog Box

Step10. Click [OK].

Step11. The system will check the latest two digits and sees if the code has been set. If the code is not found, a warning dialog box will appear as Figure 142. Also, the system will apply the barcode string by case 1 method. On the other hand, if the barcode setting is successful, the system will display the barcode arrangement as Figure 143.

Figure 142: A Error Message, “Cannot Find the Barcode”

Test Research Inc.


Figure 143: The Successful Multi-Barcode Layout Setting Result

Step12. If the code is found, the system will generate the corresponding barcode string according to the side of the board.

Test Research Inc.


[Assign multi-barcode by reading one barcode] - the system will assign the barcode strings sequence automatically based on the board side, top or bottom. Also, the system can measure the rotation angle of the board (0 or 180 degree) according to the barcode location. This function requires you to input the latest digital number manually. The setting process is shown as below.

Figure 144: Board Rotation Angle Measurement Setting

Procedure:

Step1. Check [Assign multi-barcode by reading one barcode] and then click [Multi Barcode Layout] to set the end digits of barcode.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 145: Setting [Assign multi-barcode by reading one barcode] function

Step2. The panel input direction will affect the measurement of board rotation, so the direction should be assigned first. Only when the [Set Barcode Manually] function is enabled in [Assign multi-barcode by reading one barcode], the board rotation angle can be measured.

Figure 146: Multi-Barcode Layout Dialog

Example

Step1. Open a project and enter the setting dialog.

Step2. Input the end digit for each board manually.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 147: Input the end digit for each board manually

Step3. Hardware barcode reader reads barcodes in order of 09260047, …

Step4. The result is listed in the following dialog. Because the barcode with 7 as the last digit belongs to the first row, the system judges the panel is 0 degree.

Figure 148: Show Barcode Dialog – 0 degree

Step5. The result is listed in the following dialog. Because the barcode with 5 as the last digit belongs to the last row, the system judges the panel is 180 degree.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 149: Show Barcode Dialog – 180 degree

3) Barcode Setting Steps

Figure 150: Barcode Setting Dialog

Test Research Inc.


Step1. Make sure the Barcode is detected in COM3. If it displays [COM3, 1 SICK] as in the above Figure, it is normal. If it does not display [COM3, 1 SICK], click [Retry Com] to search again. If you still cannot find it, you need to check the hardware and see if it is in good order.

Step2. If the “quiet zone” is too narrow (as shown in the following Figure), the barcode will be difficult to be identified. Select [Narrow Quiet Zone].

Figure 151: Barcode “Quiet Zone”

Step3. Click [To Laser On] button to start the laser and adjust the scanner so that the laser and the barcode to be scanned are at the position shown in the following Figure.

Figure 152: Barcode Laser Scan Position

Step4. If the barcode space is too small, the scanner can be turned to an angle to facilitate the reading as shown in the following Figure

Figure 153: Scanner Adjusted to Read Barcode

Step5. When the barcode position is certain, click [S0 Focus] to maintain the barcode at a fixed position and let the scanner read its focus and frequency. When done, the system will buzz. The focus and the frequency are also changed automatically.

Step6. If it is a dual barcode, the position of the scanner must still be positioned well, and then click [S1 Focus] to set the focus and the frequency for Scanner 1.

Test Research Inc.


Step7. After setting Scanner 1, click [Download to SICK] button to save the setting in the Scanner.

4) Detailed Explanation of Barcode Setting

Fill in [Num. of Barcodes] the total number of barcodes necessary to be read. (For example, if each of two Scanners reads two barcodes, this column is filled in 4)

The default value for [Resolution] is 20. The smaller the number, the better the resolution. Normally, this value does not have to be changed. If the barcode material is so special that it is hard to read, this value should be adjusted to make it easier for reading.

Fill in the bit number of the barcode in [Barcode Length]. After you set the bit number, the scanner can only read the barcode with the number you have set. If there are many kinds of barcodes on a board, you can use this set number to screen out the correct barcode to read. The default value of 0 means no limit for bit number.

[Trigger Mode] – Selecting [Trigger Ext.] means that the laser turns on only when an external trigger occurs. Selecting [Trigger Free] means that the laser of barcode scanner is always on. Selecting [Off-Line] means that the SICK Barcode is triggered automatically according to the number of barcodes. The time for every trigger is about 2 seconds. Since it is an independent action for every scanning, the barcode scanner will read the same barcode twice or more when the scanner reads the same barcode.

[First In First Out] - means the data on the barcode first read will first be sent out, while [Last In First Out] means the data last read will first be sent out. [Output By Barcode Position] means it depends on the barcode position, data near the Scanner will first be sent out.

[Interlace Output] - For dual scanners; this should be selected if the barcodes are to be read in sequence as shown in the following Figure.

Figure 154: Interlaced Barcodes, Dual Scanners

5) Handy Barcode Scanner Setting

Step1. This requires a USB-to-RS232 adapter cable. The USB connector has to be connected with the main PC and the RS232 connector has to be connected with the Handy Barcode Scanner. In addition, there is a power cable to be connected to the scanner.

Test Research Inc.


Step2. Set the COM Port to [COM6].

Step3. Select [Check Barcode] and input the number of the barcode to be read.

Figure 155: Panel Parameter – Bar Code Tab Check Bar Code

Step4. When the system starts to inspect, the following barcode reading window will be displayed.

Figure 156: Barcode Reader Window

Step5. If [Manual keyin barcode string] is checked, the user can input the barcode by the keyboard.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 157: Barcode Reader Window

3.3.3.2 Multi-Board

Figure 158: Panel Parameter –Multi-board Tab

Test Research Inc.


[Auto Skip Setting] –Sets a percentage for auto skip. If the failed percentage is over the setting value here, the measured panel will be regarded as an invalid board. If the measured panel has many components, higher value of auto skip setting is recommended. On the other hand, you should set auto skip setting value smaller when the measured panel has fewer components]

[Check Auto Skip] – enables the check auto skip function.

3.3.3.3 Panel Info Tab

Figure 159: Panel Parameter – Panel Info Tab

[Model Name] – Inputs the model name. The default setting is the same name as the loading AOI file. (Even though you change the project name, it will still keep the same one.)

[Board Side] – Decides the measured panel is top or bottom side.

Test Research Inc.


[Current Version] –Sets a component version for the test panel After you input the version numbers and click [OK], you can see your setting on the upper-right of the title bar.

Figure 160: Project Version in Title Bar

You also can find the current software version in the [Version] column.

[Delete This Version] – deletes the beta version. when you open a beta version, you can delete it by this item. .

[Lot No.] – Inputs the lot number. The number can be used for searching panels in the Repair Station.

[Board Out While Finish Scanning] – Enables to export the measured panel automatically after the test has finished.

Test Research Inc.


3.3.3.4 Auto Link Tab

You can assign several paths under this page such as test program link, inspect result link, and ICT/ATE input link.

Figure 161: Panel Parameter – AutoLink Tab

[Enable Auto Link] – Enables the link to ICT/ATE machine.

[Test Program Link Path] – Assigns a *.aip test program data to the ICT/ATE machine.

[Inspection Result Link Path] – Assigns a *.ifpinspection result data to the ICT/ATE machine.

[ICT/ATE Input Link Path] – Assigns a *.afc inspection result data to the ICT/ATE machine.

Test Research Inc.


3.3.3.5 Repair Station Tab

Figure 162: Panel Parameter – Repair Station Tab

[Path] – Assigns a path for repaired data. The Default setting is [\\RepairPC\C\AOI_Repair_Data].

[Change Type to Part Number] – Changes the when this box is checked, the lot number columns will replace type columns.

Test Research Inc.


3.3.3.6 Offline Editor

Figure 163: Panel Parameter – Offline Editor Tab

[Machine] – Selects an AOI machine on Offline Editor.

[Path] –Assigns the path for offline data. Default is [\\OfflinePC\C\AOI_Offline_Data].

[Max Fail Board Count] – Sets the maximum inspecting number for Offline Editor. You can set the number between 0 and 30. If you set 30, the Offline Editor will save the latest 30 data.

[Max Fail Image Count] – Sets the maximum number of failed images that AOI can transfer to Offline Editor. You can set the number between 0 and 30. If you set 10, the AOI will only transfer the first 10 failed images to Offline Editor for each inspection. See more information in Chapter 9. Offline Editor.

Test Research Inc.


3.3.4 SOFTWARE BARCODE (OPTIONAL)

Enables and sets the software barcode function. The function is to decode the images captured by the camera. The supportive barcodes are 1D, DataMatrix and QR Code. There are two types to read the barcode: reading one barcode in a panel and reading individual barcodes for each board (for multi-board panel). In [Independent Scan] mode, the system reads the barcode before inspecting the board. It takes more time to inspect if there are more barcode numbers. In [Runtime scan] mode, the system reads the barcode during inspecting, so it doesn’t take extra time. The drawback of this mode is that the system will only use the inspection light setting in both reading barcodes and inspection.

Figure 164: The Software Barcode Window

Test Research Inc.


3.3.4.1 Coreco Processing and License Setup

The basic steps include:

Install [Coreco Image Processing] software.

Plug in the hardware dongle key.

Copy the license file (*.lic) from A disc to hard disk.

Set Coreco License Manager

The detail of them will be described below.

Step1. Choose [Start>Programs>DALSA>Sapera Processing>License Manager].

Figure 165: The License Manager Path of Coreco Processing 5.4

or choose [Start>Programs>Coreco Imaging>Sapera Processing>License Manager].

Figure 166: The License Manager Path of Coreco Processing 5.6

Step2. In the [Sapera Processing License Manager] dialog box, click [Load License].

Test Research Inc.


Figure 167: Sapera Processing License Manager Window

Step3. Specify the path to open the license file.

Step4. If the license is loaded successfully, it will display “Key Detected” in [State] column and “Registry” in the [Location] column. Click [Close] to quit the program.

Figure 168: Checking License Loading Status

3.3.4.2 Software Barcode Reading Procedure

Step1. Select the reading method in [Scan Mode] column, and select the barcode type in [Barcode Type] column.

Step2. If the barcode size fits in an FOV, select [Single FOV]; if the barcode size is greater than a FOV, select [Multi FOVs].

Single FOV

1) Choose [Single FOV], and then click [Get Image].

Test Research Inc.


Figure 169: Location Setup—Single FOV

2) Move the red cross line to the barcode (move to the barcode on Board 1 for multi-board). Adjust the green box to fit the barcode and click [OK] to capture the screenshot of the barcode.

Figure 170: Capturing The Single FOV Image

Multi FOVs

1) Select [Multi FOVs], and then click [Start Point].

Test Research Inc.


Figure 171: Location Setup—Multi FOV

2) Move the red cross line to the right side of the barcode, and click [OK].

Figure 172: Multi FOV Image--Start Point

Test Research Inc.


3) Click [End Point].

4) Move the red cross line to the left side of the barcode and click [OK].

Figure 173: Multi FOV Image--End Point

5) Click [Scan Image] to capture the barcode image.

Figure 174: Scan and Compose the Barcode Image

Test Research Inc.


Step3. Click [Train] to decode the barcode. If the decoding process is successful, a dialog box will appear. The barcode number is listed in the box. Click [OK] to the next step.

Figure 175: Train and Decode Barcode

Step4. If there is only one barcode on the panel, click [Yes] when you see the dialog box as below. If not, click [NO].

If each board has its individual barcode, click [Yes] when you see the dialog box as below. If not, click [NO].

Test Research Inc.


Figure 176: Panel Barcode or Board Barcode

Step5. Click [TestRun] to decode. The system will capture and decode all the barcodes according to the setting. If the decode process is successful, a dialog box will appear as below. If not, please check the failed barcode.

Figure 177: TestRun

Step6. Click [OK] to confirm the setting.

3.3.4.3 Scan Mode

Independent Scan: Scans the barcode and inspects the board individually. After you click button [Inspect], the system will find fiducial marks first, scan the barcodes and then inspect the board.

Runtime Scan: Scans the barcode during inspecting the board. After you click button [Inspect], the system will find fiducial mark and start to inspect directly. During the inspection, the system will do the decode process when there is a barcode in the scanned FOV. This mode is faster than Independent Scan mode. However, so far, this mode only supports 1D barcodes.

Even though Runtime Scan mode can save inspecting time compared to Independent Scan mode. However, the disadvantage of this mode is that it can’t use independent light. So, when the inspected component has poor contrast or the specific light is required, you must use Independent Scan mode.

3.3.4.4 Barcode Type

Selecting barcode type: 1D, 2D or QR Code.

3.3.4.5 Assign Multi-Boards

Enable Auto-Assign to Multi-Board: Enables the barcodes to be assigned automatically on a multi-board. If each barcode locates on the same position of a board, you can apply this function for assigning the barcode information to other boards in the panel. If the board-in

Test Research Inc.


direction is from left to right, the system will read the barcode from the upper-right corner of the panel. On the other hand, if the board-in direction is from right to left, the system will read the barcode from the upper-left corner of the panel. If the AOI is the DT system, the system will read the barcode from the upper-left corner of the panel. Before using this function, click button [Barcode Layout Type] first. More detail is listed in 3.3.3.1. The setting steps are described below.

Step1. Check the box [Enable Auto-Assign to Multi-Boards]

Step2. Click [Barcode Layout Type]. See more details in section 3.3.3.1.

Step3. Set the positions of the barcode.

Step4. Click [Train] to analyze if the captured image can be decoded successfully. If the decode process is successful, go to the next step; If not, click [Set Parameters] to change the decode parameters, and then click [Train] again.

Step5. Select [Panel Barcode] or Board Barcode based on the barcode locations.

Step6. Click [TestRun], the system will simulate the real barcode inspection of. If the simulation process is successful, the system will display a dialog box with decoded barcode numbers.

Step7. Click [OK] to confirm the setting and exit the setting interface.

Figure 178: Procedure of Assign Multi-Boards

Manual Setup Multi-Board Pos: Sets the barcode position for each board in a panel manually. See Figure174. If the test multi-board panel has an irregular barcode position for each board (as the left part), you need to set the barcode positions manually. The function only works under [Independent Scan] mode. If the test multi-board panel has a regular barcode position for each board, please select [Board Barcode] function under [Set and

Test Research Inc.


Decoder Procedure]. Please follow the flowchart in Figure 175 to complete the manual barcode setting. The detail of each step will be described below.

Irregular barcode position in a multi-board panel

Regular barcode position in a multi-board panel

Figure 179: Manual Setup Multi-Board Position

Test Research Inc.


Figure 180: Procedure of Manual Setup Multi-Board Position

Test Research Inc.


Step1. Check the box [Manual Setup Multi-Board Pos], and you can see the current board number in column [Current Board No.] as below. Here, 1 indicates the current board number, and 4 indicate the total number of the boards in the panel.

Step2. Set the position for each barcode under [Location Setup].

Step3. Click [Train] to decode.

Step4. Click [Board Barcode] to set the barcode position of Board 1.

Step5. Click [ ] button to set the next

board. Repeat the same steps to set all boards in the panel.

Step6. After all the barcode setting process is completed, click button [TestRun] to decode. The system will test and decode all the barcodes individually.

Step7. Click [OK] to confirm the setting.

Figure 181: Interface of Manual Setup Multi-Board Position

3.3.4.6 Location Setup: Specify position of the barcode and scan the barcode image.

Single FOV: When the barcode size fits in a FOV, select [Single FOV] and click button [Get Image] to capture the barcode image.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 182: Location Setup--Single FOV

The specific pull-down menu, [Count] and [Del] have special functions, but you don’t have to set them in the normal situation.

Figure 183: Selection box, [Count] field and [Del]

Multi FOV: When the barcode size is over a FOV, select [Multi FOVs]. Click [Start Point] and specify the initial position of the barcode, and click [End Point] and specify the end position. Finally, click [Scan Image to capture the barcode image.

3.3.4.7 Set Barcodelight

[Auto Setting]: Sets barcode light automatically. This function only works under 2D barcode mode. In 2D barcode mode, after you finish all the barcode setting and click button TestRun, the function of button [Auto Setting] will be started-up. Click [Auto Setting], the system will find the optimal light setting. This value will also be saved in [Barcodelight].

Figure 184: Set Barcodelight

3.3.4.8 Decoder Parameters Setup

There are two pages under this window: general parameters and linear barcode. The detail of each item will be described below.

General Parameters: Sets the decoder, properties of characters, and the system parameters.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 185: General Parameters

Decoder: Sets the parameters related to the decoder.

Maximum Number of Codes: Sets the maximum number of barcodes in a FOV or an image that is composed by multi-FOV images. Vernally, setting 1 is recommended. If there are more than one barcode in a FOV, the barcode will be decoded but the system cannot predict the sequence of the characters (according to the resolution for each barcode). The default setting is 1.

Enable Decoder Timeout Setup: Sets the limited time for decoding process. If the system cannot decode within the limited decoding time, a dialog box [Decode failed] will appear. The default setting is 1500 (msec).

Properties of Characters: Sets the parameters related to the characters.

Minimum Number of Characters: Sets the minimum number of characters for the target barcode. The default setting is 5.

Maximum Number of Characters: Sets the maximum number of characters for the target barcode. The default setting is 32.

System Parameters

Enable Decoded Fail Retry Count: Sets the limitation when decoding process keeps failed. The default setting is disabled. If this function is disabled, the system will keep decoding until the decoding process is successful or character is inputted by users. If

Test Research Inc.


this function is enable, the system will send the board out when the failed times of decoding process is greater than the setting.

Enable Specific Characters Filtering (0~9; A, B~ Z; a, b~z): Filters the barcode with specific characters. If there are special characters in the barcode, the system will define it as a failed decoding process. The default setting is enabled.

Save Decode Fail Image: Saves the failed decoding images. When this function is enabled, the failed decoding images will be saved in the folder [FailBarcodeImg] under the project location. The default setting is disabled.

Board out to Entrance When Decode Fail: Sets the auto board-out when the decoding process is failed. If this function is enabled, the system will exit the measured panel to the board-in location automatically after decoding process is failed. This function only works on the TRI AOI system’s PLC version with 2.25 or above. The default setting is disabled.

Linear Barcode: Sets code types, FOVs Joint Algorithms, threshold and others.

Figure 186: 1D Barcode Parameter Setting Dialog

Code Types: Selects the type of 1D (linear) barcode. The default setting is checked of Code 39 and 128.Select many decoding types is not recommended because it will cause the decoding fail and take more time.

FOVs Joint Algorithms: Selects an algorithm model.

Test Research Inc.


Model 1 (Region Correlation): this algorithm is calculated by mathematical calculation. The system calculates the gray levels between each FOV, and joins the images which have the minimum gray level difference.

Model 2 (Pattern Search): this algorithm is calculated by image topology. The system finds the most similar images first and then joins them.

Enable Setup ROI-Strip of Joined Image: Sets the shielding of image. If this function is enabled, the image which doesn’t belong to the barcode will be covered by the mask. It will reduce the decoding time. The mask setting is shown as below.

Figure 187: Enable Setup ROI-Strip of Joined Image

Threshold: Sets the parameters for image threshold process.

Adaptive Global: Calculates the optimal threshold for global images. This is the default setting.

Adaptive Local: Calculates the optimal threshold for local images.

Number of horizontal blocks: the horizontal size of the area (unit: pixel).

Number of vertical blocks: the vertical size of the area (unit: pixel).

Note: We describe the parameter by operating decoding process. After capturing the original barcode image, the system will do the” Thresholding” process to create a binary image (a digital image that has only two possible values for each pixel. For example, black and white), refer to the following Figure 188. The system then locates the barcode and decodes it. The most important parameter of binariaztion is “Threshold”. [Adaptive Global] determines a threshold according to the whole image, and the threshold applies to the whole image. [Adaptive Local] means that the system separates image to several small areas, and determines the threshold according to the image in small area.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 188: Image Binarization

General

Joined Image Scale (%): The function is to shrink the joined image (30%~150%). After the image is joined by multi-FOV images, the image size might be too large in some case. This situation will increase the decoding time. If this function is enabled, the system will reduce the image size before decoding and generate a smaller jointed decoding image. However, if the image shrinks too small and some information is missing during the shirking process, it will cause the decoding fail. The standard setting is that the thinnest line has clear contrast and resolution. Please disable this function in high resolution barcode decoding process. The default setting is 70%.

Enable Check Characters (Checksum): The system verifies the barcode value (characters) that is decoded according the coding rules of barcode. Some barcode types have the coding rules, but some of them do not. You can enable this function based on the barcode type. The default setting is disabled.

Orientation: The rotation angle of the barcode. . The default setting is to detect the rotation angle automatically.

Figure 189: Rotation Angle of Barcode

Data Matrix

Test Research Inc.


Figure 190: DataMatrix Parameters Setting Interface

[Matrix Size]: the number of cells. See the example below. In this cell matrix, bot horizontal and vertical directions have 14 cells, so the matrix size is 14x14. The default setting is [Automatic].

Figure 191: DataMatrix Construction

[Cell Size]: the size of a cell (calculate by pixels). The default setting is [Automatic].

[Enable DataMatrix pattern alignment]: Removes out the part with no barcode. See the example as below. If this function is enabled, the characters and numbers will be removed. The default setting is disabled.

Figure 192: Pre-location of the Barcode

QR Code

Test Research Inc.


Figure 193: QR-Code Parameter Setting Dialog

[Model Type] –Coding type, the default setting is [Automatic].

[Matrix Size] – The number of cells. It is the same as [Matrix Size] in DataMatrix. The default is [Automatic].

[Cell Size] – Cell Size (Pixels). The size of a cell (calculate by pixels). It is the same as [Cell Size] in DataMatrix The default setting is [Automatic].

3.3.5 ASSIGN SERIAL CODE

The function is usually used when there is no barcode on the test panel. You can assign a serial number to the test board by it. The assigned serial number can be seen in the dialog box as below or Repair Station. In this example, the serial number is 100.

Figure 194: Assign Serial Code

Input the initial number in the column first and then click [OK].

Test Research Inc.


Figure 195: Assign Serial Code – Input Initial Number

[Send to Repair] – Sends the barcode to Repair Station and save under the folder [BarcodeSN].

[Use Date] – Adds the date and time behind the serial number.

3.3.6 CONNECT PROJECT SERVER & CONNECT PROJECT SERVER SETTING

When a project server has already been installed, you can use the function to manage all projects in the production lines.

Setting Procedure

1) Choose [Parameter>Project Server Setting]

Figure 196: Select [Parameter> Project Server Setting]

Test Research Inc.


2) A [Project Server] dialog box will appear as below. Refer the Project Server User Manual to see the detail of the setting.


3) After the setting has done, open [Connect Project Server] to enter the connecting mode.

4) , After loading a project under the connecting mode, the setting dialog box [Project Server] will appear. Specify a project to download and open it.

Figure 198: Project Server Setting Dialog

Test Research Inc.


5) When you want to download a local project, change the page to Choice Project Data (from Local) first and then specify the project.


6) If you save a project in the connecting mode, the system will upload the project save to Project Server automatically.

Figure 200: Uploading to Project Server

Test Research Inc.


3.3.7 PATH SETTING

Figure 201: Path Setting

You can specify a path for the folder of Name Index manually.

Figure 202: Path Setting-Browse the Path

3.3.8 SETTING OF BARCODE IN THE DOUBLE-TRACK (OPTIONAL)

If the system has a double track design, see the appendix 4 for more information.

3.3.9 AUTO CONVEYOR WIDTH OUTPUT (OPTIONAL)


Adjusts AOI conveyor width output through software. You can input the panel width of the testing board and the tolerance between the panel width and conveyor width. When PLC receives the message, it will automatically adjust the conveyor width.

Interface:

Test Research Inc.



1) [Panel Width]：Inputs the real panel size。

2) [Enable Tolerance & Tolerance]：Sets the thickness tolerance between the panel width

and conveyor width.

3) [Conveyor Width]：Displays the width of board-in. The system will calculate it

automatically.

4) [Measurement Unit]：Sets Metrics or Imperial 。

5) [Adjust]：Confirms the adjust setting。

Test Research Inc.


Procedure:

1) Choose [Parameter > Auto Conveyor Width Output > Adjust Width].

2) Input a value in the [Panel Width] column. See the example below. If the tolerance setting is disabled, the conveyor width will be the same as the panel width (250mm).


3) If the tolerance setting is enable and 3 is inputted, the conveyor width will be 253.


Test Research Inc.


4) When the setting of the panel width is too big, a warming dialog box will appear and show the machine limitation as below. Click [OK] and then reset the panel width.


5) Generally, the setting of tolerance cannot be set over 3.75mm (= 0.14 inch, = 750 pps). Click [OK] and then reset the tolerance.


Test Research Inc.


6) If the setting is successful, a dialog box will appear as below. Click [OK] to the confirm it.


Notice:

7) If you want to use this function, please install the optional accessory first。

8) The register code of AutoConveyorWidth = 2。

9) The maximum size of test panel in TR7500 series is 510*460 (mm) , the maximum size of test panel in TR7500L is 610*660 (mm), and the maximum size of test panel in TR7500 dual lane is 510*230 or 510*295(mm) .

Issue Diagnosis:

See the hardware manual for more information.

3.3.10 OVERALL EQUIPMENT EFFECTIVENESS

Setting the path of exporting files and recording equipment effectiveness.


Test Research Inc.


1) Setting:


[File Path]: Specifies a path of status.log. The default setting is C:\AOI.

[Interval Time]: The interval time for generating a file.

[Unscheduled Downtime]: Sets the status of AOI. During the maintaining process, please check the box. After the maintaining, please uncheck check the box.

2) Export Status:

UD Unscheduled Downtime 2200: The time for machine break down in the working hours.

SB Standby Time 1300: The time for waiting the next test panel.

EN Engineering Time 1200: The time for programing and fine-tuning process.

PR Productive Time 1100: The real inspection time.

3.3.11 BARCODE AND IMAGE OUTPUT


Specifies the output barcodes and images in the inspected boxes. Select Enable to enable the function and select Path Setting to set an output path.

Right click on an inspected box and select Output barcode and image. Hence, the system will generate the images (.jpg) or barcode characteristics of the inspected box and save them to the specific path after the inspection.

Test Research Inc.



3.3.12 BUZZER ALARM

Setting the buzzer alarm time (unit: second).

Procedure:

1. Check [Parameters > Buzzer Alarm > When Result is Fail]. 2. Choose [Parameters > Buzzer Alarm >Buzzer Setting]. 3. A dialog box will appear as below. Input the wanted time in the duration column, and

then click [OK].

Figure 214: Program Tab

3.3.13 INSPECTION BOX COLOR SETTING

Changing the color of inspection boxes. Sometimes, the color of the clients’ board or component is similar to the color in the inspection box. It will cause the visual misjudgement. In this situation, users can use this function to solve the problem.

Procedure:

1. Choose [Parameter > Inspection Box Color Setting]. You will see the default color setting of the inspection boxes as below.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 215: The Inspection Box Color Setting Table

2. Click an inspection box that you want to change color, and then a dialog box will appear as below. Select a color you want and then click [OK].

Figure 216: The Color Selection Table

3. You also can define a new color. Click [Define Custom Colors], select a color you want on the right side color bar, and then click [Add to Custom Colors].

Test Research Inc.


Figure 217: The Custom Color Setting Table

3.4 Program Tab

Figure 218: AOI Menu Bar – Program Tab

3.4.1 ATPG

Enters to the ATPG program. See Chapter 4 AOI ATPG Function Instruction.

Test Research Inc.


3.4.2 TRAIN

Enters to the Train program. See Chapter 5 Train mode Function.

3.4.3 PASS LEVEL

Figure 219: Program Tab– Pass Level

3.4.3.1 By Component Type

Sets the pass level by component type. Choose Program > Pass Level > by Component Type. A dialog table will appear as below.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 220: Sample Component List

In the table, the first four columns display the component information and the other columns show the information of different inspection boxes. Double click the inspection result cells to edit the pass level.

Figure 221: Four Fields to Edit in Component List

Select a kind of inspection box in [Performance Curve] and double right click a type name on the table. A dialog box will appear as Figure 220. It shows the inspection results of all the components in this type. In this Figure, the horizontal axis indicates the number of the component in this type and the vertical axis indicates the inspection values. Each point on the green curve is the average inspection result of its corresponding component and the red

Test Research Inc.


line is the identified pass level. You can move the cursor to the point and see the component

name.

Figure 222: Sample Pass Level Graph

Select a type on the table and the information of the type will be listed in [Info.] area. The meanings of each item are listed below:

[Pass Level Min.] – The minimum value of pass level for all components in the selected type.

[Pass Level Mean] – The average value of pass level for all components in the selected type.

[Pass Level Max.] – The maximum value of pass level for all components in the selected type.

[Result Min.] – The minimum of inspection result for all components in the selected type.

[Result Mean] – The average of inspection result for all components in the selected type.

[Result Max.] – The maximum of inspection result for all components in the selected type.

Figure 223: Detailed Component Information

Check a kind of inspection boxes and then click button [Set This Type] or [Set All Types] to change the parameters.

Test Research Inc.


Check the box to enable the setting of corresponding inspected box

[Diff] – Inputs a modified value to increase or decrease the setting. The system will use the average inspection result value to add or subtract this value of each component and set the new value the pass level.

[Min., Max] –the effective range of the value setting. If the calculated parameter value is smaller than the value set in column [Min.], the system will use the value set in column [Min.]; if the calculated parameter value is greater than value set in column [Max.], the system will use the value set in column [Max.].

[Set This Type] – Applies the parameter settings to the selected type.

[Set All Types] – Applies the parameter settings to all the types.

Here, select the component 402 to be an example for describing the function [Model Image-Similarity]. Follow the steps below.

Step1. Check the box of [Model Image-Similarity]

Step2. Refer the value in [Performance Curve] and [Info.] and decide the modified value.

Figure 224: Example: Model Image - Similarity

Test Research Inc.


Step3. Input 5 in the column [Diff.] and click [Set This Type]. The average value in each component 402 cells will be subtracted 5 separately. The result value will be set as the new pass level.

Figure 225: Example: Changing Component Pass Level

Step4. Double right click the component again to see the change of the setting.

Figure 226: Example: Model Image – Similarity with New Pass Level

Click the button [Save]. The parameter change will be saved as a text file to the same folder as the program location... The file name is [typeSetting.txt].

Test Research Inc.


3.4.3.2 By Component Name

Choose Program > Pass Level > by Component Type, a dialog table will appear as below. . This table lists all the pass levels and inspection results for every component. The value 0 in the cells means the component does not have any corresponding inspection box. Double left click on the objective component to change the parameter values. Uncheck the box before the component name to enable the component inspection.

Figure 227: Component List Window

Figure 228: Model Image Pass Levels

Test Research Inc.


3.4.4 AUTO PASS LEVEL

3.4.4.1 Inline Data Collection

Choose Program > Auto Pass Level > In Line Data Collection. The system will only saves the latest 30 data that have been set “Pass”.

Figure 229: Program –Auto Pass Level

3.4.4.2 Auto Set Pass Level

When “In Line Data Collection “function has been selected, this function will start working. The system will recalculate the new pass level according to the latest 30 data and the setting here. Select the inspection boxes and input the values to [Standard Deviation no.], [Minimum] and [Maximum] and then click [OK] to the pass level.

Figure 230: Auto Pass Level Setting

[Select Item] – Selects inspection boxes for auto pass level setting.

[Standard Deviation no.] – Sets a multiple of standard deviation to calculate parameters. New pass level = Average Result +Standard Deviation no.* Standard Deviation. The [Average Result] and [Standard Deviation] is calculated from 30 times results.

[Minimum, Maximum] – Sets a new range of parameters. It can prevent the infeasible setting. . . If the calculated parameter value is smaller than the value set in column [Min.],

Test Research Inc.


the system will use the value set in column [Min.]; if the calculated parameter value is greater than value set in column [Max.], the system will use the value set in column [Max.].

[Auto Update] – Updates the files automatically after 30 times of inspection. Every 30 times of inspection, the system will calculate the best parameters from the inspection data and apply them to the next inspection.

3.4.4.3 Recover Pass Level

When In line Data Collection function is enable, this function can work. If you don’t want to apply the parameters that are calculated by the system, click [OK] to recover to the previous setting.

Figure 231: Confirm Recover Pass Level Window

3.4.5 ADD FOV

This function is only enabled in the TRAIN mode.

When [Add FOV] function is selected, a real time FOV image will appear as Figure 212. There are two ways to add FOV.

1. Right click the position where you want to add a FOV on the panel map directly. Click the button [Add] to add a FOV image. If it is multi-board panel, the system will generate the FOVs in the relative positions. Notice: you can’t select a place which already has a FOV image.

2. Right click the location near wanted FOV position on the panel map. Click the buttons [Prev.] or [Next] to find the FOV image you want to add. If it is multi-board panel, the system will generate the FOVs in the relative positions

Click button [Save] to save the current image to the same folder as the program location.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 232: Add FOV

The steps for adding FOVs

Step1. Choose [Program>Add FOV]

Step2. Select an object FOV and then click [Add]

Step3. Add other FOVs

Step4. After adding process is complete, choose [Program>Add FOV] again.

Step5. Close [Train] dialog and then choose [Utilities>Capture FOV Images].

Figure 233: Select Capture FOV Images

Step6. Reopen [Train] dialog and edit other FOVs.

Test Research Inc.


3.4.6 REMOVE FOV

This function is only enabled in the [Train] mode. Also it only works on the FOVs with no inspection boxes. When [Delete FOV] function is selected, a panel map and a real time FOV image will appear. There are two ways to delete FOVs.

Right click on the position where you want to delete the FOV on the panel map directly. Click the button [Delete] to delete the FOV. If it is a multi-board panel, the system will delete the FOVs in the relative positions.

Click near the position on panel map. Click [Prev.] or [Next] to find the FOV to delete. If it is a multi-board module the system will delete FOVs to the related positions.

Delete FOV Steps:

Step1. Choose [Program>Delete FOV]

Step2. Select an objective FOV and then click [Del]

Step3. Delete other FOVs

Step4. After deleting process is complete, choose [Program>Delete FOV] again.

Step5. Close [Train] dialog then choose [Utilities>Capture FOV Images].

3.4.7 ROTATE 180°

This function allows an existing project to be rotated 180 degrees without creating a new program.

Load an existing project and then select this function. The project will be rotated 180 degree automatically.

Please relocate Fiducial marks and recapture the panel map after using this function.

3.4.8 RELOCATE ALL BOX

When this item is selected, the system will take the alternative images as the standard images and use them to relocate all components.

Test Research Inc.


3.4.9 NON CAD

3.4.9.1 Objective

The function is used when there is no CAD file. It can help users to get the components’ information such as name, x, y coordinates, angle and others manually.

There are two ways to program when there is no CAD file. The first one is a standard approach. It will be described in 3.4.9.2 to 3.4.9.7. The second one is a special approach, for the users who want to save time. In this approach, users will create a Non CAD project on an 8x8 panel map. Also, it can work on offline editor. The drawback of this approach is that it cannot be used when a project is loaded. The detail will be described in 3.4.9.8.

3.4.9.2 Enter Non CAD Dialog

Choose [PROGRAM > NON CAD>TEACH]

Figure 234: Select Program > Non-CAD > Teach Function

Test Research Inc.


3.4.9.3 Non-CAD Teach Interface Introduction

Figure 235: Non-CAD Teach Window & Functions

1) [Camera Option] － Captures the instant images. Check the box of [Grabbing] to capture

real time images. You can select [Mono] to see gray scale images or [Color] to see color images. Also, you can click the button [Light Up] to set the lighting. (You cannot change the light setting when you capture color images)

2) [Motion Control] panel －Moves the camera to specific directions and distances. You also

can use right click on the image to move the camera.

Test Research Inc.


3) [Tools] － Helps to create CAD files. There are totally 5 tools. The detail of each tool will

be described below.

Box

Defines the coordinates of regular size components. Click icon Box and then a red box will appear. You can move, drag, rotate, and resize the box to fit the component size. The system will set the center location of the red box as the component coordinates.

Figure 236: Box Tool Examples

Cross line

Defines the coordinates of small size components. Click icon Cross line, a red cross line will appear. Move the cross center to the component location. The system will set the cross center as the component coordinates.

Figure 237: Cross Line Tool Example

Test Research Inc.


Angle Measuring

Measures the angle of components. Click icon Angle Measuring, an angle measuring ruler will appear. Move the ruler to measure the specific angles of components.

Figure 238: Angle Measuring Tool Example

Theta Alignment

Adjusts the decimals of measured angles to rounded integers. After measuring the angle and click icon Theta Alignment, a dialog box will appear as Figure 219.This box shows the results of the integer process of the measured angles.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 239: Theta Alignment Window

Large Component Tool

Defines the coordinates of large size components. When the component size is greater than a FOV, click icon Large Component Tool and follow the steps below to set the component coordinates.

Step1. Move the center of the red cross line to the upper-left corner of the component and click [1] to get the first position.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 240: Large Component Tool, Step 1

Step2. Repeat the same approach to set [2], [3] and [4] respectively.

Figure 241: Large Component Tool, Step 2

Step3. Click icon and the system will calculate the component center automatically.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 242: Large Component Tool, Result

Step4. Click icon [Add] to add the component after input relevant information.

1) [CAD Origin] － Define the coordinate origin first before creating the component CAD

data. If you haven’t defined the origin, the yellow coordinate axis at the lower-left corner will flash and show “Non-Define” as Figure 228. If the origin has already been defined, the icon color will change to green and the origin will be marked as blue coordinate axis icon. There are two ways to set the origin.

Figure 243: CAD Origin Not Defined Warning

Test Research Inc.


Figure 244: CAD Origin by Mouse Click

[By Mouse Drop] －When editing a new CAD file, Use Box or Cross line tools to specify the position of origin and then click button [CAD (0, 0)]. The system will record this position as the origin.

[By Component] －When working on a loaded CAD file, select a component in the component list first, and then use the tools to locate the component center and click button [CAD(0,0)] . The system will record the coordinates of the component center as the origin.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 245: Non-CAD Teach Procedure 1

2) [Find Component] －Finds the similar components (selected by sensitivity setting)

and sets their coordinates. Follow the steps as Figure 226. Moreover, you can edit the components’ name, angle, rotation or type in CAD Data.

Test Research Inc.



Test Research Inc.


Result: The component,

that has enough similarity,

will be set.

You can modify

the name or angle.


3) [Name & Type Setting] － Sets [Name Index], [S>N From] and [Type] for a new

component. If you set a name, R100, for a new component, the system will set the name for the next component as R101 automatically.

4) [CAD File] － Uses the functions [New], [Load] or [Save]. Click button [New] to create

a new CAD file (the current setting will be removed). Click [Load] to open an existent AOI file. Click [Save] to save the current CAD file to a specific path.

5) [CAD Data] － Edits CAD data .There are several functions under this item such as add,

modify, insert, delete and so on. The detail of these functions will be described below.

[Add] －Creates a component into CAD file according to [Name&Type Setting], [TB Select],

[Theta] and the selecting tool.

[Modify] －Modifies the data according to [Name&Type Setting], [TB Select], [Theta] and the

selecting tool.

Test Research Inc.


[Insert] －insert a component according to [Name&Type Setting], [TB Select], [Theta] and the selecting tool.

[Delete] －Deletes an exist component.

[View] －Moves the camera to the top of the component and view it.

[TB Select] － Selects where the component is located, top or lower side.

[Arrowhead button] －Moves the component’s order up or down. .

[CAD table] －Edits component data directly. (Double click on any cell in the table.)

Figure 248: Theta Data Field

6) [Theta] －Defines the angles of components.

When using the tool box to create component coordinates, check the box [Apply] and select the angle. The system will generate the angle data to the columns under [Theta] automatically. If [Apply] is not checked, all the columns under [Theta] will be the same as default. (The default setting is 0)

Test Research Inc.


Figure 249: Set Theta Data When Using Box Tool

In the Theta field, you also can click an angle value to replace the original one directly.

Figure 250: Edit Theta Angle Directly

Test Research Inc.


3.4.9.4 Procedure to Create a New CAD File

Step1. Click button New under CAD File to create a new file.

Figure 251: CAD File>New

Step2. Use [Motion Control] panel or right-click on the image to move the camera. Click [Cross Line] icon and move the center of the Red Cross line to the target position, and then click the button [CAD (0, 0)] button to set the origin.

Step3. Input the component information in the columns under [Name & Type Setting].

Figure 252: Name & Type Setting

Step4. Use [Box] or [Cross Line] tool to locate the coordinates of the component center. Figure 223 shows how to locate the component center by Box tool.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 253: Move to Component Center

Step5. Check the box [Apply], and then select an angle.

Figure 254: Select Component Angle

Step6. Select Top or Lower under TB Select

Figure 255: Select Top or Lower

Step7. Click [Add] under CAD Data field to create component data.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 256: Add a Component

Step8. Create data of other components.

Step9. After all the component data have created, click [Save] under CAD file to specify path for saving a CAD file.

Figure 257: Save CAD File

Step10. Click [Close] and then click [Yes] to quit the program.

Figure 258: Close Non CAD Dialog

Test Research Inc.


3.4.9.5 Load an Existing AOI File

Step1. Select [Load] under [CAD file] to open an AOI file.

Step2. Select an objective component under [CAD Data] and move the camera to the center of the component. Then select By Component under [CAD Origin] and click [CAD (0, 0)] button.

Figure 259: Load an Existing AOI File

Step3. Follow the step 8 ~ 10 in Section 3.4.9.4, to complete the component data setting.

Test Research Inc.


3.4.9.6 Add Component in Prj

Users can use this function to add a new component in an existing project.

Figure 260: Add Component in Prj.

Follow the steps below to add new components.

Step1. Choose [Program>Non CAD>Add Component in Prj.], a dialog window will appear as below.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 261: Non-CAD Teach Window

Step2. Move the camera to the target component on Board 1 and use the tools to locate the position of the component center.

Step3. Input the component name and type.

Step4. Select the angle of the component.

Step5. Click button [Add], the system will add a new component at [CAD Data] table.

Step6. Add the other components on board 1.

Step7. Click button [Close] to exit.

Step8. Choose [Program >Train] or click icon [ ] to enter the training mode.

Test Research Inc.


Step9. Click [Merge] to update the new component data to Library. See more information in Section 5.6.8.

Step10. Choose [Utilities> Capture FOV Images] to recapture FOV images.

3.4.9.7 New Non CAD Interface (for v.2.4 or above)

For the v.2.4 or above, the dialog box of No CAD Teach is shown as below. All the commands and functions of the icons and buttons are the same as the previous version.

Figure 262: Non-CAD Teach v.2.4 Interface

3.4.9.8 New Approach for Non CAD programing (for v.3.6 or above)

In order to reduce the programming time on Non CAD projects, users can use the approach, working on the 8x8 panel map. When users use this function, the system can measure the component angles automatically .Moreover, it can totally work on the offline editor.

Step1. Add DWORD parameter, Newnoncad = 1 in Windows Registry.

Step2. Reopen the software, Choose [Program> Non CAD> Teach] to start this function. It only works when there is no project loaded.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 263: Select [Non CAD> Teach]

Step3. A dialog box will appear as below. Click [Yes] to load the images captured before and edit it (The images should exist in folder [C:\noncaddata]. Click [No] to capture the images first. (The entire image in the folder [C:\noncaddata] folder will be deleted.)

Figure 264: Load Old Non CAD Data?

Step4. A dialog box will appear as below. . If you want to work on In-line Editor after the scan of 8 x8 panel map, click Yes.], the system will not save individual FOV images. If you want to work on Offline Editor after the scan of 8 x8 panel map, click [No].The system will save FOV images.

Figure 265: Non-cad programming in In-line AOI?

Step5. Set the upper-left and lower right positions of the board and then scan the board.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 266: Set Board Position

Step6. After scanning the board, an 8x8 panel map will appear as Figure 247. If you want to work Non CAD project on the Offline Editor, copy the images under folder [C:\noncaddata] and paste them to the same folder of PC with Offline Editor.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 267: 8x8 Panel Map

Step7. If you want to add a component, right click on the objective component center and choose [New].

Figure 268: Add a New Component

Step8. A [Fov Image Dialog] dialog box will appear. Adjust the size of the red box to fit the component. Then, right click on the image and select [Set Image]. The purpose of this process is to add a standard image which can be used for relocating other components.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 269: Select [Non CAD> Teach]

Step9. If necessary, you can adjust the image by using functions [Weighting] and [Mask].

Figure 270: Setting the Weighting

Test Research Inc.


Figure 271: Set Mask

Step10. If necessary, right click and select Set Angle. In the Rotate Angle dialog box, select an appropriate angle in the column.

Figure 272: Set Angle

Step11. After the setting is complete and close the [FOV Image Dialog] dialog box, a dialog box will appear as below. Input component type in column [Type] and component name in column [Part].

Test Research Inc.


Figure 273: Input Component Information

Step12. Right click on the added component and select [Copy].

Figure 274: Copy Component Information

Step13. When you press hotkey [Ctrl] on the keyboard and place the mouse on the added component simultaneously, you will see the component information directly. Left click on the component in other components which you want to add.

Figure 275: Add a Component by Copy Function

Step14. After the adding process, the system will relocate the component automatically and modify the component’s coordinates and angle. If the adding process is successful, the box will be marked in blue color; if it is failed, the box will be marked in orange color.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 276: Box Color

Step15. For the failed orange box, double click on the box, a [FOV Image Dialog] dialog box will appear. Relocate the red box, click apply and then close the dialog box.

Figure 277: FOV Image Dialog

Test Research Inc.


Figure 278: Move the Box to Correct Position

Step16. For the large components such as QFP IC, after right click on the component, select [New-Mouse Drag] and use red box to surround the component.

Figure 279: New-Mouse Drag

Step17. The system displays the FOVs of upper-left part and lower-right part of the component. Move the cursor (it shows as a black cross in the FOVs) to the upper-left corner and left click it, and then move the cursor to on the lower-right corner and left click it.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 280: Set the Upper-left Corner and Lower-right Corner

Step18. Set the component name and type.

Step19. After all components’ setting is complete, you can save the AOI file. The Save function is described below.

Figure 281: Save Function

Save: Saves the current situation. Notice: During the Non CAD setting, you cannot move out or resend the panel.

Save AOI: Saves the current component information in [C:\noncaddata\noncad.AOI].

3.4.10 MULTI PANEL ALIGNMENT SETTING

When users want to inspect more than one panel at the same time, users can use this function. Under [Auto Mode], the system will inspect all panels in sequence and then send all panels out. Under [Confirm Mode], after inspecting one panel, users have to confirm the panel before the system inspects the next panel. All panels will be sent out after inspecting.

Avoid the large variation of gap between panels. If necessary, increase the search range of the fiducial marks.

The detail of setting is shown below

Test Research Inc.


Figure 282: Multi-Panel Algorithm Setting

[Col(X)] – Sets the number of columns (X-axis) for inspection.

[Row(Y)] – Sets the number of rows (Y-axis) for inspection.

[Teach Panel Offset] –Helps to offset X shift and Y shift. In order to offset the shift, you have to set the locations of the same component on different boards. For example, see Figure 262, the setting process is shown below. First, click button C1 to enter the Train mode. Second, move the red box to locate the component position and click [OK]. Third, repeat the previous two steps to set positions of C2 and C3. (C1, C2, and C3 are the same component located on the different boards.)After the setting is complete, the system will calculate the value and input the values of [Offset X] and [Offset Y] automatically.

[Inspection] –Enables the inspection function.

[Offset Setting] – Inputs the offset of X axis and Y axis directly instead of using the function Teach Panel Offset.

3.4.11 BOM CHECK

This function is to load a BOM file into an existing project. The system will not test the components that are not listed in the BOM file. The format of BOM file is in Section 4.1.1.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 283: BOM Check

After the BOM check, the system will display the components that have been changed the properties and allow users to set the version.

3.4.12 TYPE AND PLACER CHECK

Select the items (Check Placer, Check Type or Check Group) to check first, and then load an AOI file with complete information about components. After loading the AOI file, the system will compare the information in the AOI file with the one in the current project. The system will only replace the information of components that exist in the project.

Figure 284: Type and Place Check

Test Research Inc.


Figure 285: Type and Place Check—Load AOI File

3.4.13 AOI CHECK

Load the AOI file that includes the placer information .The system will compare the component information in the PRE file with the one in the AOI file and only add the placer information of the components that do not exist in the PRE file. The new components will be merged automatically.

After the AOI check, the system will display the components that have changed their properties and allow users to set the version.

Figure 286: Version Controller

3.4.14 PIN NUMBER CHECK

Checking the pin numbers by loading a pin.asc file.

Test Research Inc.


3.4.15 AOI/BOM/PLACER CHECK

3.5 Inspection Tab

Figure 287: AOI Menu Bar – Inspection Tab

3.5.1 INSPECT PANEL

Starting to inspect the panel with standard procedure.

3.5.2 DEBUG FOR SINGLE BOARD SET

Starting to inspect (only shows the result of one board).Inspection time can be fine-tuning by the program.

3.5.3 INSPECT FOV IMAGES

Inspecting the FOV images saved in hard disk.

3.5.4 MANUAL SKIP BOARD SETTING

Specify if the boards have to be tested. . After the setting, the system will find the optimal path for inspection.

Click the board to decide if the board has to be tested directly. See the example in Figure 268. . The boards with green circles will be tested and the board with red mark will not be tested. Click [OK] to confirm the setting.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 288: Manual Skip Board Setting Window

3.5.5 INSPECT OFFLINE BACKUP FOV IMAGES

See more information about image management under Offline Editor in Section 9.4.2.3.

3.5.6 ENABLE TWO PANEL MODE (IN-LINE FIDUCIAL MARKS)

The function occupies large amount of memory, so it only suits to small panels. When the function works on the big panel, the system will probably show the message of not enough memory .In this situation, restart the program. .

In general situation, after a board is sent into the AOI, the system will find the fiducial marks first. Then, it will calculate the inspection results during the scanning process. When this function is enabled, the system will start to calculate the inspection results of the current tested panel until the next tested panel has been sent into the AOI. The advantage of this function is to save the inspection time of finding fiducial marks and the scanning duration at the end points. However, the test results will display slower. (Normally, before the scanning process of the next panel has completed.)

After the function is selected, the system will ask if users want to scan a fiducial mark in the beginning as Figure 269. If users select [OK], the system will scan the first fiducial mark before scanning the whole panel. The action can help to locate the scanning position. If users select [Cancel], the system will scan the board directly according to the data recorded in the project. It may cause the variations of FOV images because of the difference of board-stop position.

The system will calculate the inspection results after receiving the board-in signal of the next board. Users should press [ESC] on the keyboard after testing the final panel in order to receive the inspection results of the final panel.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 289: Enable Two Panel Mode (In-line Fiducial Marks)

3.5.7 SHOP FLOW CONTROL

1) Semiconductor Equipment Communication Stard (SECS)

Step1. Create a file named DefectCode.txt under the folder C:\AOI\. The format setting is shown as below. Input FailString and press [Tab] on the keyboard to separate the characteristics, and then input DefectCode.

Notice: the Fail String order indicates the Priority order. When this approach is used, the original Priority setting in the system will not be used. Users have to set the Fail String on each inspection boxes and save the setting in this file.

Step2. Choose Inspect > Shop Flow Control > Semiconductor Equipment Communication Standard (SECS) > Setting, specify a path in the column Marking Fail File Path.

Test Research Inc.


Step3. Choose Inspect > Shop Flow Control > Semiconductor Equipment Communication Standard (SECS) > Enable to enable the function。

2) IntraFactory Standard

For TRAOI 3.9 11/26/2009 or above

Functions:

In order to confirm Shop Flow Control standard, AOI program will check the following events during the inspection process.

When users input a Lot Number, the Client Server (SFC System) will confirm if this number can work on AOI.

When users input a Barcode, the Client Server (SFC System) will confirm if this number can work on AOI.

After AOI inspection, the system will confirm if the format of inspection result is XML (TRI_SECS_InspectionData.xml) under C:\AOI\intraF \InspectionResultFiles。

Test Research Inc.


Notice:

In Windows Registry, set [INTRAF] in column [COMPANYNAME].

Procedure:

Step1. Choose [Shop Flow Control > intraFactory Standard > Enable].

Step2. Confirm if the file transfer setting is correct.

A. Choose Shop Flow Control > intraFactory Standard > Setting

B. A dialog box will appear as below. In this example, the File Transfer function is used to connect to the Client Server (SFC System). [Receive File Path] means the path where AOI receives the files from the Client Server (SFC System). [Send File Path] means the path where the Client Server (SFC System) receives the files from AOI. Hence, the path setting in the Client Server (SFC System) should be opposite to the path setting in the AOI.

Test Research Inc.


Step3. When you open a project, AOI will send the Lot Number to the Client Server (SFC System).

Step4. When you open an old project (Open Project), the Client Server (SFC System) will check the Lot Number. If the Client Server (SFC System) rejects the Lot Number，a

dialog box will appear as below in AOI.

Test Research Inc.


Step5. If you click [OK] in the previous step, a dialog box will appear as below. You can input the new Order Number and click [OK].

Step6. If the Client Server (SFC System) accepts the Order Number, a dialog box will appear as below. Click [OK] to confirm it.

Step7. If the Client Server (SFC System) rejects the Order Number, a dialog box will appear as below. Click [OK] and do the next step.

Step8. A dialog box will appear as below. Repeat Step 5 to 7 until the Client Server (SFC System) accepts the Lot Number.

Test Research Inc.


Step9. If you click NO in the previous step (abandon to input effective Lot Number), the inspect function will be disable.

Step10. If you want to edit the Lot Number, choose Parameter >Panel.

Step11. Select Panel Info to edit the Lot Number. Click [OK] to confirm the change.

Test Research Inc.


3.6 Operation Tab

Figure 290: AOI Menu Bar – Operation Tab

3.6.1 AUTO MODE

After inspection, the system will output the test result and inspect the next panel directly.

3.6.2 CONFIRM-PASS MODE

After inspection, the system will output the test result and stop inspection process until users click [Confirm].

3.6.3 BYPASS MODE

All test results are defined “Pass”.

3.6.4 AUTO-CONFIRM MODE

After inspection, the system will output the result and inspect the next panel directly. The only difference between this mode and Auto Mode is the defect map will be shown in double size. It helps users to check the defects on the panel.

3.6.5 ON MACHINE CONFIRM

This function only works in [Confirm-Pass Mode].When this function is selected, users can confirm the test results directly on the AOI instead of Repair Station. If the test results have confirmed in this mode, the system will automatically update the confirmed setting to the Repair Station. So users don’t have to confirm the test results again in the Repair Station.

Right click on defect component and determine the defect is Confirm Pass, Confirm Fail or No Confirm. You also can use hotkey, ([F8]: [Confirm Pass], [F7]: [Confirm Fail] and [F6]: [No Confirm]). If you select [Pass], all the defects that you have set will be [Pass] automatically no matter what you confirmed respectively.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 291: On Machine Confirm Window

Test Research Inc.


3.7 Utilities Tab

Figure 292: AOI Menu Bar – Utilities Tab

Test Research Inc.


3.7.1 CAMERA ALIGNMENT

You can align camera and light setting. Also, you can move the camera for capturing the real-time images.

Figure 293: Camera Alignment Window

1) Real time image: Displays the instant image that the camera is capturing. Select [Grabbing] to capture the image.

2) Coordinates: Shows the position and the gray level of the place where the mouse points

3) [Camera Selection]: Sets the camera parameters.

[Light Up] – Clicks to enter the [Lighting Control dialog].In the Lighting Control dialog, you can adjust the brightness.

[Color>Mono]– Selects the capture image is a grayscale or color image.

Test Research Inc.


[Phase1 >Phase 2> Phase 3] – Selects the light weighting (R>G>B).

Camera Icons – Selects which camera will be used for grabbing images.

Grabbing – Selects to capture the image.

4) Alignment area

[Alignment] – Selects to show the cross line on image.

Figure 294: Camera Alignment Window--Alignment

See the hardware manual for more information.

5) Others

[SaveImage] –Clicks to save the current image. The image will be saved to the same folder as the project file. If you do not open the project, the image will be saved to the folder under [C:\AOI].

[Cancel] – Closes the window without saving.

Test Research Inc.


[OK] – Saves the change and closes the windows.

3.7.2 CAPTURE PANEL MAP

Recaptures the panel map. The map file will be saved in the same folder as the project file. The file names are “Model Name.BMP” (backup file “Map.BMP”) and “Model Name_2X2.BMP” (backup file “Map2X2.BMP”).

3.7.3 CAPTURE FOV IMAGES

Recaptures the FOV images. The image file will be saved in the same folder as the project file. The file name is “FovImage”.

3.7.4 CAPTURE FOV IMAGES WITH MULTI-PANEL

This function is not available currently. It allows users to capture and save several FOV images. (Associated with Offline Tune Mode).

3.7.5 CAPTURE BARE BOARD FOV IMAGE

Procedure:

1. Choose [Utilities > Capture Bare Board FOV image]. 2. After the capturing, the system will generate a folder called [BareBoardFOVImage] under

the project folder. All the captured images will be saved in this folder. 3. If this function is selected, a dialog box will appear after the [Inspection] process as

below.

Figure 295: Bare Board Checking Dialog Box

3.7.6 FIDUCIAL MARK ALIGNMENT

Checks if the fiducial marks can be found. After Selecting this item, to the camera will move to find the fiducial marks. If the system cannot find the fiducial marks, a warning message will appear as below. In this situation, please use the function Fiducial Mark Setting.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 296: Fiducial Mark Not Found Message

3.7.7 FIDUCIAL MARK SETTING

Sets the position and search range of fiducial mark 0. If the relative positions of two fiducial marks have been changed, find the fiducial marks again by ATPG flow. The detail of this function is described below. Figure 276 is the interface of this function.

Figure 297: Fiducial Setting Screen

[Set Fiducial 0 Position] – Resets the fiducial mark 0. Click the button first, move the center of the red cross line to the fiducial 0 and click [Done] in the dialog box as Figure 277.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 298: Move Camera to Fiducial Mark

Figure 299: Confirm Change Fiducial Mark Position

[Set Fiducial 0 Search Range] – Adjusts the green box to fit the wanted search range and then click [OK].

Test Research Inc.


Figure 300: Adjust Fiducial Mark Search Range

Click Yes to confirm the change and then click Done.

Figure 301: Confirm Fiducial Search Range

In both [Set Fiducial 0] and [Set Fiducial 1], if you type characters “fid”, a dialog box will appear as below. There are two options here: [Search] and [Apply Weighting].

Figure 302: Fiducial Mark Parameter Setting

[Search] – Displays the actual search scores. For example, 91>61 means the search result is 91 and the sensitivity is 61.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 303: Fiducial Mark Parameter Setting—Search

[Apply Weighting]－Applies the current weighting into the [Fid-Searching] inspection box.

[Set Fiducial 1 Search Range] – Adjusts the green box to fit the wanted search range and then click [OK].

[Sensitive] – Sets the sensitivity of the fiducial mark. For example, if the sensitivity is set 40 and there is a mark gets the score higher than 40, this mark t will be regarded as the fiducial mark.

3.7.8 RESET X Y TABLE

Moves the camera to the original position (upper-right corner of the X-Y table area).

3.7.9 UNLOAD PANEL

Sends the board to the board-out side.

3.7.10 PANEL STANDBY TEST

Sets the inspection times without ejecting the panel. Input the value in the dialog box as Figure 283 and click [OK].

Test Research Inc.


Figure 304: Panel Standby Test & Set Test Count

3.7.11 INLINE COMPONENT ANALYSIS

Collects inspection results It allows users to check the inspection result directly from the AOI.

Figure 305: Inline Component Analysis

3.7.11.1 Enable Cpk Data Collection

Displays the data analyze dialog box as Figure 285. The detail of each item will be described below.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 306: Cpk Criterion Setting Dialog

[X-Shift], [Y-Shift], [Theta] – Indicates the horizontal shift, vertical shift and the rotated angle respectively.

[High], [Low] – The upper and lower limit for the test result. The result value located in the range will be calculated.

[USL]–The upper specification limits of the process

[LSL]–The lower specification limits of the process.

[CpkSpec]–The specification limits of Cpk. If the capability index is greater than the setting value, it can be regarded as normal. On the other hand, it can be regarded as abnormal if the capability index is less than the setting value.

[AutoOutput]

[Never]–Disables the output automatically function.

[By Inspection Time]–Outputs data according to the assigned time interval.(unit: hours)

[By Inspection Times]–Outputs data according to the assigned number of inspected counts.

3.7.11.2 Cpk Data Report

Choose Utilities > Inline Component Analysis > Enable Cpk Data Collection and then select Cpk Data Report. You can review the previous Cpk data.

Test Research Inc.


Change to enable

Figure 307: Cpk Data Report

The Cpk data report will be shown as Figure 287.

Figure 308: Cpk Data Table

Click a field such as Name, Type, and Cpk. The system will reorder the sequence based on the numerical size.

The yellow highlighted rows are the abnormal components: The measured capability index is less than CpkSpc.

The meaning of each field is described in the table below:

Title Meaning

Name Component Name

Type Component type

Count The number of calculated data.

X_Max The maximum for X-shift (unit: mm)

Y_Max The maximum for Y-shift (unit: mm)

Theta_Max The maximum for Theta (unit: mm)

Test Research Inc.


Title Meaning

X_Min The minimum for X-shift (unit: mm)

Y_Min The minimum for Y-shift (unit: mm)

Theta_Min The minimum for Theta (unit: mm)

X_Average The average for X-shift (unit: mm)

Y_Average The average for Y-shift (unit: mm)

Theta_Average The average for Theta (unit: mm)

X_Sigma The sigma for X-shift (unit: mm)

Y_Sigma The sigma for Y-shift (unit: mm)

Theta_Sigma The sigma for Theta (unit: mm)

X_CpkSpec Spec limit of X-shift

X_Cpk The Cpk of X-shift

Y_CpkSpec Spec limit of Y-shift

Y_Cpk The Cpk of Y-shift

Theta_CpkSpec Spec limit of Theta

Theta_Cpk The Cpk of Theta

Missing The number of missing.

X_Position The new X coordinate after the X-shift adjustment

Y_Position The new Y coordinate after the Y-shift adjustment

Status

If the inspection results are failed (such as [Missing] or [Cpk＜CpkSpec]), it will display [NG] and the row will be

highlighted by yellow steak. Otherwise, it will display [OK].

[Show Graphic] – Shows the curve diagram of the components.

Click the button X-shift, Y-shift or Rotation to see the curve diagram.

The horizontal axis represents the count and the vertical axis represents the test results of the selected component.

The red line indicates the average.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 309: Time Sequence Graph

[Write To File] – Outputs the original data to text file.

[Save Path] – Specifies the output path for saving.

[OK] – Close the window.

Formula

iXResult

ncountTest

n

X

iX

Average

1

)(Sigma

2

n

XX i

3

)(,

3

)( LSLXXUSLMinC pk

USL and LSL indicate the upper spec limit and lower spec limit. Set the value when starting this function.

Test Research Inc.


3.7.12 GAUGE TOOL

Figure 310: Utilities Tab -- Gauge Tool Options

3.7.12.1 Gauge Fiducial 0-1 Repeatability (50 cycles)

If this function is selected, the system will measure the distance between two fiducial marks for 50 times and output the result to the folder under [C:\AOI]. The first file will be named [fireport1.txt]; the second file will be named [fireport2.txt], and so on. Click [YES] to do static test or click [NO] to do board in-out test.

Figure 311: Confirm Static or Board In>Out Test

3.7.13 RESEND IMAGE DATA FOR REPAIR

1) Alternative Image

When choosing [Parameter >User Mode >Link to Repair Station], the system will resend the data to Repair Station (Including *dir.1, *.win, *.img, *.BMP). After the resending process is complete, a dialog box will appear as below. Click [OK] to confirm the process.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 312: A Dialog Box of Resend Successful

2) Fov Image

Resends the FOV images to Repair Station。

Step1. Use the Capture FOV Images function (See Section 3.7.3) to capture the FOV images and save them to the folder under FOVImage.

Step2. After choosing [Utilities > Resend Image Data for Repair > Fov Image], the system will automatically transfer the format of the FOVImage files from [*.bmp] to [*.jpg] and then save the .jpg files to the folder in Repair Station.

3.7.14 ENABLE INSPECTION DATA COLLECTION

Select this item to save the result for all components as a text file. The file will be saved in the folder as the project file and named in the order of “Year-Month-Date-Time”.

3.7.15 COMPONENT STATUS

This function can only be selected in the [Train] dialog box.

After checking the box of [Pass], [Fail] and [Untest] and then click [Refresh], the system will display of the test results (Pass, Untest or Failed) of all the components.

Test Research Inc.


Number of components

Figure 313: Component Status Dialog

3.7.16 GENERATE REAL IMAGE DATA

Generates the images to ICT or ATE machine.

3.7.17 INLINE COMPONENT DATA OUTPUT TO SPC

Figure 314: Inline Component Data Output to SPC

Test Research Inc.


Choose Utilities >Inline Component Data Output to SPC, a dialog box will appear as Figure 292. In this window, you can set the USL and LSL limits for the X shift, Y shift and rotation angle and output them to SPC program. Also, the limits will be updated to Repair Station.

The output path is the same as the path specific in [PARAMETER > PANEL > REPAIR STATION].

After loading a .PRE file, save the .PRE file again and output the specification file. The name of the file is the model name and its file name extension is .lsu. A .PRE file only has to be saved once after the project is complete. If you create or modify a project, the system will send the lsu file automatically.

After inspecting a panel, the system will generate a .PFL file to the specific drive.

3.7.18 SECOND PROJECT

Select two projects to take turns in an interval or exchange two projects automatically according to the positions of fiducial marks.

3.7.18.1 Second Project Setting

Figure 315: Second Project Data Setting Dialog

[Enabled] – Checks the box to start the function. After loading the first project, the system will ask if you want to load the second project. Click Yes and load the second project.

[Check Fiducial Mark] – If the system cannot find a fiducial mark, it will switch to the second project.

[Count] – Select and input number. After the inspection count reaches the setting specific, the system will switch to the second project.

Use same barcode when switch project: When the count is set “1”, the first project’s barcode will keep using in the second project.

Test Research Inc.


[No Board Out] – The test panel will be inspected by the first project and then the second project in sequence without board-out process.

[Barcode Capture] – Switches projects according to the barcode type (software or hardware barcode). If both of them are failed, the board will be sent out to the start position.

If this function is selected, two projects must have different barcode types: one is hardware and another one is software.

If two projects have same type of barcode, the system will not inspect.

The system initially checks the hardware barcode for the first program.

The system must be set to [Inline] mode.

[Board Out to Entrance] –Sends out the panel to the start position if barcode cannot be found.

[Check Bad Mark] – Set a discarded mark as a trigger of switching projects. After the system finds fiducial marks, it will start to find the discarded mark in sequence. If the system cannot find the discarded mark, the system will switch to the second project.

Check All – the system will switch to the second project only when all the discarded marks are failed in inspection.

3.7.18.2 Change to Second Project

Set the second project as the main project. Users can click [Train] to fine-tuning the main project.

3.7.19 INSPECTION BOX OPERATION

Change the parameters of inspection boxes.

Figure 316: Inspection Box Operation Dialog

Test Research Inc.


[Type List] – Lists all the component types in the project.

[Select Type] – Selects a component type. Select a type in [Type List] field first and then

click to add the type to [Select Type] field.

[Algorithm] – Selects an inspection window types.

[Camera] – Selects a one direction of camera to inspect.

[Action] – Select an action needed to change.

1) [Change Passlevel] – Change passes level. When selecting this item, the toolbar below will

be enabled. Click on the button to switch plus or minus sign. You can use the signs to add or subtract the setting value. For example, the original score is 60. If you input 5 with plus sign, the score will be 65. If the number input is 0, the parameter will be changed to the original score. The corresponding parameters are the following:

Missing, Missing_Polarity, Lead – Score

Void, Lead Void – Bright Ratio

Solder – Bridge Ratio

Example

missing box score = 55 >>Original score

change passlevel +5 >>+5

missing box score = 60 >> 55+5 = 60

change passlevel -7 >>-7

missing box score = 48 >>55-7 = 48

change passlevel +0 >>Recover

missing box score = 55 >>Return to the original score

Example: Setting PASS


change passlevel + 5 >>60+5 = 65

set passlevel = 70 >>65+5 = 70(70 including the 5 point)

change passlevel +0 >>65+0 = 65

Example: Save the project and then reload it again


change passlevel + 5 >>60+5 = 65

save file and reopen >>the 65 will be the original score

change passlevel +5 >>65+5 = 70

1) [Delete] – Deletes the selected inspection box

2) [Test] – Sets the selected box [test]

Test Research Inc.


3) [Train] – Trains the selected inspection box.

4) [Untest] –Sets the selected box [Untest]

5) [Untrain] – Untrains the selected inspection box.

6) [OK] –Modifies the inspection box according to the conditions above.

7) [Cancel] –Closes the window and not to change parameters.

3.7.20 SYSTEM PARAMETER DISPLAY

Displays the system and the project parameters in a table. Click [Write To File] to export the parameters in.txt format. If you want to change the inspection speed of the project, input “tspeed” on the keyboard, press [Enter] on the keyboard, and then modify the [Mspeed] field of [Project].

Note: If the speed setting is higher than the default setting, the system could not work.

Figure 317: System Parameter Display

3.7.21 BARE BOARD

Inspect a bare board with inspection boxes. This function can help users to find out the passed inspection boxes in the bare board (It means the setting of these inspection boxes are wrong), so users can fine-tune them. When you select [Check All Boxes], the system will check all the

Test Research Inc.


inspection boxes by using reverse logic (that is, to display the PASSED inspection boxes). When you select [Check Missing], the system will only inspect all Missing Box, and displays the passed inspection missing boxes. When you select [Check Missing and Inverse], the system inspects all Missing box and boxes that are set [Inverse], and display passed inspection boxes.

Figure 318: Bargeboard Dialog

3.7.22 INSPECTION TYPE SETTING

Displays only the specific component(s) after inspecting. (All components on the panel will still be inspected). It is recommended to use in fine-tuning process.

When selecting [Inspection Type Setting], a dialog box will appear as below. You can multi-select the components by holding [Ctrl] on the keyboard. Click [OK] to confirm the setting.

Figure 319: Select Type Dialog

3.7.23 AUTO LOADING

Allowing the system to load a program according to the barcode.

Figure 320: Auto-Loading Selections

Test Research Inc.


Enabled Auto Loading –Enable the auto-loading function when open a program (if only select this function). Select [Load] to load a project and specify a barcode in the column of the barcode-reading dialog box. After the setting, the system will load the corresponding project automatically.

Enable Project Runtime Change –Enable the auto-loading function during inspection. When this item is selected, the system will check the barcode during the inspection. If the current project is not the same with the setting project (based on barcode), the system will switch the project automatically.

Auto Loading Setting – Allows users to set the barcode and corresponding project manually by displaying a dialog box.

Step Flow Chart:

Figure 321: Auto-Loading Flow Chart

Test Research Inc.


Steps:

Step1. Choose [UTILITY > AUTO LOADING > ENABLED AUTO LOADING], a dialog window will appear as below.

Figure 322: Auto-Loading Setting Dialog

Step2. Click [New] to add a new entry.

Step3. Input the barcode number in the column of [Bar code], specify the path for this specific pattern, and then click [OK]. [*] indicates any number

Figure 323: Auto-Load Barcode Setting Dialog

Step4. After the previous step, a barcode rule table will appear as below.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 324: Auto-Load Barcode Rule Table

Step5. After [Enabled Auto Loading] is activated, the system will always ask for the barcode when you load a program. If the barcode does not match the saved barcode pattern, the system will require a file path. You can use the browse function to redirect the path of the program file.

Figure 325: Auto-Load Barcode—Browse Path

The system will display a dialog to pause barcode reading while loading a project. After the system reads a barcode, it will match the open the specific project based on the. If there is no corresponding project, the system will appear a dialog box as Figure 304. Specify the barcode file and clicks [OK].

Test Research Inc.


Figure 326: Auto-Load Barcode—Specify Path

When you save the project as a new project, the system will change the corresponding project automatically whether or not the auto loading project is enabled. For example, the barcode [T9YFY] is specific to [Demo.PRJ]; if you save [Demo.PRJ] to [DemoNew.PRJ], the system will specify the auto-loading project to [DemoNew.PRJ] for [T9YFY].

Step6. If you enable [Enable Project Runtime Change] function, the system will ask a barcode before every single inspection. If the barcode matches the setting, the system will change the project automatically; if the barcode does not match the setting, a dialog box will appear as Figure 305. Click [OK] to keep inspecting with the current project. If barcode reading is failed, the system will also keep inspecting with current project.

Figure 327: Auto-Load Barcode—Specify Path

3.7.24 USERS MANAGER

This function works only if there is a DWORD, [LoginFlag], and the value in registry is [1].

Test Research Inc.


Figure 328: Users Manager Dialog

The Users Manager can use this function to classify all users. Users have to input their names and passwords before running the program. The time of login and logout will be recorded in [login.ini] file under [C:\WINDOWS\system32].

The default users name is [administrator] and password is [1234]. Only the users with Supervisor level authority can use this function to Add, Delete or Modify other users.

New: Input [Users Name] and select the power level for those users. Click [OK] to add new users. The password for new users is 1234. New users can change this password by the [Change Password] function after logging in. The explanation for each power level is below:

[Supervisor] – Users in this level can use all functions.

[Engineer] – Users in this level can use all functions except [Users Manager].

[Operator] – Users in this level can inspect only but cannot modify the project.

Figure 329: Users Update Dialog

[Del] – Removes the users from the users list.

[Chg] – Modifies the authority of the users in the list.

Test Research Inc.


3.7.25 CHANGE PASSWORD

Changing the password of the current user. The dialog box is shown as below. After input the old, new and confirm passwords, click [OK].

Figure 330: Change Password Dialog

3.7.26 COVERAGE REPORT

Show the coverage report as below. After users select this function, the system will calculate the coverage for the components and the pads automatically. Moreover, the report displays the components without [Missing] box, the components with untested pads, and the untested components.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 331: Coverage Report Screen

[Save File] – Exports the report to a .txt file.

Figure 332: Coverage Report Saved Screen

[Edit Pad] – Edits the number of PAD. The default PAD count is according to the [Pin] number in the component Library.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 333: Pad Count Dialog

[Cancel] – Quits the dialog box.

Coverage Report with HTML format.

Users can use this function to review the detailed coverage report. The contents are described below.

Related Files – After using this coverage report, users have to copy four files, [C:\AOI\Coverage Report.html], [C:\AOI\Coverage Report.xsl], [C:\AOI\Coverage Report ByComponentType.xsl] and [C:\AOI\ Coverage Report ByComponent.xsl] to the folder as current project file.

Creation Procedure – After loading the project wanted to generate the report, choose [Utilities > Coverage Report] and click [Save File]. The system will not only output the text file but also a file named [Coverage Report.xml]. Open [Coverage Report.html] file by [Internet Explorer] under the folder as the project file.

Coverage Report Format – The report is divided to two layers. The first layer contains defect list and the total table. After double clicking on the component type in the total table, users can enter the second layer to review the detailed data of the selected component types.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 334: Coverage Report with HTML format

First Layer -- Defect List: Lists the corresponding Fail String and the Algorithm of each defect. See the table in Figure 336. [Defect Name] field lists the whole FailString and [explain] field lists the algorithms which the defect uses. Users can define the specific FailString for algorithm in [C:\AOI\defect.txt] file.

Figure 335: First Layer--Defect List

Test Research Inc.


Figure 336: First Layer--Defect List--defect.txt

First Layer--Total Table: Lists all the component information. The contents of table are described below.

Total test coverage (%): The value of tested inspection box count divided by total inspection box count.

List all defect types in the project.

Test coverage for each defect (%): The values of (tested inspection box count of the defect divided by total inspection box count of the defect in the project). If the test coverage is not 100%, the column will be colored in red.

List all component types. Double click on the component type label, and then the system will show the second layer and display the detail data of the component type.

The number of each component type.

The test coverage and details of the defects that is tested in each component type. The content in parentheses means (the inspection box count that is inspected in this defect and in this component type> the inspection box count that should be inspected in this defect and in this component type). If the rate is 100%, it means all inspection boxes in that type are inspected and the field is colored in green. If the rate is not 100%, the field is colored in red and system lists the component name that is not totally tested and details (the inspection box count that is inspected in this defect and in this component type> the inspection box count that should be inspected in this defect and in this component type).

Test Research Inc.


Figure 337: First Layer--Total Table

Second layer—component detailed data: reviews the detailed information of specific component types. The contents of each field are described below.

[Total Pins+Body] the total Pin number adds Body number (according to the information in Library).

[Testable] total number of inspection boxes in [Total Pins+Body].

[Tested] number of inspection boxes that is not set to [UnTest] or [UnTrain].

The other fields represent the same meanings with the first layer.

Figure 338: Second Layer-Example-0201

Figure 339: Second Layer-Example-TQFP64

Test Research Inc.


3.7.27 AUTO CONVEYOR WIDTH SETTING

Read the conveyor width from PLC to the project or send the conveyor width to PLC to adjust the conveyor width instantly.

Figure 340: Auto Conveyor Width Setting

[Board In Conveyor] Width – Displays the board-in conveyor width.

[Board On Conveyor Width] – Displays the board-on conveyor width. This field displays data only when the parameter [AutoConveyorWidth] in Windows Registry is 2 and the width is set in PLC.

[Get Conveyor Width From PLC] –Saves the current conveyor width to the project.

[Send Conveyor Width and Reset] –Sends the conveyor width to PLC then the conveyor will start to set the new width.

3.7.28 YIELD MANAGEMENT SYSTEM SETTING

Connect to the YMS system.

Figure 341: Yield Management System Setting

3.7.29 LINK PRINTER

Connect to printer. Hence, users can print out the error information from the panel.

Test Research Inc.


3.7.30 FIRST BOARD CHECK

There are two types of checking approach: Check CAD and Check Polarity.

Figure 342: First Board Check Menu

[Check CAD] – Finds the untested component and the missing component in CAD file rapidly.

Step1. Choose [Utilities > First Board Check > Check CAD]

Step2. Adjust marks’ color, shape and size

Figure 343: Check CAD Dialog

[All Boxes Test] – The component with all inspection boxes

[Not All Boxes] – The component with one or more than one untested inspection boxes

All Boxes UnTest – The component with all untested inspection boxes

No Box – The component with no inspection box

Step3. Click [OK]. The system will show the result with panel map as below.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 344: Result of CAD Check

[Polarity Check] – Check the inspection boxes with polarity function.

Step1. Choose [Utilities > First Board Check > Check Polarity].

Step2. The system will inspect those [MISSING POLARITY] or those fail string assigned as [POLARITY] in 0, 90, 180, and 270 degrees. Capture the images if necessary.

Step3. The test result of each component in different angles is shown in a table as below.

Figure 345: Polarity Check Result

The test results [PASS] or [FAIL] are shown in the Rows 0, 90, 180, and 270

Test Research Inc.


NA means untest

Click an inspection box, the system will move to the corresponding FOV under [Train] dialog

Select a component and click button [Inspect] to see the individual test result.

3.7.31 VERSION COMPARE

Compare the test differences between two different versions. After selecting the version and clicking [Compare], the window will display the differences. For example, in Figure 324, the component 402 C10_2 is tested in [Version: 3], but it is not tested in [Version: Test].

Figure 346: Version Compare Screen

3.7.32 OFFLINE TUNE MODE

Users can use the [Offline Tune Mode] to collect and analyze the offline data of multi-panel boards. Under [Offline Tune Mode], the images will be saved into a file named by the time of scanning. The system will automatically collect inspection boxes’ date during the [Offline Tune Mode]. Otherwise, the system will show the [Statistics Chart] dialog box.

Description

Test Research Inc.


Figure 347: Offline Tune Mode Dialog Box

1) Type Selection Area

2) Classification Area

3) Inspection Display Area

4) Statistic Chart Area

5) Threshold Area

6) Setting Area

7) Advised Threshold Area

8) Statistics Area

Test Research Inc.


9) [Set Passlevel] －Sets the advised threshold to the inspection boxes in the classification

that corresponds to the project.

10) [View]－ Examines the inspection boxes that have the same value with the advised

threshold.

11) [Inspect]－Executes [Inspect Fov Images] and reload the statistics data to review.

Function Description

Step1. After selecting [Offline Tune Mode], send the board in and choose [Utilities >Capture Fov Images] to get the FOV images of the panel. Repeat the same steps to capture all objective panels’ FOV images. The images will be saved in a subfolder of [FovImage] (the same folder as project file)... The subfolders are named by the scanning time.

Step2. When inspecting under [Offline Tune Mode], the system can collect the inspection data. After all images are captured completely, select [Inspection\Inspect Fov Images] to collect the data. The results will be saved in a [statistic] folder (under the project folder file). Each folder represents the test results of each panel. .

Step3. When [Offline Tune Mode] is disabled, if there are statistic data mentioned in Step 2, the system will display the statistic dialog. In this case, we use Type and Algorithm to classify (it is can be found out in [Type Selection Area]).

Step4. [Usable: used, 2497] at the top of Classification Area means there are 2497 effective inspection boxes. The definition of an effective inspection box is that we can find the data of the inspection box in statistic data and the project. The subnode of [Usable: used, 2497] is Type, such as T: 74HC138D-SO16, 32; the “T” represents the component type, “74HC138D-SO16” is type name and “32” means the effective inspection box count. The subnode of “T:74HC138D-SO16,32” is Algorithm, such as A:LEAD,16; the “A” means Algorithm, “LEAD” means the Algorithm name and “16” means the inspection box count. If [Usable: used, 2497> T: 74HC138D-SO16, 32> A: LEAD, 16] is selected, then you can review the statistics of all LEAD inspection boxes under type 74HC138D-SO16.

Step5. In [Inspection Display Area], the system displays all inspection boxes under the classification. Select an inspection box, the system will display the corresponding inspection box in Train mode.

Step6. [Statistic Chart Area] displays the statistic chart of all inspection boxes under the specific classification. Because the [PassLevel] in [Type Selection Area] is unchecked, the system will get the default corresponding result to gather statistics.

Step7. [Threshold Area] represents all thresholds of the classification that corresponds to the current project. Click the threshold to show it on the Statistic Chart Area.

Step8. [Setting Area] shows the value that you set. When left click on the Statistic Chart, the system will set the corresponding data to the Setting Area. Like the Threshold Area, the data can change to display on the Statistic Chart by clicking the value.

Test Research Inc.


Step9. [Statistics Area] shows the related statistics. Like the Threshold Area, the data can change to display on the Statistic Chart by clicking the value.

Step10. [Advised Threshold Area], no matter clicking on the threshold area, setting area or statistics area, the selected value will be set a copy to advised threshold area. When click [Set Passlevel] or [View], the system will execute the setting according the value.

3.7.33 SET BOARD NO TO RS

This function is to modify the board number and sent to [Repair Station]. Double click on the board, and then a dialog box will appear. Assign a number and click [OK] to confirm the change. .

Figure 348: Set Board Number to Repair Station

Figure 349: Set Board Number Dialog

3.7.34 MULTIBOARD COPY

The function only works under [Train] dialog box. After selecting this function, the system will copy the parameters and position of all components on board 1 to the other boards in a panel.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 350: Multiboard Copy

3.7.35 LINK EYES CHECKER

Output the inspection result to Hitachi or ASCENTEX Eyes Checker.

Figure 351: Link Eyes Checker

3.7.36 ENABLE BARCODE PRE-CHECK

The system will decide if the panel has to be inspected according to the file that users have provided after scanning the barcode.

3.7.37 BOSCH AMS SUPPORT

Bosch AMS special function.

3.7.38 LITEONIT CHECK BARCODE

Liteonit special function.

3.7.39 GENERATE ASTEEL COVERAGE REPORT

Outputting special format report.

3.7.40 TEST RESULT REPORT

Choose [Utilities > Test Result Report] and select [Link to Repair].

When the function is selected, the system will show a dialog box for specifying a path. After setting, the system will save the [P_barcodeDateTime.dat] file to this path.

The format is described below.

>*B

BDT: test Demo Model Name

Test Research Inc.


OPT: NONE Program Users’ Name

SNR: 9 – 20081212162126 Serial Numbers

TTD: 01. 01. 2009 Test Date

TTS: 16:21:26 Inspection Start Time

TTE: 16:21:30 Inspection End Time

LOT: 1 Lot Number

TAR: SE Tester Serial Number

TMA: Zollner Factory Number

FAILED Test Status for Single Board

C285_1 Defect Component Name

0603 Component Type> Material Number

LEADFAIL Defect Item

##

Data Setting

[Tester Serial Number] (can be defined by users)–the parameter in Windows Registry is [AOIMachineID].

[Factory Number] (can be defined by users)–the parameter in registry is [Companyname].

[Program Users’ Name]–works when [Users Login] function is enabled. The default is NONE.

3.7.41 QUALITY VALIDATION

When this function works with other functions, the system can collect the defect images during inspection. If users want to tune the parameters in the future, these saved images will be the references for verifying the parameter settings. The related functions and steps are described below.

Test Research Inc.



Step1. Set parameters in AOI machine.

Choose [Parameter > User Mode > Link to Repair Station?]

Choose [Utilities > Quality Validation > Enable].


Choose [Utilities > Quality Validation > Setting] to specify the path to save defect images.

Step2. Set parameters in Repair Station. See Figure 331. Select [True] in the parameter [Setting> Others> Quality Validation] in Repair Station program.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 354: Repair Station-Setting> Others> Quality Validation

Step3. Select components and enable the function. You can select components on the FOV image directly or select components under [Utilities\Inspection Box Operation] window. The difference is the number of selected components.

Select components on images directly A.

A. Select the components that you want to re-inspect on the FOV Images (can select one or more components), and then right click on the image and select [ReInspection Comp].

B. After clicking, a dialog box will appear as Figure 332. You can select one of the types to replace the images according to the needs, and then click [OK]. If you select [By Type (Same Algorithm)], a dialog box will appear as Figure 333. You can select one of five cameras, and then click [OK]...

Test Research Inc.


Figure 355: Image Replacement Selection

Figure 333: Applied-Camera Selection

Enable the function under [Inspection Box Operation] dialog] B.

A. Choose [Utilities >Inspection Box Operation].

B. A dialog box will appear as Figure 334. Select wanted components and algorithms first. , select [ReInspect Comp] in column [Action], and then click [OK].

Test Research Inc.


Figure4: Inspection Box Operation] dialog

Step4. After the setting has been confirmed the re-inspection process will be executed directly.

During the inspection, a dialog box will appear as Figure 334. If too many components are selected, it will take long inspection time. In this situation, you can press [Esc] key on the keyboard. The system will stop inspection and output the results of inspected components.

Figure 356: Inspection Process Dialog Box

Step5. Keep adjusting the inspection setting until the inspection result is correct.

When the manual inspection result of one component is [PASS] but the AOI inspection result of the component is [FAIL]:

You have to adjust the parameters setting and test the panel again. If the inspection result is still [FAIL], it means the setting is still inappropriate. Use the [Type], [Component], and [Algorithm] pull-down menus to find out the failed components, recheck the captured images on the right side, and then adjust the parameters until the inspection result is correct.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 357: Component Re-inspection Report

When the manual inspection result of one component is [FAIL], but the AOI inspection result of the component is [PASS]:

You have to adjust the parameters setting and test the panel again. If the inspection result is still [PASS], it means the setting is still inappropriate. You have to adjust the setting until the inspection result is correct.

Figure 358: Component Re-inspection Report-2

Test Research Inc.


3.7.42 MERGING ICT RESULT WITH AOI RESULT

Required version: TRAOI 3.6 04/02/2009 or above

The system will send the test result of ICT to AOI first. After AOI tests are complete, there will be two results in AOI system. (One is from AOI and another one is from ICT.) If both results are [PASS], the test panel will be regarded as [PASS]; on the contrary, it will be regarded as [FAIL]. Users should specify a path for saving [*.DCL] file in AOI machine first (the default path is [C:\AOI\ICT]).

“PASS [barcode].DCL” files means the ICT testing result is PASS; “FAIL [barcode].DCL” file means the ICT testing result is FAIL.

NOTE: In ICT machine, the file name of [*.DCL] should be set as only barcode number, and should not have other special string.

The function confirms the file after inspecting. If relative [*.DCL] files exist in the setting folder, the system will delete all the [*.DCL] file.

1) Choose [Utilities > Union ICT Result As AOI Result].

Test Research Inc.


Figure 359: Merge ICT Result with AOI Result

2) After inspection, the system will check the ICT folder (the default path is C:\AOI\ICT). If the system cannot find any file related to the barcode ([*.DCL] files), it will display a warning dialog box as below. Click [OK] to confirm using the AOI result as the final result.


3.7.43 CREATE BARCODE FILE TO ICT

Required version: TRAOI 3.6 05/12/2009 or above

AOI outputs the barcode file [barcode.barcode] for ICT to read. ICT will delete the files after reading.

Test Research Inc.


The first row of [barcode.barcode] file is the test result, [PASS] or [FAIL]. The following rows are the barcode for AOI reading. If it is multi-barcode, the system will separate them with [\r\n]

Users can select <Separator> and <T [OK] en Index> to get the wanted barcode.

Example:

The barcode is SNUPCB090226118, P544150-001-99, V1007752, 1T006, 9D0918, Q20

If the Separator is a comma (,) and the T [OK] en Index is 1, the output of [barcode.barcode] will be SNUPCB090226118.

If the Separator is a comma (,) and the T [OK] en Index is 1, the output of [barcode.barcode] will be V1007752.

Related Software Barcode Setting

Figure 361: Related Software Barcode Parameters Setup

Both inspection results and the barcode contents sent to Repair Station do not take the file split process...

Test Research Inc.


Figure 362: Create Barcode File to ICT-Result Screen

Procedure

Step1. Choose [Utilities > Create Barcode File To ICT].

Test Research Inc.


Figure 363: Create Barcode File to ICT

Step2. Choose [Utilities > Barcode File Setting] to set barcode file (barcode.barcode).

Specify the saved path; the default path is [C:\AOI]. A.

Set the Barcode Separator to separate the long barcode string; the default is a comma B.(,).

Input the T [OK] en Index to indicate the objective barcode number; the default value C.is 1.

Figure 364: Barcode File Setting

Step3. The file named [barcode.barcode] will be created automatically after inspection.

Figure 365: barcode.barcode File

Step4. The contents of barcode.barcode are shown as below.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 366: Contents of barcode.barcode

1) Version: TRAOI 3.8 or above

AOI can send out data for [Spea ICT] to read.

Because the operation system of Spea ICT is DOS, users should set the following items.

The output file name should be in 8.3 word-length (file name is 8 digits and file name extension is 3 digits).

The principle for naming a file is to use the first barcode, align all digits to right, and complement 8 digits with 0 if the digits are not enough. (For example, the barcode is [56700001], and then the file name will be [000056700.001]).

Users can specify a path to save the file.

The contents of the file are the inspection result; 0 means FAIL and 1 means PASS or SKIP.

Operation Description

Step1. Choose [Utilities > Create Barcode File To ICT], select [Enable] and [TechniSat].

Figure 367: Create Barcode File to ICT - TechniSat

Step2. Choose [Barcode File Setting] to set the file saved path.

Figure 368: Create Barcode File to ICT – Barcode File Setting

Test Research Inc.


Figure 369: Create Barcode File to ICT –Export File Path

Step3. The file created as figure below.

Figure 370: Create Barcode File to ICT –Result

3.7.44 OFFLINE MONITOR

Required version: TRAOI 3.6 Beta 05/15/2009 or above

Function Description

1) Use an Offline machine to fine-tuning several AOI inline machine by network.

2) If many inline machines open the same project, the tuning contents of one linked inline machine will apply to the other linked inline machines.

Related Setting

For Inline Machine

1) Set parameters, [EnableInlineMonitor] = 1 and [Offline] = 0 in Windows Registry.

2) The user’s authority must be opened in [C:\ AOI_Offline_Data] file in inline machine so the offline machine can read and write data in the file.

For Offline machine

1) Set [Offline] = 1 in Windows Registry.

Test Research Inc.


2) The user authority must be opened in [C:\ AOI_Offline_Data] file in offline machine, so the inline machine can read and write data in the file. [C:\ AOI_Offline_Data].

Procedure

1) Start Offline Monitor

Choose [Utilities > Offline Monitor > Enable]. A.

Figure 371: Enable Offline Monitor

Choose [Utilities > Offline Monitor > Show Offline Monitor]. B.

Figure 372: Offline Monitor> Show Offline Monitor

Test Research Inc.


2) You can change the setting of Offline Path, Max Fail Board Count, Max Fail Image Count

Click [Offline Setting] A.

Figure 373: Offline Monitor Dialog-Offline Setting

Change the related information of [Offline Path]. B.

Figure 374: Offline Station Setting

Test Research Inc.


3) You can select an inline machine to monitor, or delete an inline machine.

Figure 375: Add Link> Remove Link

4) When selecting an inline machine to monitor, you should select a folder in inline machine, and open the authority for offline machine to read and write data.

Figure 376: Select an inline machine

Test Research Inc.


5) After the inline machine is selected, the offline monitor will display the connection situation. If the links are failed, the status column will display Disconnect with red color.

The screen is refreshed every 30 seconds

Figure 377: Failed Link

Test Research Inc.


6) If the link is successful, the status column will display Connected with green color. Also, the system will show the inline machine name at [AOI_Machine ID] field and the opened project name at [Current Project Name] field.

Figure 378: Successful Link

Test Research Inc.


7) Left click to highlight the wanted AOI machine and then click Open Link.

Figure 379: Select an Inline Machine to Fine-tuning

8) After system opens a link successfully, it will show a dialog box as below. Click [OK] to confirm the process.

Figure 380: Open Link Successfully

Test Research Inc.


9) After link opens successfully, choose [Inspection > Inspect FOV Images] and do [Offline Fine-tuning].

Figure 381: Inspect> Inspect FOV Images

NOTE: The settings of [Max Fail Board Count] and [Max Fail Image Count] will affect the consistency of the score reviewed on offline machine and the inspected score on inline machine.

Test Research Inc.


3.8 Diagnostic Tab

Figure 382: AOI Menu Bar – Diagnostic Tab

3.8.1 MACHINE I>O TEST

View and select Input and output status.

Figure 383: PC>PLC I>O Test Screen

3.8.2 SELF DIAGNOSIS

Perform several system self-tests.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 384: Self Diagnosis Options

3.8.3 PROJECT TEST

Figure 385: Project Test Function

Choose [Diagnostic > Project Test] to test the structure and link of inspection boxes in the project. If the testing result shows “Fail”, the system will ask to repair the program.

When users run this program in [Train] mode, the system will precede light arrangement test for components in FOVs. If the light setting of components is inappropriate, a warming dialog box will appear as Figure 364. In this dialog box, the incompatible light settings of components are listed. Moreover, the FOVs with incompatible components will be marked in white color as Figure 365.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 386: Project Test Warning Message

Figure 387: Project Test Display on Panel Map

3.8.4 MOTION ALIGNMENT

Before using this function, users should set the parameter 1 in [CrossMotionAlignment] under Windows Registry.

The function is to test the consistency of coordinates for a standard point in one machine. Generally, this function is selected in special situation.

Test Research Inc.


3.8.5 ENABLE STANDARD PROJECT CHECK

3.8.6 CHECKING SITUATION

After the function is selected, the system will compare the current project with standard project under the following three situations.

1) When loading a project is successful.

2) Click icon [Inspect].

Figure 388: Pressing the [Inspect] Button

3) Before saving a project.

Figure 389: Saving a Project

3.8.7 FUNCTION INTRODUCTION

After the comparison process, the system will display a dialog box as below to display the test result. In Figure 368, it shows that the current project and standard project have the same test data. The numbers in the brackets are the standard project data.

Figure 390: Check Standard Project Result Dialog

Test Research Inc.


If the test data between standard project and current project are different, the system will highlight the different parts in red color.

Figure 391: Check Standard Project Result Dialog-Different Situation

Click [Set Standard] and then click Yes to set the current project to be the standard project.

Figure 392: Set the Current Project to be the Standard Project

Click [Detail] to see the details.

Figure 393: Display Details

Test Research Inc.


3.9 Help Tab

Figure 394: AOI Menu Bar – Help Tab

3.9.1 HELP TOPICS

Shows the brief manual.

3.9.2 ABOUT TRAOI

Displays current software version of AOI.

Test Research Inc.


4 AOI ATPG FUNCTION INSTRUCTION

4.1 CAD File Translator for AOI Files

4.1.1 LOAD DATA FILE

Figure 395: Load Data File Screen

1) [Translator] – A tool for transferring CAD files to AOI files. See more detail in Section 4.1.2.

2) [AOI File] – Input or click icon to specify the AOI file path. The system can read two

formats: AOI and SPI. If the format of the loading file is SPI, the system will generate a .pgl file in Library. So, when you do programming in Library part, the system will load this file. If the format of the loading file is AOI, the system will copy all the original [Type] columns into [Hidden] columns and save as the data which cannot be modified. Users can change the [Type] during programming, but the saved original type will not be affected. Users also can use [PARAMETER > PANEL > REPAIR STATION] to retrieve the original type for data collection.

3) [BOM File] – Input or click icon

to specify the BOM path. If the BOM file is loaded, the system will set the components which are included in the BOM file as “Test” and the components which are not included in the BOM file as “UNTEST”. Edit the BOM file by using the “Translator” function or by using the AOI’s built-in function.

Test Research Inc.


Create BOM files: users can create a .txt file with component data and then change the A.file extension to .bom.

Figure 396: Select BOM File (left) & BOM File Format

Use Translator to get BOM files. See Section 4.1.2. B.

Display the BOM function. C.

Load a AOI file and a BOM file D.

Figure 397: Load Data File Dialog

The components listed in the BOM file are set as “Test” in the Component Data list. Others will not be inspected.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 398: BOM File Components Set to ‘Test’

4) [Version] – Defines the current input component version.

5) [Placement] – Inputs the placement machine name.

6) [Load] – Loads AOI (BOM) data files and enter the next step.

7) [Quit] – Exits the program.

Test Research Inc.


4.1.2 FILE TRANSLATOR

In Section 4.1.1, if you click “Translator” in the “Load Data File” dialog box, the system will enter the “File Translator” dialog box as below.

1

2 3

4

5

6

7

8 9

10

11 12

Figure 399: File Translator Window & Functions

1) [Source File] – Specifies the path of the original CAD file.

2) [Unit] – Selects unit for translation process. It must be the same as the CAD file.

3) [Set as Default] – Uses current unit setting as default.

4) [Message Window] – Displays the source file contents.

5) [AOI Translator] – Checks to translate a CAD to an AOI file.

6) [BOM Translator] – Selects to export a BOM file. The system will list the tools for translating in column Translator. Because each company has its own BOM format, the default setting of translator probably is not compatible. If it is not compatible, it is recommended to create a BOM file manually by the method in Section 4.1.1-3.

Test Research Inc.


7) [Import] – Inputs translator program (See Section 4.1.3).

8) [Translator] – Selects a translator program.

9) [Set as Default] – Uses current translator setting as default.

10) [Message Window] – Displays the standard form of the translator.

11) [Translate] – Starts to translate a CAD file to an AOI file.

12) [Quit] – Exits the program.

4.1.3 IMPORT

In Section 4.1.2, if you click [Import] in the “File Translator” dialog box, the system will enter the “Import AOI Translator” dialog box as follows.

1

2

3

4

5 6

Figure 400: Import AOI Translator Window & Functions

1) [Translator] – Specifies the translator path.

2) [Set as Default] –Uses current translator file as default.

3) [Message Window] –Displays the standard form of the translator.

4) [Translator List] – Lists all translators.

Test Research Inc.


5) [Import] – Loads a new translator.

6) [Quit] – Exit the program.

4.2 Edit Component Data

The main table of editing component data is shown as below :

Figure 401: Edit Component Data Main Screen

The meaning of each field is shown as below: (from left to right side)

NAME DESCRIPTION

Test Test or do not test

Part Component name

X X coordinate

Y Y coordinate

Angle Component angle

T>B Top or lower side of the panel

Type Component type

Board NO. Board number

Group Group of the component. The system separates the group automatically according to the beginning characters of the components. The group can also be defined manually in the 7th field of the AOI file.

Test Research Inc.


Overview

To edit component data, right click on a component from the Edit Component Data window. A menu will appear with a list of commands. The detail of the commands will be described in the rest of this chapter.

Command Name Command Name

Board View Change to CCW. (Counter Clock Wise)

Find (Next F3) Edit Mode

Replace Test>Untest

Merge Name (By Type) Top>Lower

Change T>B (Top>Lower) Change Board No.

Rotate Add

Mirror Delete

4.2.1 BOARD VIEW

Displays the component positions on the board from the loaded AOI file.

Figure 402: Select Board View Command

After choosing this command, the Board View window will be displayed directly as Figure 381.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 403: Board View Window

The components locating on the top side of the panel is marked in red color, and the components locating on the lower side of the panel is marked in green color. Moreover, the components which have been edited in Library are displayed as a square, and the components which have not been edited in Library are displayed as a circle.

After right clicking the window, a function bar will appear as Figure 382. In this function bar, you can choose the view type of the component position map (All View, Top View, or Lower View) and other functions.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 404: Board View Window – View & Find Options

If [Show Body Size] is selected, the system will display the components by the size of the Body inspection boxes in Library. However, if the item is not selected, the system will display the components as points.

When you choose [Find] specific, a dialog box will appear as below. Users can input the component name in the column and click [OK].The component will be indicated on the component map as Figure 384.

Figure 405: Board View Window – Find Command

Test Research Inc.


Figure 406: Board View Window – Find Result

After you select [Export Image], a dialog box will appear as Figure 385. [Scale] indicates the image proportion size. Input a wanted size and click [OK], the system will export the component layout image as Figure 386.

Figure 407: Board View Window –Export Image

Test Research Inc.


Figure 408: Board View Window –Result of Export Image

You can use mouse to frame a specific component, and then right click the component and select [Change to Top] or [Change to Lower]. The selected component will be moved to the other side of the panel directly.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 409: Board View Window –Change to Top> Change to Lower

In order to find the mapping of components easily, choose [Windows > Tile Windows] on the main toolbar. This function displays the [Board View] and [Edit Component Data] windows together as Figure 389. Select a component on the [Board View] window to show its information on the corresponding component on the [Component Data] window and vice versa.

Figure 410: Tile Windows Command

Test Research Inc.


Figure 411: Tile Windows Result -- Board View (top) & Component Data

4.2.2 FIND (NEXT F3)

Searches for the specific component data.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 412: Select Find Command

Input the component name and click [OK]. The system will find the specific component on the table list first. Press [F3] on the keyboard to find the next same component.

Figure 413: Find Command Dialog Box

Test Research Inc.


4.2.3 REPLACE

Edits all data fields except [Test], [Part], [T>B] or [Board NO.]

Figure 414: Select Replace Command

Right click on a component > components on the table list, and then choose [Replace]. A dialog box will appear as below. You can input the new x, y coordinates, angle, or component type in column Replace first, and then click [OK] to do the replacement process.

Figure 415: Replace Dialog

The function [Change Type by Part] works for [Type] field only. If it is selected, the system will copy the first character of the name in [Part] field and put it in front of the first character of the name in [Type] field. See the example in Figure 394. 3216 is input to the [Type] field and the function Change Type by Part is selected. After clicking [OK], the selected columns’ names in Type field will be changed to C3216 automatically.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 416: Replace>Change Type by Part Input & Result

4.2.4 MERGE NAME (BY TYPE)

Right click on a component > components on the table list and then choose [Merge Name]. The system will copy the first character of the name in [Part] field and put it in front of the first character of the name in [Type] field.

Notice: When you use [Merge Name] function in one component, the other components in the same type will be merged at the same time. See the example in Figure 395.

.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 417: Merge Name by Type Process & Result

You also can use [Ctrl] on the keyboard to select multi-components.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 418: Merge Multiple Name by Type Process & Result

Test Research Inc.


4.2.5 CHANGE T>B (TOP>LOWER)

Changes all the components on the table list from the top side to the lower side. (Or from the lower side to the top side)

Figure 419: Select Change T>B Command

After choose Change T>B, a dialog box will appear as below. Click [YES] to confirm the change.

Figure 420: Change Top>Lower Confirm Window

Test Research Inc.


4.2.6 ROTATE

Rotates the board angle to specific degree (0 ~ 360 degree).

Figure 421: Select Rotate Command

Input a value between 0 and 360 in column Rotate Angle or select a default value (0, 90, 180, or 270).

Figure 422: Set Rotate Angle Dialog

Test Research Inc.


4.2.7 MIRROR

Sets the panel center as an origin and projects the board mapping. Right click on a component > components and choose Mirror, a dialog box will appear as Figure 402.

[LeftRight] – Projects the left part of panel layout to the right side, and the right part of the panel layout to the left side. (Divides the panel to left part and right part by Y axis of the origin).

[TopLower] – Projects the top part of panel layout to the lower side, and the lower part of the panel layout to the top side. (Divides the panel to top part and lower part by X axis of the origin)

Figure 423: Select Mirror Command

.

Figure 424: Mirror Dialog box

Notice: After the mirror process, the system will change the top side to the lower side and the lower side to the top side. The [Change T>B] command can also be used if necessary.

Test Research Inc.


4.2.8 CHANGE TO CCW (COUNTERCLOCKWISE)

The default rotate direction used by the AOI system is counterclockwise (CCW). If the definition of angles in the original CAD is clockwise (CW), the directions must be changed by this function.

Figure 425: Counterclockwise & Clockwise Rotation

Figure 426: Select Change to CCW Command

Right click a component and then choose [Change to CCW], a dialog box will appear as below. Click [Yes] to confirm the change.

Figure 427: Change to CCW Confirm Window

Test Research Inc.


4.2.9 EDIT>VIEW MODE

Changes the [Component Data] table from [View] mode to [Edit] mode. The information of components can be changed except [Test], [Part], [T>B] or [Board NO].

Figure 428: Select Edit>View Command

Select [View Mode] to prevent unexpected mistake of edition.

Test Research Inc.


4.2.10 TEST>UNTEST

Sets specific components to be tested or untested.

Figure 429: Select Test>Untest Command

In the Test column, the tested components are marked “T” and the untested components are marked “X”.

Figure 430: Change Component Test Status

Test Research Inc.


4.2.11 TOP>BOTTOM

Changing the specific components from the top side to the bottom side or the bottom side to the top side.

Figure 431: Select Top>Bottom Command

In the T>B columns, the components locating on the top side are marked “T”, and the components locating on the bottom side are marked “B”.

Figure 432: Change Component Top>Bottom Data

Test Research Inc.


4.2.12 CHANGE BOARD NO. (NUMBER)

Assigns specific components to a specific board. Generally multi-board information is created by the [Generate Multi-Board CAD Data] procedure, so that it is not necessary to change the board number manually.

Figure 433: Select Change Board Number Command

Right click on a component > components and choose Change Board No. (By selected), and then a dialog box will appear as below. Input the specific number in column Board NO: and click [OK].

Figure 434: Change Board No. Dialog

Test Research Inc.


4.2.13 MERGE TOP>BOTTOM (BY BOARD 1)

Allows users to merge an outspread CAD file into a regular [Top>Bottom] layout. Before selecting this function, users have to sort all component data into a single board by [T>B] function at first. See the example in Figure 413.

Figure 435: Merge Top>Bottom Process

4.2.14 CHANGE TO CCW (BY SELECTED)

Reverses the indemnification of angle from clockwise to counter-clockwise.

Figure 436: Select Change to Counterclockwise

Test Research Inc.


Figure 437: Change to Counterclockwise Process

4.2.15 ADD

Adds a new component to the component tale list.

Figure 438: Select Add Command

After right click the table list and choose Add, a dialog box will appear as below. Input the new component data and click [OK] to confirm the process.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 439: Add Component Dialog

4.2.16 DELETE

Deletes a component from the component table list.

Figure 440: Select Delete Command

After right click a specific component and choose Delete, a dialog box will appear as Figure 419. Input the component name and the board number, and click [OK] to confirm the process

Test Research Inc.


Figure 441: Delete Component Dialog

If several components are selected, a dialog box will appear as Figure 420. Click [OK] to confirm the process.

Figure 442: Confirm Delete Components Window

4.2.17 INCH TO MM> MIL TO MM> 10µM TO MM

Converts the measurement unit. If the measurement unit of CAD file is not mm, select this function to convert the unit from inch to mm, mil to mm or 10 µm to mm.

1m=1000mm

1cm=10mm

1um=0.001mm

10um=0.01mm

1nm=0.000001mm

1mil = 0.0254mm

1inch=25.4mm

1uinch=0.0000254mm

tum=0.01mm

tn=0.00001mm

Test Research Inc.


4.3 Generate Multi-Board CAD Data

4.3.1 SET

Sets the board related parameters. The main menu is shown as below.

Figure 443: Set Command

Board Feature

Setting appropriate numbers of columns and rows to fit the test panel.

Figure 444: Multi-Board Setup Dialog

[Board Rotate Angle] － Sets the board rotate angle.

[Board Size] －Sets the board size.

[Initial Locate] － Locates the panel position.

[Edit Mode] － When users want to edit a multi-board panel, this item has to be selected. It only

works under an existent projection a regular board.

Test Research Inc.


4.3.2 GENERATE

Figure 445: Generate Multi-Board Data Window

4.3.2.1 Component Cad

Selecting this item to generate multi-board data after finishing finding dummy components for every board. The data also can be generated automatically after all fiducial marks have been set and [Next] have been clicked.

4.3.2.2 Save AOI File

Figure 446: Save AOI File Command

[Save All]－Saves multi-board CAD data to a new file.

[Save Board 1]－Only saves CAD file of Board 1.

[Merge To Board 1]－Saves all CAD data to a new file, and change all the board number to 1.

4.3.3 VIEW

Figure 447: View Command

[Zoom In] – Zooms into the panel map slightly by each click.

[Zoom Out] – Zooms out the panel map slightly by each click.

Test Research Inc.


4.3.4 RIGHT-CLICK MENU

Figure 448: Menu from Right-Clicking Mouse

[Locate]－Locates the orientation component.

[Top>Bottom]－Changes the side of the board layout.

[Mirror]－Projects the selected component(s) by left-right or top-bottom method. It cannot

work in [Edit] mode.

[Rotate]－Rotates the panel layout to 0, 90, 180 and 270 degrees. In [Edit] mode, only 180

degrees can be selected. In regular multi-board panel, when 90 or 270 degrees is selected, the system will rotate the other multi-board panels with the same angle automatically.

[Copy]－Copies the board layout from one board.

[Paste]－Pastes the copied board layout to other boards. The Figure 427, 428 and 429 show

the procedure of using [Copy] and [Paste] functions.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 449: Copy & Paste Step 1

.

Test Research Inc.



Test Research Inc.



[New]－Adds a row or a column of board. It can only work in [Edit] mode.

Figure 452: Confirm New Row or Column

[Delete]－Deletes a row or a column of board. It can only work in [Edit] mode.

[Load CAD]－Load a CAD file to one of the board layouts on the multi-board panel in [Manual]

mode. The Figure 431, 432, and 433 show the procedure of using this function.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 453: Load CAD Command

Figure 454: Load Data File Dialog

Test Research Inc.


Figure 455: New CAD File Loaded

Test Research Inc.


4.4 Set Fiducial Mark

4.4.1 SET

Figure 456: Set Fiducial Mark Command

4.4.1.1 FM0 Search Range

Setting the search range for the first fiducial mark manually or using the system default and do not set the range. In manual setting mode, adjust the position and size of the blue box to fit the fiducial mark 0 and then click [OK] to set the range.

Figure 457: Set Fiducial Mark Range

Test Research Inc.


Figure 458: Confirm Fiducial Mark Search Range

4.4.1.2 Get Rotate Angle

Retrieving the rotate angle if the panel has been reloaded.

4.4.1.3 In-line Direction

Setting the direction for board-in and board-out.

Figure 459: Set In-Line Direction Dialog

4.4.1.4 Stop Position

Setting the stop position of board. If the direction setting is [Left in Right Out], click icon to

set the lower-right corner of the panel; if the direction setting is [Right In Left Out], click icon to set the lower-left corner of the panel. See the example in Figure 438. After clicking the

icon , a dialog box will appear as Figure 439. Click [OK] to confirm the stop position setting.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 460: Set Stop Sensor Position

Figure 461: Confirm Stop Position

4.4.1.5 Board 1 Size

Setting board 1 size. See the steps in Section 2.4.4.

4.4.1.6 Standard FM

Training standard fiducial mark. Adjust the size and position of control box to fit the standard object and select this function. Then, the captured images will be saved as a standard fiducial mark image. The standard images are saved in folder [C:\TRI_STANDARD_FM] .

Test Research Inc.


4.4.1.7 Image Weighting

Adjusting the weighting for fiducial marks. The function dialog box is shown as below. Input the number in R, G or B to adjust the light. Click [OK] to confirm the setting.

Figure 462: RGB Weighting Dialog

4.4.1.8 Clear All FM Data

Removing all existing information of fiducial mark. After this item is selected, a dialog box will appear as below. Click [OK] to confirm the setting.

Figure 463: RGB Weighting Dialog

4.4.2 MOSAIC

Getting the whole color panel map. The system also will ask users to get the whole color panel map before the process of [Generate FOV].

Test Research Inc.


4.5 Library

4.5.1 VERIFY

Figure 464: Library Verify Tab

4.5.1.1 Component Library

Entering the [Tune] field.

4.5.1.2 Name Index

Opening the [Name Index] window. See the detail in Section 4.9.7.1.

4.5.2 MERGE

Figure 465: Library Merge Tab

For all components on a panel, if this function is selected, the system will apply all component data in Library including inspection boxes, parameters, and images to every component.

4.5.2.1 Merge

Merging the selected type of component data.

4.5.2.2 Merge All

Merging all types of component data.

4.5.2.3 Capture Offline ATPG Data

Capturing the ATPG data for the Offline Editor use, See the detail in Section 9.3.3.

Test Research Inc.


4.6 FOV Generate

Fields of View [FOVs] are used to define inspection areas. One component may be arranged in more than one FOV; e.g. the pins on a big component. Each FOV may have many different inspection functions.

Figure 466: FOV Function Tab

4.6.1 FUNCTION

4.6.1.1 Generate

Choose Function > [Generate], and then the system will retrieve the FOV arrangement.

4.6.1.2 Release

Cleaning the previous calculated data.

4.6.1.3 Capture Whole Image

Capturing FOV images according to the arrangement.

Test Research Inc.


4.7 Motion Control Panel

Figure 467: Motion Control Outlook & Functions

[Distance Scaling]–Chooses the moving magnification of step.

[Step]–Inputs the moving scale (pulse) of X-Y Table.

[X, Y]– Shows X, Y coordinates of the camera.

[Lock>Unlock]– Limits the camera motion for safety purpose.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 468: Motion Control Outlook – Lock & Unlock

[Direction Arrows] – Clicks the arrow icon to move the camera to the corresponding direction. For example, click

5

2

3

1 4

6

to move the camera to the lower-left side with a specific pulse ([Step]

multiplied by [Scaling]).

[Central Block] – Minimizes the [Motion Control] panel after a single click. If you want to maximize the box, double-click the minimized tab.

Figure 469: Minimize Motion Control Panel

Test Research Inc.


4.8 Light Adjustment

Clicking the icon [LIGHT] to edit lighting control.

Figure 470: Light Button for Lighting Control Editor

4.8.1 LIGHTING CONTROL EDITOR

Figure 471: Lighting Control Editor

Test Research Inc.


1) LED Control

Figure 472: LED Control

This editor displays the lamb panel in graph as Figure 450. From this graph, users can see the LED light positions clearly. There are total 36 light zones in the lamb panel (One black mark in the graph represents one light zone.)

In the lamb panel, only 28 light zones (unlock) can be controlled. Users can adjust the weighting of R, G, and B in these zones. (See the leftmost Figure in Figure 450. The solid black marks in the central area are locked.)

The central circle is for adjusting the coaxial light. (Optional)

Click a graph zone to open or close a zone light. Also, users can drag the mouse to select multiple light zones. When the light zone is closed (locked), users cannot adjust the light weighting.

Put the arrow on the any light zone. The system will show you the setting of the light

weighting. [For example ].

2) [Range] – Sets LED current. (40mA, 60mA, 80mA, and 100mA). Larger current setting results in higher LED brightness.

3) [White Balance] – Views the images in white balance mode. When White Balance function is selected, select [Enable] to review the image in white balance mode. The control bar below can be used to adjust the brightness of the image.

4) [Intensity] – Adjusts LED RGB brightness (0~255). Larger values results in higher LED brightness.

5) [All Color] – When the function is checked, the function of the below white light adjustment will be changed to adjust all enabled area.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 473: LED Brightness Adjustment

6) [Set Name] [Comment] – Chooses lighting style (Top light, Topside light, Side light, etc.) with its comment.

7) [Normal] – Changes the pull-down menu of [Set Name] to only list [Fiducial0], [Fiducial1] and other default light settings. The text of the button will change to [All] after this button has been clicked. It is easier for users to select a proper lighting when they create an inspection project.

8) [All] – After this button is selected, the pull-down menu of [Set Name] changes to list all the different kinds of lightings and the text on the button will be changed to [Normal].

9) [MirrorX] – Projects the current light setting according to the X axis.

10) [MirrorY] – Projects the current lighting setting according to the Y axis.

11) [Rotate+90] –Rotates the lighting 90 degrees in clockwise per click.

12) [Rotate-90] – Rotates the lighting 90 degrees in counterclockwise per click.

13) [Select All>Unselect All] [Select All] – Locks all the light zones. After clicking this button, it will turn into [Unselect All]. [Unselect All] – Unlocks all the light zones. After clicking on this button, it will turn into [Select All].

Test Research Inc.


Figure 474: Select>Unselect LED

14) [Rename] – Changes the name of current lighting set. The process is shown as below.

Figure 475: Rename Lighting Set Dialog

15) [Delete] – Deletes an existing light setting. When a dialog box as Figure 454, click [OK] to confirm the change.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 476: Delete Light Setting Dialog box

16) [Type] – This button only works when [Set Name] setting is [All]. After this function is selected, the system will displays some default settings by graphs

Users can add a new light setting and name it as [Name1_Name2], and then the system will add a page named [Name1] in the [Type] dialog box. A light setting named [Name1_Name2] will be included in [Name1] page.

See an example in Figure 459. After users add two new light settings named [Copy Tuningset] and [Copy_Test], click [Type] button. The system will add a page named [Copy] including two light setting, [Copy_Tuningset] and [Copy_Test].

Test Research Inc.


Figure 477: Lighting Control Editor - Type

17) [Save] – Saves current light setting to current filer.

18) [Save as] – Saves current light setting to a new file.

19) [Import] – Inputs an existent light setting from a *.LED file.

Figure 478: Confirm Copy Sideview Lighting

20) [Export] – Outputs current LED light setting.

When opening a new project, the system sets [C:\AOI\DEFAULTLED7500.LED] file as the default for the new project.

Every change of light setting only saves to current project. Users can share the light setting file that outputs from Export function to other AOIs. (Use Import function to load the light setting file).

4.8.2 SET SPECIFIC LIGHTING

There are 13 kinds of light sources can be used in a project. (The 13 kinds of light sources are also shown when the [Normal] button is clicked.) These 13 types are: two fiducial

Test Research Inc.


lighting types [Fiducial0>1], one lighting [Maplight] for capturing the panel map, two top camera default lighting types [ToplightA>B], two front camera lighting types [FrontlightA>B], two rear camera types [RearlightA>B], and two each for left and right cameras [LeftlightA>B] and [RightlightA>B].

Camera

Top Front Rear Left Right

ligh

tin

g 1 ToplightA FrontlightA RearlightA LeftlightA RightlightA

2 ToplightB FrontlightB RearlightB LeftlightB RightlightB

Adjust the light setting according to panel color or soldering situation and so on.

Coaxial Lighting (Optional): is a uniform light that runs perpendicular with camera axis across the entire field of view makes on-axis illumination systems. It has great ability to capture the component images and find out the solder defects. The difference between coaxial lighting and non-coaxial lighting is shown in Figure 457. .

Coaxial Lighting Non-Coaxial Lighting

Figure 479: the differences between coaxial light and non-coaxial light

Test Research Inc.


4.9 Edit Component Library

4.9.1 LIBRARY INTRODUCTION

Library system consists of three parts: [System Library], [Project Library] and [Users Library].

System Library -- A default library offered by TRI. Users can use it but cannot edit the contents; the default save path is [C:\AOI\TRI_SYS_LIB].

Project Library -- A library for a specific project use. The save path is the same as the project file and locates l in the folder [TRI_PRJ_LIB] Users Library -- An external library created by users. Users can share Library folder for other AOI use.

When editing Library files, the system will find and load the component library from [Project Library], [Users Library] and [System Library]. If there is a Library for that type, the system will load automatically; otherwise, users have to edit manually. If the Library is loaded form [Project Library], the saved path is the Project Library Path. Under the other situation, the saved path is Users Library Path. The system will display the path of Library that the current saved type saves in.

The main screen for editing the component library is shown as below. The detail of each command and icon will be explained in the rest part of this chapter.

Figure 480: ATPG Component Main Screen

1) [Toolbar] – The tools are explained below in this chapter.

2) [Type List] – Lists all types of components on the panel. In front of the component name, there is an icon represents the component edit situation. The meaning of each icon is shown below.

– The type has at least one inspection box and the setting has been saved

Test Research Inc.


– The type has no inspection box and the setting has been saved

– The type has at least one inspection box and the setting has not been saved

– The type has no inspection box and the setting has not been saved

– The type has at least one image that is not captured in [Missing] or [Lead] boxes, and

the setting has not been saved. (The frame color of uninspected boxes is orange)

– The type has a [Locate] window in Library.

3) Image Zone – Arranges inspection boxes and creates Library data. Use the mouse (click and drag) to select boxes.

Figure 481: Use Mouse to Select Boxes

4.9.2 COMPONENT TYPE COMMAND

The function for each item is described in Figure 460.

Figure 482: Component Type Command

4.9.2.1 New

Creating a new type and edit it to Library. Choose New, a dialog box will appear as below. Type the new component type name in the column and click [OK] to create a new component type.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 483: Set Component Type Dialog

4.9.2.2 Load

Loading existing library to apply the inspection setting on the current components.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 484: Component Library Dialog Box

Test Research Inc.


1) [Sketch area] – Shows library’s component information, including body size, shape and locations of inspection boxes by type.

2) [Type] list– Lists all component types by name.

3) [Find] area–Searches the specified component(s).

[Kind]– Classifies all components into IC, CHIP, and Other groups and so on automatically.

[Name]– The name of component.

[Pin]– The number of pin (Input “-1” to search all pins in Library)

[Pitch] – The distance between two pins (Unit: µm)

[Pad] – The over range distance between pin edge and inspection box edge. See the example below. (Unit: µm)

[Body Size] - Sets the body size. The system will use the setting size as the standard to find the components.

[Path]– Sets the path of library folder. The default is “C:\AOI\PackageLibrary”.

[Find]– Searches the specified component based on the setting.

4) [Reload]– Refreshes Library information.

5) [Previous, Next]– Shows the previous and the next library.

6) [Icon] – Replaces component sketches by real component images. See the example in Figure 463. See the detail of saving images in Section 4.9.7.6.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 485: Component Library Icon Result

7) [OK]– Confirms the change. (Double click the component in the sketch area has the same effect.).

8) [Cancel]– Exits the dialog box.

Load Library Procedure

Step1. Input the search conditions and click [Find].

Step2. Double click the component sketch or click [OK] to load Library data.

Test Research Inc.


Step3. A dialog box will appear as below afar loading Library.” If the current type is the same as the selected library, click [Yes]. The current type will be listed as a child type of the selected type. If not, click No.), If No is selected, the current type will be copied to Library and saved as a new library with its own type name. See the example below (In this example, the current type is R805 and the 0805 sketch is selected.)

Figure 486: Confirm Components as Same Type

If you select [YES]:

The primary name of the component will be changed to 0805, and the secondary name will be R0805. (Library file is still 0805.pgl) If the project has the type “R0805” next time, the system will apply this setting automatically.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 487: Primary & Secondary Component Names

Then, a dialog box will appear as below to ask if you want to change the type name from [R0805] to [0805]. Click [Yes] to change or click [No] to keep the type name.

Figure 488: Confirm Change Component Type Window

If you select [NO]:

R0805 will be saved as a new type. (The new file called R0805.pgl will be created.) . The primary name will still be R0805.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 489: New Primary Component Type

4.9.2.3 Save

Saving the current editing contents to Library. After click [Save], a dialog box will appear as below. Click [OK] to save.

Figure 490: Confirm Save Window

4.9.2.4 Save to Project Lib

Saving the editing library to Project Library. (It means the current editing contents are only for this project.) The saved path is [TRI_PRJ_LIB] folder, the same as the project file.

4.9.2.5 Save All to Project Library

Saving all libraries used in this project to Project Library, the saved path is [TRI_PRJ_LIB] folder, the same as the project file.

4.9.2.6 Set to Users Lib

This function only works when the current editing library is [Project Library]. After this item is selected, users can set this Library to [Users Library]. Moreover, the system will copy Library file [*.pkg] form [TRI_PRJ_LIB] to [TRI_USERS_LIB] folder.

Test Research Inc.


Choose [Setting >Users Library Path] to specify the path of [TRI_USERS_LIB].

Figure 491: Set Users Library Path

4.9.2.7 Close All

Closing all the editing pages in Library .The item can save the time because users do not have to close the windows separately. After the item is selected, a dialog box will appear as below. Click [Yes] to save all the data to Library or click [No] to quit without save or click [Cancel] to stop the action.

Figure 492: Close All>Save All Confirm Window

4.9.2.8 Rotate

Rotating all the windows 90 degrees in counter clockwise direction to by each click.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 493: Rotate Command Result

4.9.3 EDIT COMMAND

Figure 494: Edit Command Menu

4.9.3.1 Copy to All Pins

Copying the setting of the selected [Pin] windows to all the other pin windows. Select a [Pin] window and the other inspection boxes linked to it first, and then select this item to apply the function. . If the selected inspection boxes do not link to the selected pin window, a dialog box will appear as below. Click [OK] and then reselect the inspection boxes.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 495: Copy to all Pins

4.9.3.2 Align

Aligning all selected inspection boxes to the selected direction. See the example in Figure 475. After selecting the inspection boxes and choosing Align > Top, the rightmost two boxes will climb to the same height as the leftmost two boxes. .

Figure 496: Align Selected Boxes Command

Figure 497: Align Selected Boxes Result

4.9.3.3 Link

Setting an affiliation between two windows. Because some kinds of inspection boxes such as [Void] and [Pin] do not have position ability, they have to link with other boxes that have the position ability such as [Missing], [Lead] and [Align]. Subsidiary boxes linked with parent boxes swill move with parent boxes in inspection process.

The system will automatically link parent and subsidiary boxes that should be linked when they are created at the same time by [Add All Windows] function.

See the example in Figure 476. If two inspection boxes are linked, there will be a blue line connecting the center of the parent inspection box and the center of the child inspection box. If the link is created successfully, a dialog box “Link successful” will appear.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 498: Link Command Result

4.9.3.4 Unlink

Breaking the link between windows. If the link is broken successfully, a dialog box “Unlink successful” will appear

Figure 499: Unlink Command Result

Test Research Inc.


4.9.3.5 Mirror

Mapping and copying the inspection boxes by X direction, Y direction or the origin.

Figure 500: Mirror Command Dialog

4.9.3.6 Rotate Copy

Rotating and copying the inspection boxes by assigned angle o. See the example below. Select four inspection boxes and then choose rotate copy > 90. Four inspection boxes will appear in the 90 degree counterclockwise direction.

Figure 501: Rotate Copy Command Dialog

Figure 502: Rotate Copy Command Result

Test Research Inc.


4.9.3.7 Rotate Side

Rotating the pin direction 90 degrees counterclockwise per click. (The function Show Side should be selected)

Figure 503: Rotate Pin Direction Command Result

4.9.3.8 Change Shape

Changing the window shape from square to circle or from circle to square. It only works for [Void] or [Solder] window.

Figure 504: Change Window Shape Command Result

4.9.3.9 Change CW>CCW

Changing the definition of rotation direction. Users can select to apply only for this component, for all components or for components with same type.

Figure 505: Change Window Shape Command Result

Test Research Inc.


4.9.3.10 Edit Pin Name

Editing the name (number) of the selected pin. The number can be displayed in Repair Station.

Figure 506: Edit Pin Name

4.9.4 VIEW COMMAND

Figure 507: View Command Menu

4.9.4.1 Show Side

Showing Pin directions by small circles. The correct direction is shown as below. If the direction is wrong, select [Edit>Rotate Side] to change the direction.

Figure 508: Example of Show Side Function

Test Research Inc.


4.9.5 ADD COMMAND

Figure 509: View Command Menu

4.9.5.1 Body

The function of the [Body] box is to inform the size and position of components to Library. Creating a Body box also can help for editing Library.

After choose [Add > Body] or click icon , a yellow square, [Body] box, will appear directly in the FOV image, Move the box position to the component center by [Motion Control] panel and then adjust the size of the Body Box by clicking and dragging the mouse to fit the component size. .See the example in Figure 492.

Figure 510: Adding a Body Box

Only one Body box is allowed for each component. If users this function when the Body has already existed, a dialog box will appear as below. Click [OK] to find the existent [Body] box.

Figure 511: Existing Body Box Warning Message

Test Research Inc.


4.9.5.2 Pin

The function of the [Pin] Box is to inform the size, position and number of IC pins to

Library. After choose [Add > Pin] or click icon , start to draw a [Pin] box by clicking and dragging the mouse in the FOV image. The initial position of the click must be at the same side with IC pin against the [Body] box. See the example in Figure 490. If you want to create a [Pin] box for the upper IC pin, you should left click the position where is upper to the [Body] box to draw a [Pin] box. Notice: If a pin is created at one side of the body and then moved to another side, the system will have problems later in creating inspection boxes.

Adjust the [Pin] box size and position to fit the IC lead.

Figure 512: Adding a Pin with the Pin Box Function

If you select 2 pins and then click icon again, a dialog box will appear as Figure 491. Input the total number of pins in the column (including the two selected pins) and click [OK]. The system will generate the corresponding pins by interpolation. When [Auto middle] function is selected, all the pins will move against the middle of body.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 513: Adding 4 Pins with the Pin Box Function

4.9.5.3 Window

Choose [Add > Window], start to draw a [Window] box by clicking and dragging the mouse in the FOV image. After the [Window] box is created, move the box to the specified position and change the setting of [Windows] Box. See the example in Figure 492. First, draw a [Window] box on the upper position of the component. Second, move the box to the type name position of the component. Third, change the inspection setting to inspect [Missing] [TopCamera] and [Topsidelight]. .

Figure 514: Adding Void Window with Add Window Function

The default of [Windows] box is [TopCamera], [Topsidelight] and [Void Window]. Click [Property] to change the settings. See Section 4.9.8.2 Property for more information,

4.9.5.4 All Window

After [Body] and [Pin] boxes have been existed, choose [ADD > ALL WINDOW], a dialog box will appear as Fig 493. Select the wanted windows type and click [OK], the system will generate the corresponding inspection boxes on the component. For example, [Missing] and [Missing (Polarity)] will be generated on the [Body] box, [Solder], [Lead], [Lead Void], [Pin Window] and

Test Research Inc.


[Lift Void] will be generated on the [Pin] boxes, and [Align] will be generated to cover all pins. Users have to adjust all the inspection boxes in order to fit the component.

Notice: This function is not used so often currently. Please use Model Library instead.

Figure 515: Add All Window Dialog

When [Solder] and [Void Window] are selected at the same time and click [OK], a dialog box will appear as below. Click [Yes] to confirm the change.

Figure 516: Confirm Window Arrangement in Same FOV

4.9.5.5 Polarity Pair

Choose [ADD > POLARITY PAIR], a pair of windows will be generated. Move them to different positions with a variation of gray levels. The system will show Polarity Fail if the gray level of two windows is reversed.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 517: Add Polarity Pair Function

4.9.6 ZOOM COMMAND

Figure 518: Zoom Command Menu

4.9.6.1 Zoom In

Choose [Zoom > Zoom In] or click icon to increase the frame image size. The image will be enlarged10% per click.

4.9.6.2 Zoom Out

After choose [Zoom > Zoom Out] or click icon to decrease the frame image size. The image will be reduced 10% per click.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 519: Zoom In (left) & Zoom Out

4.9.7 TOOL COMMAND

Figure 520: Tool Command Menu

4.9.7.1 Name Index

The main purpose of this function is to improve the efficiency of classify the component type. At most of time, the same components have different component names (come from different customers or lots). In order to easily sort the components, [Name Index] function is used to classify the components.

In [Name Index] system, a component has two names, Primary Name and Secondary Name. Primary Name is the component model name saved in Library, and Secondary Name is the customer-made component name under the Primary Name. See the example in Figure 499. Both component 0402 and 402 belong to the same component model 0402. When there is a component 402 on the test board, the system will apply the setting of 0402 library to inspect it.

The default path of the [Name Index] is C:\AOI\name.idx

Test Research Inc.


Figure 521: Name Index Dialog

[Sch] – Searches the specified index name.

[New] – Creates a new primary or secondary index name.

Figure 522: Create Secondary Name, Step 1

Test Research Inc.


Figure 523: Create Secondary Name, Step 2

[Chg] – Changes the primary or secondary index name.

[Del] – Deletes the primary or secondary index name.

[Show] – Shows all the primary names.

[Load] –Loads a .TXT file into [Name Index]. See the example in Figure 502.Create a TXT.file by the format Figure 506. (Input [Tab] on the keyboard to generate the space between first name and the second name. Then, when loading the file, the first names will be located under [Primary Name] and the second names will be located in the [Secondary Name].

Figure 524: Name Index Load Function Result

[ ] – Closes the windows. A dialog box will appear as below; click [Yes] to save.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 525: Confirm Name Index Data Save

4.9.7.2 Original Size

Returning to the original size of an image frame.

4.9.7.3 Suit Size

Showing the suitable size of an image frame.

4.9.7.4 Move Center

Moving the camera to the component center.

4.9.7.5 Capture Image

Capturing images for offline editor use. The system will create a new folder named [OfflineImage] under the project file. The images can be saved by component name or type.

[Current Component] – Capturing only the viewing component. After you select this item, the system will capture 10 images including: two images are from top camera [ToplightA>B], two images are from the front camera [FrontlightA>B], two images are from the rear camera [RearlightA>B], two images are from left camera [LeftlightA>B] and two images are from right camera [RightlightA>B].

[All Type] –Capturing the 10 images of the first component (ordered by name) in each type.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 526: Capturing Offline Image Process

If a component size is over an FOV image, you have to enlarge the size of [Body] Box to fit the component size. The system will combine several pieces of FOVs to generate a complete component image. However, the angle camera does not have this function and only can capture a single FOV image.

4.9.7.6 Capture Component Icon

Allowing users to capture a real image and save it as a component icon. After users load the [Component Library] and click [Icon], they will see the icon instead of the original inspection box layout.

Figure 527: Capture Component Icon Command

[Current Component] – Captures the current image and saves it as the component icon.

[All Type] – Captures all component images and save them as component icons.

[Import Component Icon] – Imports a specific image to be the new component icon

Test Research Inc.


4.9.7.7 Inspect

This function helps users to see the test results of one selected inspection box immediately. Users can modify the parameter setting based on the test results. Currently, this function only works on inspection boxes such as [Missing], [Lead], [Void], and [Extra Blob] and [Color Windows].

Select an inspection box first and then click icon [ ]. The system will inspect the selected inspection box and display the result.

Figure 528: Inspect Single Inspection Box

4.9.7.8 Model Library

Users can create their own [Model Library] or apply the default [Model Library] to reduce the programming time. By using the model library, users can create inspection boxes on the component easily by clicking the relative component icon on the model library table

1) Creating a Model Library

The system saves the [Model Library] into two different paths. The [Post-Flow] data will be saved in the folder [C:\ AOI\ ModelSuite \PostFlow], and the [Pre-Flow] data will be saved in the folder [C:\ AOI\ ModelSuite \PreFlow]

The model-related data is saved under the folders which described above. The model data consists of two types of files: .XML and .BMP. A.XML file is used to define the inspection boxes’ type, variable, location, size, location of the [Model Library] and [Hint]. A .BMP is used to display the component icons.

Test Research Inc.


Generally, the [Model Library] data is provided by TRI. If necessary, you also can modify the data by youself. See more information in Section 4.9.7.9.

2) Applying the Model Library

Step1. After selecting a component type from Library list, create all the [Body] and [Pin] boxes on the selected component. See the example in Figure 508.

Figure 529: Body & Pin Boxes

Step2. Choose [TOOL > MODEL LIBRARY] or click icon in Library windows. The [Model Library] table will appear as below.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 530: Model Library Dialog

Step3. Move the mouse to the model Figure, a label will appear and show which component category the model Figure represents.

Figure 531: Example – Icon Label

Step4. Select a corresponding model based on the inspected component type. In the example, select model Figure[R NET].

Test Research Inc.


Figure 532: Select Default Model

Step5. The system will automatically generate the inspection boxes on the component. The location and size of the inspection boxes are determined by the settings of [Body] and [Pin] boxes.

Step6. After selecting a model Figure, the system will search the model library based on the body size of the component. Then, a component library dialog box will appear as Figure 512. All the model types which have the same body size of the selected component will be listed on this dialog box. Select a correct model type or use the default model type

Test Research Inc.


Figure 533: Create Model Library Result

Step7. After applying the model data from the Model Library, you need to adjust the location and size of each inspection box if necessary.

Step8. Capture images of [Missing] and [Lead] inspection boxes to complete the inspection setting.

Test Research Inc.


4.9.7.9 Edit Model Library

This function is to add a new default type or to modify the parameters in the existing Model Library. After the modification, the system will use the modified parameters to inspect the selected component type.

1) Adding a new type

Step1. Choose Too l> Edit Model Library or click icon , and then an Add Windows Dialog box will appear as Figure 513.

Step2. Select a window and a model that fit the inspection component.

Figure 534: Create Component Library

Test Research Inc.


Step3. Select an inspection box to edit the parameters. The examples below show how to edit the [Missing] and [Void] inspection boxes on a chip component.

CHIP–Missing box

Figure 535: Edit Model Library-Missing

Test Research Inc.


CHIP–Void

Figure 536: Edit Model Library-Void

Step4. Choose [Tool >Save for Model Library] to save the edition.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 537: Save for Model Library

Step5. After selecting save for model library, a dialog box will appear as below. . You can select a model name from the combo box or type a new name manually. If you select an existing model name, the system will apply the default parameter settings directly; if you input a new model name, the new model name will be listed at the lower of the dialog box, You can select it from the combo box and then click [Apply] to use it.

Figure 538: Save Model Library Dialog

Test Research Inc.


Figure 539: Model Library Application Menu

Step6. The system will save the model setting in the file [modleName.mlb]. The path is shown in the dialog box below.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 540: Model Library Saved Path

2) Modifying an existing type

Step1. Select [Tool > Edit Model Library].

Step2. Select [Tool > Model Library] to open the selection window of Model Library and then select a type to apply.

Step3. Modify the parameters of the applied type.

Step4. Click [Tool >Save for Model Library] to save the setting.

Definition of Parameters

B: body

PN: pin

PA: parent

W: width

H: height

X: X coordinates of center point

Y: Y coordinates of center point

+: addition

-: subtraction

*: multiplication

>: division

W, X: horizontal direction

H, Y: vertical direction

Ex:

Width of parent box: PAW

Test Research Inc.


X coordinates of body: BX

….combined with the above items

Parameters that can be set

Property Dialog

X, Y, Width, Height, Search Range

Pass Level Dialog (Missing, Lead)

ShiftX, ShiftY

The other settings

Click on a field that you want to modify, and then click [F1]. You can set the maximum and minimum values. This function is to avoid an unreasonable value created by the system automatically.

Figure 541: Set Max and Min value

Constraint and Notice

For the components which have pins, users only can create a pin box when building Library.

After setting the formula, users have to provide the sufficient information. Otherwise, the system will show a warning message. For example:

PA should create a link

PN should create a pin box first

B should create a body first

4.9.7.10 Save for Model Library

Saving the parameters to the Model Library. The function only works when the Edit Model Library is selected. See more information in the section 4.9.7.9.

Test Research Inc.


4.9.7.11 Offline ATPG Editor

The details are described in Section 9.3.3.

4.9.8 SETTING COMMAND

Figure 542: Setting Command Menu

4.9.8.1 Algorithm Dialog Function Description

Setting the logic between different algorithms (different type of inspection boxes) in a selected component.

Figure 543: Algorithm Dialog & Functions

1) Functions Introduction

[Defect] –Defines the name of defect.

Test Research Inc.


[Operator] – Selects the logic. There are three options in this field: [& (AND)], [| (OR)] and [^ (XOR)].

[&(AND)] –Only when all the selected boxes pass the inspection setting, the system will show “Pass”. Otherwise, it will show “Fail”.

[|(OR)] – If one of the selected boxes passes the inspection setting, the system will show “Pass”. Otherwise, it will show “Fail”.

[^(XOR)] – If the pair of selected boxes has the different results, the system will show “Pass”. Otherwise, it will show “Fail”.

[Logic] – Sets the logic operation formula. Double click on the logic formula in the list window. Then, it will be copied to the [Logic] field.

Figure 544: Click on List Item to Fill Logic Field

[Group>Item] – Selects the logic operation approach: Group (logic formula) or current FOV inspection box. See more details in the later part, [Group].

[Get] – Generates a symbol which represents one or more inspection boxes to the list window. See the example below.

If you select only one inspection box and then click Get, a symbol called [W1] will be generated in the list window.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 545: Click [Get] for One Inspection Window

Test Research Inc.


If you select more than one inspection boxes, click [Get]. A symbol called [W1 W2 W3 W4] will be generated in the list window.

Figure 546: Get Several Inspection boxes

You also can generate several symbols in the list window.

Figure 547: Get Several Inspection boxes separately

Test Research Inc.


[Group] – Groups the symbols with the selected operator and group item. See the example below. If you follow the steps in the figures below , the system will compose the logic formula based on the selections of Operator and Group>Item. .

If you select [Group] in [Group>Item]

1. Select Operator

2. Check Group

3. Select

windows here 4. Press

[Group]

5. Result: appear

group combined

with windows and

operator

Figure 548: Group Windows by Group Process

If you select [Window] in [Group>Item]

2. Select Operator

3. Select Window

4. Press

[Group]

5. Result: appear

group combined

with windows and

operator

1. Select Inspection

Windows

Figure 549: Group Windows by Window Process

Test Research Inc.


You can use the existent groups to create more complicated logic formula.

1. Select Operator

2. Check Group

3. Select

groups here 4. Press

[Group]

5. Result: appear

group combined

with windows and

operator

Figure 550: Group Other Groups & Windows Process

[Del Group] – Deletes the logic group.

Figure 551: Delete Group(s)

Test Research Inc.


[Del Defect] – Delete the logic formula.

Figure 552: Delete Defect Logic

[New Defect] – Adds a new defect type with a defined logic formula. After clicking this item, a dialog box will appear as Figure 532. Click [Yes] to confirm the setting.

Figure 553: Create Defect Logic

Test Research Inc.


When inspection boxes are set on an IC lead, a dialog box will appear as Figure 534. If you want to apply the setting to other corresponding inspection boxes, click [Yes].

Figure 554: Windows Set on an IC Lead

Figure 555: Confirm Copy Logic by Pin & Results Message

Test Research Inc.


[Change Defect] – Changes the name of defect.

Figure 556: Confirm [Change Defect]

[View] – Highlights the inspection boxes which have defect formula.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 557: View Inspection Box

Test Research Inc.


2) Algorithm Dialog: Procedure for Setting Logic

Step1. Select the inspection boxes for setting logic. (Hold on [Ctrl] to select more than more inspection boxes)

Figure 558: Select Inspection Boxes

Step2. After selecting an [Operator], check the [Window] box, and then click [Group], a symbol which represents selected inspection boxes with specified operator will be generated in the list window as Figure below.

Figure 559: Click on [Group] to Display Inspection Boxes

Step3. Double click the symbol in the list window. Then, the logic formula will be copied to the [Logic] field.

Test Research Inc.


Step4. Give a name for the new logic formula in [Defect] field. Then, click [New Defect] to create the new logic.

Figure 560: Add Name to [Defect] Field, Click on [New Defect]

Step5. When inspection boxes are set on an IC lead, a dialog box will appear as Figure 540. If you want to apply the setting, click [Yes]. A dialog box will appear and show how many pins the setting have been applied.

Figure 561: Copy IC Pin Logic

Test Research Inc.


4.9.8.2 Property

Setting the properties of the inspection box.

Figure 562: Set Inspection Box Properties Dialog

[(pin-1)] – Represents the serial number of the inspected IC pin. When it shows (pin-1), it means there is no IC pin in the inspection box.

[Component Type] – Displays the component type

[Name] – Displays the inspection box name

[Angle] – Displays the rotation angle of the component.

[X] – X coordinate of the component.

[Y] –Y coordinate of the component.

[DX] – The length of inspection box in X direction (unit: um).

[DY] – The length of inspection box in Y direction (unit: um).

Test Research Inc.


[RGB] – Displays the weighting of the selected area.

[Test] – Sets if the inspection box works or not. Select TRUE to enable inspection, FALSE to disable inspection.

[Camera] – Selects a camera to inspect the specified inspection box.

[Lighting] – Selects a light type.

[Method] – Selects an inspection type for the inspection box.

[Fail String] – Selects a fail type. Users can use this function to divide the inspection boxes used same method into different groups. For example, users can select a fail type, [Void Fail] or [Upside Down], to [Void] inspection boxes depending on the situation. If users do not select a failed type, the system will use the default fail type setting.

[Inverse] –Enables the inverse logic function. If users select [True] in this item, the test results will be changed. For example, if the test result is “Pass”, the system will show “Fail”. On the other hand, if the test result is “Fail”, the test result will show “Pass”. The default setting of this item is [False].

[Search Range] –Sets the search range for [Missing] or [Lead] boxes manually. Users can check the box of search range first and then input the values in the X or Y columns to increase or decrease the search range (unit: um). If users do no select this item, the system will use the default setting. Process:

Step1. Open [Property] dialog box and check [Search Range]. A thick purple box will appear as below.

Figure 563: Select & Display [Search Range]

Step2. Click the box and then adjust the frame size to the wanted search range.

Notice: The search range cannot be smaller than the inspection box.

Step3. Click [Set] to confirm the setting. The X and Y columns will display the length values of the search range automatically.

Figure 564: Setting the Search Range

Test Research Inc.


Step4. The search range is displayed with a thin purple frame as below.

Figure 565: Select & Display [Search Range]

[Image Group] – Sets the image groups for the components which are the same type but belong to different groups. See more information in the section 4.2 Edit Component Data

[No Image Group] – Shows the component groups which have no image. For example, if there are two groups (has images) and R (has no image), under the component type 0402 the system will show only the R group under 0402 when this item is selected..

[ADD] – Adds an image from the inspection box to Library. This function only works for [Missing] and [Lead] inspection boxes.

[Remove] – Removes a selected image from Library.

[Mask] – Covers unnecessary parts in the selected image. If this function is applied in an image, the image will be highlighted with a green box as Figure 543.

Figure 566: Image with Mask Set

Procedure

Step 1. Select an inspection box and choose Setting > Property (or click ).

Step 2. Click the button Mask.

Step 3. Select a mask shape (Rectangle, Circle or Pen) and adjust the box size to fit the unnecessary part. For example, for a chip component, the unnecessary part is the

Test Research Inc.


number on the top of the component. So you have to adjust the box size as shown in Figure 544.

Notice: The default setting of the mask shape is Rectangle.

Figure 567: Image with Mask Set

Step 4. Click button Mask Inside or Mask Outside depending on the need. See Figure 545

Figure 568: The differences between Mask Inside and Mask Outside in Rectangle Mask and Circle Mask

Step 5. If you want to modify the mask area, select Eraser to edit the mask size or click button Clear All to remove all the mask areas.

Test Research Inc.


Notice: When you use Pen or Eraser function, you can select an appropriate width (unit: pixel).

Step 6. Click [OK] to confirm the mask setting. Otherwise, click [Cancel].

4.9.8.3 Pass Level

Setting passes level of the selected box.

Figure 569: [Set Pass Level] Dialog

[Type] – Displays the component type of the selected inspection box

[Windows] – Displays the name of selected inspection box. If more than one box is selected, it will display [========].

[Method] – Displays the Algorithm type of the selected box.

[Level Check] – Sets the gray level check. Generally, this function only can be used in a [Missing] box which has no mask. When selecting True in this item, the system will check gray level of the middle part (10un x 10um) of the inspection box. If the difference of gray level between view model and the selected box is over the value setting in column [Level Difference], the system will show Fail.

[Parameter Setting Zone] – Sets the parameters for pass level. See the detail in the section 4.10.

[Set Default] – Saves the values in the parameter setting zone as the temporary setting.

[Save Default] – Saves the values in the parameter setting zone as the permanent setting. The setting will be saved to the file called defaultValue.txt under C:\AOI.

Test Research Inc.


4.9.8.4 Folder

Setting the path for Library. . The function is unavailable in Library with new version of software.

Figure 570: Directory

Load Path – Specifies a path for loading Library data.

[ADD] – Adds a component library path. More than one path can be added. See the example below.

Figure 571: Add Component Library Directory Path Process

[Remove] – Removes the existent Library path.

[OK] – Saves settings and closes the dialog

[Cancel] – Closes the dialog box without the change saving.

Test Research Inc.


Save Path – Specifies the path for saving Library data.

4.9.8.5 Users Library Path

Specifying a path for saving the Users Library.

4.9.8.6 Pin Direction

Defining the rotate direction of the IC pins. There are two options, CW (clockwise) or CCW (counterclockwise). The default setting is clockwise.

Figure 572: Pin Directivity Dialog

After creating IC pins, choose Setting >Pin Direction and select CW or CCW. The IC pins will be reordered the serious number based on the setting. Users can see the serial number of IC pins in the [Property] dialog box.

Notice: 1. the function will work after you click .

2. This function can only be used once.

Test Research Inc.


4.9.8.7 Weighting

Setting the weighting of the inspection box.

When there is no captured image in the Property dialog box for the selected inspection box, the weighting setting dialog box will display the image of the selected inspection box. However, if there is a captured image in the Property dialog, users can set the weighing of the captured image.

Figure 573: Set Weighting

4.9.8.8 Set Distance

Measuring the distance between “point to point”, “point to line”, “line to line” or light bar flatness.

Setting Interface

Setting Interface for measuring the distance between two components.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 574: Set Distance Table Dialog-Point to Point

Setting Interface for measuring the distance between two lines or the distance between a component and a line.

Figure 575: Set Distance Table Dialog-Point to Line or Line to Line

[Target1], [Target2] – The name of the objective inspection boxes which users want to measure the distance. After an inspection box is selected in [Target1], the system will generate the [Target1] related setting in the pull-down menu in [Target2] automatically.

[Get] – Sets the selected inspection box to the [Target] column.

[Value] – Sets the standard values of ShiftX and ShiftY. When any target is the [CalDistance] inspection box, users only have to set one value.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 558: Set Distance Table Dialog-Point to Line or Line to Line

[Tolerance] – Sets the tolerance values of the X direction and Y direction shift.

[Result] – Displays the inspection result.

[Add] – Adds the current setting to the setting table. If two selected inspection boxes belong to the same component, the setting can be added by type.

[Advanced Add] – Adds the current setting and applies the current setting to other inspection boxes by one of the three methods. The first method is to apply the setting to the inspection boxes that are at the same horizontal level and have the same distance. The other two methods are not available so far.

Figure 576: Set Distance Table Dialog-Advanced Add

[Remove] – Removes the current setting in [Target1] and [Target2]. When two inspection boxes in [Target1] and [Target2] belong to the same component, users can select to remove the setting by type.

[Remove All] – Removes all settings related to [Target 1].

[Line Difference] – Sets the line difference] related parameters. There are three choices, [Test Horizontal], [Test Vertical] and [All]. [Test Horizontal] means to test the vertical shift for the component in the same horizontal level; [Test Vertical] means to test the horizontal shift for the

Test Research Inc.


component in the same vertical level; [All] means to test the other directions. The related settings are in Section 5.5.1.

Figure 577: Set Distance Table Dialog-Line Difference

The procedure for measuring the distance between two inspection boxes in the same component: (can be used in both Library Mode or Train Mode)

Light Bar Horizontal Measurement

Step 1. Create a box to test the component (a [Lead] or [Missing] box) and a box to find the edge (by CalDistance box) in Library. Then, choose the [Set Distance] function (menu>Setting>Set Distance). See the example in Figure 560.

Figure 578: Set Distance Table Dialog-Light Bar

Step 2. Click the [Missing] box and then click [Get]. The information of the [Missing] box will pass to the [Target1] column. Repeat the same approach to complete the [Caldistance] box setting.

Step 3. Set the expected distances in the value and tolerance columns.

Step 4. Click [Add] button to confirm the setting.

Step 5. Save Library, and then the setting will be saved to Library file (*.pkg).

Step 6. By [merge library..], the system will apply the setting to the components with same type.

The process for measuring the distance between two components (only can be used in Train Mode)

Test Research Inc.


Figure 579: Set Distance Table Dialog-Component Distance

Step 1. Right click on the FOV image and select [Set Distance].

Step 2. Click one component and then click [Get]. The information of the component will pass to the [Target1] column. Repeat the same approach to get target 2.

Figure 580: Set Distance Table Dialog-Target Setting

Step 3. Set the expected distances in the value and tolerance columns.

Figure 581: Set Distance Table Dialog-Parameter Setting

Step 4. Click [Add].

Test Research Inc.


Step 5. Set an application approach.

Figure 582: Set Distance Table Dialog-Application Area

Inspection result display

The system uses the [Target1] as the name displays the inspection result in [Result Tree].

The inspection result will be transferred to SPC and saved as a *pfl file.

4.9.9 TOOL BAR

Figure 583: Other Window Options

4.9.9.1 Link

Displaying the dependent relationship of the selected inspection box to other boxes.

Figure 584: Display Active Box Link

Test Research Inc.


4.9.9.2 Active

Displaying the selected inspection boxes only.

Figure 585: Show Active Windows

Test Research Inc.


4.9.9.3 Select

Specifying a type of inspection boxes. For example, if [Missing] is selected in the pull-down menu, users will only can select the [Missing] inspection boxes on the FOV images.

Figure 586: Select Window Type

4.9.9.4 Camera

Selecting a specific camera to display the FOV image. If users select the top camera, the system will display the top-view images and all inspection boxes. On the other hand, if users select an angle camera, the system will display the angle-view image and only the inspection boxes set in the corresponding angle image.

4.9.9.5 Light

Selecting a specific light source. There are two light sources can be selected: lightA and lightB. Users can change the light source from the [Light] column on the toolbar as below. The function here is only for current view, not the light setting of inspection. The inspection light can be set in [Property] dialog box.

Figure 587: Select Window Type

4.9.9.6 Component

Selecting a component in the group. After selecting component in the pull-down menu, the camera will move to the component location and capture the image.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 588: Selecting Component Group

4.9.9.7 Type

Selecting the component type. After users select a type and save the setting to Library, users can use it as search condition to find out the components easily.

Figure 589: Selecting Component Type

4.9.9.8 Angle

Displaying the angle of the current selected component. If users change the value in the column, the inspection boxes will be rotated to the specified angle. This function helps users to capture the image of the skew component.

Notice: The angle setting here does not influence the CAD file.

4.9.9.9 % (Percentage)

Enlarging or reducing the size of all the inspection boxes in the FOV image. When Library is saved, the current size setting will also be saved.

Test Research Inc.


4.9.10 EXAMPLE: EDIT COMPONENT LIBRARY

4.9.10.1 Example 1 – Chip component

1) Select a component that is not shifted, skew and has a clear shape from the component pull-down menu.

2) Set the location and adjust the size of the [Body] box. If the [Body] box does not exist,

click . You can use Offline Motion Dialog Offline Motion Dialog (click) to move the box. Adjust the box size to be greater 1 pixel than the component size. See the example in Figure 570.

Figure 590: Choose a Component, Resize Body Window

3) Choose [Add > All Window] or click , A dialog box will appear as below. Check [Missing] and [Void] and click [OK].

Figure 591: Selecting an Inspection Box

4) The system will generate one [Missing] inspection box and two [Void] inspection boxes as below.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 592: Adjust Void Windows

5) Click icon to open the setting dialog box and use the function [Add] to capture the

image for [Missing] box. Then, click icon to set the parameters of pass level. If

needed, click to set the logic of the inspection boxes.

Figure 593: Setting Property, Pass Level, & Set Algorithm Icons

6) Click [Mask], a rectangle box will appear. Move the box to the component type number area and adjust the size of the box. Then, click the button [Mask Inside]. A green mask will be generated and cover the untested area. Click [OK] to confirm the setting.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 594: Mask Center of Image

7) If the image is unclear, click icon and use the Set Phase Weighting dialog box to adjust the weighting of the image. Click [OK] to confirm the weighting setting.

Figure 595: Setting the Component Weighting

8) Click icon to create an inspection box and move the box to the component type number area.

Figure 596: Creating a Box for Inspection the Component Type Number

Test Research Inc.


9) Click icon and set the property of the inspection. Then, click Add to capture the image of the component type number and click [OK] to confirm the setting.

Figure 597: Setting the Inspection Condition

10) Click icon to save the setting of this component type. The system will save the setting file to the folder under [C:\AOI\packagelibrary].

Test Research Inc.


4.9.10.2 Example 2 – IC component

1) Select a component that is not shifted, skew and has a clear shape from the component pull-down menu.

2) Set the location and adjust the size of the [Body] box. If the [Body] box does not exist,

click the . You can use Offline Motion Dialog (click ) to move the box. Adjust the box size to be greater 1 pixel than the component size. See the example below.

Figure 598: Create a [Body] box for IC component

3) Click to add one [Pin] box. Then, move the [Pin] box and adjust the [Pin] box size to fit the upper-left lead area as Figure below.

Figure 599: Create a [Body] box for IC component

Test Research Inc.


4) Choose the [Pin] box and click . A dialog box will appear as Figure 577. Select Y and click [OK] to create another pin box in the upper-right lead area as Figure 588. Or, click

icon to add another pin, and then move the second [Pin] box and adjust the second [Pin] box size to fit the upper-right lead area.

Figure 600: Use [Mirror Copy] to Set Pins in First & Last Lead Area

Figure 578: Use [Mirror Copy] to Set Pins in First & Last Lead Area

Test Research Inc.


5) After choosing two pins and then click icon again, a dialog box will appear as Figure 578. Input the number of pins based to the amount of component leads and then clicks [OK], other two [Pin] box will be generated as Figure 579.

Figure 601: Choose First & Last Pins, Add Pins

Figure 579: Choose First & Last Pins, Add Pins

6) Click [Add all] to add inspection boxes, including [Missing (Polarity)], [Solder], [Solder Align], [Lead], [Lead Align], and [Lead Void].

Test Research Inc.


Figure 602: Add Inspection boxes

7) Resize and set parameters for every kind of inspection window.

[Lead]

Select lead and top camera then drag mouse to highlight the lead box.

Set parameters in the [Property] dialog.

[Lead Void]

Select lead void then drag mouse to highlight the lead void box.

Resize the lead void box.

Set parameters in the [Property] dialog.

[Solder]

Select solder and rear camera then drag mouse to highlight the solder box.

Resize the solder box.

Set parameters such as test and lighting in the [Property] dialog.

Set pass level.

[Void Window]

Test Research Inc.


Choose [Void Window] and [Rear Camera] to adjust [Void] windows to the bright area.

Set the algorithm as [Dark].

[Align Window]

Move all [Align] boxes to correct position.

[Missing]

Set camera as top or other angle camera in the [Property] dialog.

Select missing and camera then highlight the [Missing] box.

Resize the solder box.

Add standard image.

[Extra Blob]

Add new [Extra Blob] at left or right camera.

Mirror or rotate copy to other side.

8) Select all windows to be mirrored then click [Mirror].

9) Select direction.

Figure 603: Choose [Rotate Copy] or [Mirror]

Test Research Inc.


Figure 604: Results of [Mirror} Command

10) Add images of lead and solder inspection boxes. All inspection boxes with the same method will use the image.

11) Click [Pass Level] to set pass level for all types.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 605: Example: Set Pass Level

12) Click [Save] to save this type. The system will store the saved file in [C:\AOI\packagelibrary] folder

Test Research Inc.


4.10 Image Matching Principles and Pass Level Settings

4.10.1 METHODS OF IMAGE MATCHING

4.10.1.1 Method 1–Geometric Feature Matching

Searching the image which has the most similar geometric patterns and features to the criteria image in the search range. This algorithm is widely applied to [Missing] box. [Warp] box also can select this approach to do image matching process.

4.10.1.2 Method 2–Normalize Correlation Matching

Searching the image which has the most similar gray level patterns and features to the criteria image in the search range. This algorithm is widely applied to [Lead] box. [Warp] box also can select this approach to do image matching process.

4.10.1.3 Method 3–Projection Profile Matching

Searching the image which has the most similar gray level distribution in X and Y axis to the criteria image in the search range. This algorithm is applied to [Align] box.

4.10.2 INSPECTION PRINCIPLES AND SETTINGS

4.10.2.1 Model Image (Missing>Missing Polarity) Box

The inspection box is used for checking component defects such as missing, shift, tombstone and

polarity. It applies the Geometric Feature Method (Method 1): capturing a clear component

image and then use it as the criteria image for inspecting all the target components. If the target

component is reverse, [Missing Polarity] box will show “Fail”. However, [Missing] box will show

“Pass’ in the same situation.

Figure 606: Model Image (Missing) Window

The [Pass Level Settings] dialog box is shown below.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 607: Model Image Pass Level Settings

[Similarity] – Shows the comparing results between the test image and criteria image.

[Shift X] – The tolerance of the direction shift.

[Shift Y] – The tolerance of the Y direction shift.

[Rotation] – The tolerance of the rotate angle

[Level Difference] –The average of the gray level value in the 10x10 pixel area which locates in the center of the component. For example, if the trained gray level value is 100 and the level difference tolerance is 35, the system will show ”Fail” when the inspection result is over 135 or less than 65.

[Polarity Check] – Checks if the components rotate in 180 degree.

[Level Check] –Enables the [Level Difference] function.

4.10.2.2 Lead Box

The inspection box is used for checking IC leads’ defects such as missing, shift and bending. It applies the image correlation method (Method2): capturing a clear lead image and then use it as the criteria image for inspecting all the leads.

Figure 608: Compare Lead Images

The [Pass Level Settings] dialog box is shown as below.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 609: Lead Pass Level Settings

Figure 610: Lead Pass Level Settings-Shift Mode

[Similarity] – The similarity between the standard image and the inspected image.

[Shift X] – The tolerance of the X direction shift.

[Shift Y] – The tolerance of the on Y direction shift.

[Skew Difference] – The tolerance of the position difference between adjacent boxes.

[Shift Mode] – If the item is checked, the system will set the center shift as the standard instead of the X-Y axis shift. The pass level value means the tolerance of the center position shift.

4.10.2.3 Void box

This inspection box is used for checking the component defects such as missing solder, missing component, misoriented lead, and polarity. It uses the gray level value (0 - 255) and bright ratio to be a threshold for inspection. Users can select Bright method or Dark method depending on the need.

The [Pass Level Settings] are shown as below.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 611: Void Pass Level Settings

[B>W Threshold] – Sets the threshold for judging black (dark) or white (bright).

[Bright Ratio] – Sets the limit of white ratio.

[TEST Method]- Selects to apply Bright or Dark method

[Bright] – If the white ratio is greater than the limit, the inspection box will be regarded as “Fail”.

[Dark] –If the white ratio is lower than the limit, the inspection box will be regarded as “Fail”.

4.10.2.4 Lead Void Box

This inspection box is used for checking IC lead’s defects such as missing solder and misoriented lead. The algorithm is the same as [Void] box. The only difference is that the system doesn’t calculate the bright area in the Train mode. Hence, even the inspection box with the same size will get the different inspection results.


Figure 612: Lead Void Pass Level Settings

[B>W Threshold] – Sets the threshold for judging black (dark) or white (bright).

[Bright Ratio] – Sets the limit of white ratio.

Test Research Inc.


4.10.2.5 Pin Box

This inspection box is used for checking the component defects such as shift, over> less solder, or misoriented lead. It uses the gray level value (0 - 255) and bright area size to be a threshold. Users have to set the standard of the bright area size in the Train mode for a [Pin] box. (The value of standard image is 100).

Figure 613: 100% & Low Solder, Over Solder Settings


Figure 614: Pin Pass Level Settings

[B>W Threshold] – The threshold for judging black (dark) or white (bright).

[High Ratio] – Sets the upper lower limit of bright area size.

[Low Ratio] – Sets the lower limit of the bright area size.

Test Research Inc.


4.10.2.6 Solder Box

This inspection box is used for checking bridging of IC leads. The [Solder] box is set in each angle camera as default. After users locate the [Solder] box, the system will check the specified area which is outward of the box based on the setting such as bridge threshold, bridge range ratio, and bridge type. Generally, for the AOIs with 33um resolution, the system will check outward area in 7 pixels (It is 10um in AOI with other resolutions.) If the outward area has continuous 7 pixels in bright, the system will judge the lead is “Fail”. Users also can set to inspect dark bridge.

The [Pass Level Settings] dialog box is shown as below.

Figure 615: Solder Pass Level Settings

[Bridge Threshold] – The threshold for judging black (dark) or white (bright).

[Bridge Range Ratio] – Sets the pixel limit.

[Bridge Type] (for rectangle shape inspection box) – There are total six types can be selected: [Horizontal], [Vertical] and [Both], [HorInside], [VerInside] and [BothInside]. [Horizontal], [Vertical] and [Both] are the approaches to inspect the area from the box boundary toward outside. [Horizontal] indicates the system will inspect the left and right sides of the box. [Vertical] indicates the system will inspect the up and down sides of the box. [Both] indicates to inspect four sides of the box. [HorInside], [VerInside] and [BothInside] are the approaches to inspect the area from box boundary toward inside. [Horizontal] indicates the system will inspect the left and right sides. [Vertical] indicates the system will inspect the up and down sides of the box. [Bothinside] indicates the system will inspect four sides of the box. After selecting a bridge type, users can do further setting such as selecting a single direction to inspect. [U], [D], [L] and [R] represents up, down, left and right sides. The function is for special case which users only want to inspect a single side.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 616: Solder Pass Level Settings

[Bridge Type] (for round shape inspection box) – The selections are the same as the rectangle shape inspection box. It includes [Horizontal], [Vertical], [Both], [HorInside], [VerInside] and [BothInside]. In this bridge type, there is no difference between [Horizontal], [Vertical], [Both]. Also, [HorInside], [VerInside] and [BothInside] are the same. After setting the type, users can select the wanted angle to inspect. The upper limit setting of group is 3. Moreover, only the selected angles will be inspected. See the example as Figure 594. From the angle setting in this table, it means that the angle between 0 and 45, and 180 and 225 degree will be inspected by toward outside method.

Figure 617: Solder Pass Level Settings-Round Box

[Dark bridge] – Checks the bridge defect when the image is dark. When this item is checked, the system will inspect if the inward or outward areas has continuous pixels which gray level is lower than the setting in the Bridge Threshold.

4.10.2.7 Polarity Pair Box

This inspection box is consisted of a pair of boxes which locate on the two different positions with a wide variation of gray level (one is in the bright area and another one is in the dark area). The system will show “Fail” in this box when the gray level of these two inspection boxes are reversed. See the example in Figure 595.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 618: Set Two Polarity Pair Windows

4.10.2.8 Align Box

This inspection box is used for relocating the component on a warped board. The algorithm applies the Method 3. Generally, the inspection box is set on IC leads or Rnets (Cnets). Align only relocates one component.

Notice: the inspection box only shows the similarity score instead of “Fail”. If the similarity score is less than the setting value in the pass level, it means the inspection box lose the localization ability.

Figure 619: Align Window


Test Research Inc.


Figure 620: Align Pass Level Settings

4.10.2.9 Warp Box

This inspection box is used for relocating the inspection boxes on a warped board. Only one [Warp] box can be set in a FOV. If the measured score is less than the setting value in the sensitivity, it means the inspection box lose the localization ability (not “Fail”).

In an idea assumption, when the deformation of each FOV is the same in a warped board, each component on the board has a relationship with the warp box. Before the inspection, [Warp] box will calculate the shift in the X and Y directions first, and then give a shift compensation for each component. Finally, users can decide to select Method 1 or Method 2 to do pattern matching process.

Notice: [Warp] box only can be generated in [Train] mode.

4.10.2.10 ROI Box

This inspection box is used for inspecting the scrape of surface and solder on bonding finger.

Notice: [ROI] box only can be generated in [Train] mode

Figure 621: ROI Inspection Box

Test Research Inc.


The [ROI Parameters] dialog box is shown below.

Figure 622: ROI Parameter Dialog

[Train] –Set the parameter for training

[Sensitivity] – Using 70 as an example. If the difference of gray level between neighboring pixels is larger than 30 (100-70) the two pixels will be regarded as edges.

[Mask Zone] – Sets Using 1 as an example. Next to the edge points, the adjacent 1 pixel is masked as Untest.

[Inspection Parameter] – Set the parameter for inspection. The system only inspects the area that is in an ROI box and not masked.

[Inspect Sensitivity] – Using 60 as an example. If the difference of gray level between adjacent pixels is larger than 40 (100-60) the two pixels will be regarded as edges.

[Tolerance] – Using 5 as an example. If a group size of edges is more than 5 the inspection window will be regarded as failed.

The [Sensitivity] value must be bigger than [Inspect Sensitivity] or it will result in more false calls.

4.10.2.11 Extra Blob Box

This inspection box is used for inspecting misoriented lead or the scratch of surface.

The [Pass Level Settings] are shown as below.

Figure 623: Extra Blob Window Settings

[B>W Threshold] – Input the bright and white threshold

Test Research Inc.


[>Threshold] – Choose this to select the pixels which have a greater gray level than threshold value.

[<Threshold] – Choose this to select the pixels which have a lower gray level than the threshold value.

[Both] – Choosing this is to express that you care about the pixel which has greater or smaller gray level than threshold value and conforms to the following conditions.

[<Defect Pixel Count<] – The system marks the pixels that are not confirmed with threshold and regards the adjacent marked pixels as a group. Input the minimum and maximum. When the size of a group is located in the range, that group is regarded as a fail. For example, set “50< Defect Pixel Count<500”. This means that the marked group will be regarded as fail when the group size is between 50 to 500 pixels.

[Principal axis aspect ratio>] –When the ratio of width to length of a defect group is larger or smaller than the input value, the group will be regarded as a fail. This function can catch the white line which appears when an IC pin lifts. Input 0 when you do not want to use this function.

[Change to <] – If the item is selected, definition of [Principal axis aspect ratio] will be changed to “smaller than”. That is when the ratio of width to length of a defect group is smaller than the input value, the group will be regarded as a fail.

4.10.2.12 Edge Window

The [Edge Window] is used to check pixels on the edges of inspection boxes. The inspection box parameter setting is shown as below.

Figure 624: Edge Window Dialog

[Edge Threshold] – The difference of adjacent pixels

[Edge Pixel Count Tolerance] – The system will count all the pixels included by the [Edge Threshold], and show “Fail” if the count is over the [Edge Pixel Count Tolerance]

4.10.2.13 Color Window

The box is to inspect the RGB ratio in specific range or condition. It is used to test images with little gray level difference but great difference between the RGB colors, such as copper. Take RGB as the X, Y and Z axes in space; after setting High and Low value for each color, we can

Test Research Inc.


obtain a cuboid. The RGB value coordinate of the inspected image laid out of the cuboid is regarded as fail. User also should set the under or over ratio to inspect the fail.

Figure 625: RGB Cuboid

Parameter Setting

Figure 626: Color Window Parameter Setting

1) RGB upper and lower limits setting

Test Research Inc.


2) Sets the standard ratio, if the area is smaller than [Under Ratio] or larger than [Over Ratio], it will be regarded as fail.

3) Sets the comparison of operator of RGB value(> or <); the value can be minus.

4) Besides the comparison of operator, it also can set the difference between two values.

5) Shows the RGB scattering (Figure below).

Figure 627: Color Window Parameter Setting-2

6) Inputs the upper or lower limit of RGB directly or use mouse cursor to drag the value of limits.

7) Color window image

8) Save the limits data that are set well to the pass level (be sure the [apply] is checked.)

9) Close the dialog box.

4.10.2.14 Caliper Pair

It is to locate the body of BGA type component by a pair of inspection boxes and inspect the shift of a BGA component.

Setting Method－Under [Train] mode, click [Add 1 Box] in function area and choose [Caliper

Pair], then a pair of Caliper Boxes appears. Move the two boxes to proper position, and click [Setting] in function area to set the property. After adjusting the two inspection boxes, users can click [Train] in function area that system can record the position of the corner of the BGA.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 628: Caliper Pair

PASS FAIL

Figure 629: Caliper Pair-Testing Comparison

Parameter Setting

Test Research Inc.


Figure 630: Caliper Pair Parameter Setting

[High Threshold], [Low Threshold] – Filters out the unnecessary background and get the BGA body.

Example – In the image, the gray level of BGA displays near 65, so users can set [High Threshold] to 80 and [Low Threshold] to 50.

[Direction] – Sets to [Vertical] if the objective boundary is vertical, set to [Horizontal] if the objective boundary is horizontal. The parameters in two boxes are changed simultaneously; when one of the boxes is set to Horizontal, the other is changed to Vertical.

[Corner] – Sets which corner of BGA user wants to inspect. In this case, it is set to inspect the upper-right corner of the BGA. The parameters in two boxes are changed simultaneously; when one of the boxes is set to upper-left, the other is changed to upper-left.

[X Shift], [Y Shift] – The pass level of X and Y shift. If the test result of shift (um) exceeds the setting, it is regarded as a defect.

4.10.2.15 CalDistance

There are two methods that can be selected, [Distance] or [Angle]. When choosing [Distance], system measures the distance between a pair of inspection boxes. When choosing [Angle], system measures the angle of an edge in a single inspection box.

1) Distance

System calculates the distance between two edges; it can be used to inspect the distance between golden fingers.

Setting Method－Under [Train] mode, click [Add 1 Box] in function area and choose

[CalDistance] to add a [CalDistance] box; repeat this procedure to add another one [CalDistance] box; the two inspection boxes become a pair of [CalDistance] inspection boxes. After adjusting the position and parameters, right click on FOV image and choose [Set Distance]. The details of [Set Distance] parameter setting, refer to Section 4.9.8.8 ; system will record the distance between the two edges that belongs to the two [CalDistance] inspection boxes respectively. When the bias of the distance is in the range of setting, the result would be pass.

Test Research Inc.


PASS FAIL

Figure 631: CalDistance-Distance

Parameter Setting

Figure 632: CalDistance-Distance- Parameter Setting

[Edge Number] – Take the Figure below for example, there is only one edge should be inspect, so set the number to 1. If system should inspect the center of the two edges, set the number to 2.

[Direction] – Set [Vertical] to inspect the vertical edge; set [Horizontal] to set the horizontal edge.

[Edge Type] – Select the objective edges are white-up and black-down or black-up and white-down; the same with left and right side.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 633: CalDistance-Example

Test Research Inc.


Take the following Figure for example, user sets [Edge Number] to 2 to inspect the center line of the two edges. In the Figure below, the upper box is to inspect the edge with black-up and white-down, so [Edge Type] should be set to [Top/Left Bright], and the lower box is to inspect the center line of the component, so [Edge Number] should be set to 2.

Figure 634: CalDistance-Example

Right click on FOV image and choose [Set Distance]. After setting the parameters (refer to 4.9.8.8), press hotkey [I] and the result is shown as below.

Figure 635: CalDistance-Inspection Result

The desired edge

Distance:2238

Test Research Inc.


2) Angle

The effective range is one tenth of the long side of the inspection box, such as the following Figure. The green box means the inspection box, the purple parts mean the effective areas to search the edge. User should adjust to let the edge laid on the two purple areas to avoid the false alarm. The algorithm is to find the position where the gray level changes most seriously; if the change of gray level is not obviously, user can adjust the weighting.

Figure 636: CalDistance-Angle- CalDistance-Angle

Take the following Figures for example to explain the position of the inspection box.

Good Inspection Result

Figure 637: CalDistance-Angle-Inspection Box Position

Bad Bad Bad

Figure 638: CalDistance-Angle-Inspection Box Position -2

Test Research Inc.


Parameter Setting

Figure 639: CalDistance-Angle- Parameter Setting

[Angle] – the standard angle after Train. Horizontal box is 0, and vertical box is 9000, the unit is 1% degree.

[Rotate] – the pass level for the rotation angle. If the inspection result is over the setting, system regards the component is a defect; otherwise, it is pass. The unit is 1% degree, the range of setting is 0~17999. Example: if the result is 345, it means the difference of angle between current component and the trained standard is 3.45 degree.

4.10.2.16 Black Component

This inspection box is mainly for the black component with no features on the body to test the shift or missing defects.

Setting Method－Under Train dialog, select a proper component, click [Add 1 Box] and choose

[Black Component]. The created inspection box will be trained automatically. User only should notice that the width and length of the inspection box shouldn’t over the 1.5 times of the body of the component; the other procedures will be finished automatically.

Figure 640: Add a Black Component Box

Test Research Inc.


PASS FAIL

Figure 641: Black Component Inspection Result

User can click [Setting] in function area to review the inspection result; according to the Figure below, the X shift result is over the pass level, so the result is fail in this case.

Figure 642:Black Component Parameter Setting

4.10.2.17 LocateWindow

[Locate Window] is not an inspection box and it has no actual function to inspect defects. It is only for user to create a project with a bare board. User can use [ATPG/Library/Add All] function to add a [LocateWindow].

See more details for creating a project with bare board in 4.11.5Creating a Project by Bare Board.

Test Research Inc.


4.10.2.18 RIM

Setting procedure (in ATPG Library)

Step1. Adjust the [Body] box to proper size as following Figure.

Step2. Create [Rim] box in [Model Library]. Choose [RIM] type in drop-down menu under the [Model Library] tab, and then click [Apply]. See the example below.

Figure 643: Selecting RIM Model

Step3. The system will create 3 boxes which are concentric circles, the outside circle is [RIM_Body] box, and the second circle is [RIM_Window] box.

Figure 644:Proper Size of [Body] Box

Step4. [RIM_Body] box is used for locating.

[Edge Threshold] – Sets the threshold of outside circle edge.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 645:[RIM_Body] Box

Step5. [RIM_Window] box indicates the second circle。

[Method] – Tests brightness or test darkness.

[Direction] – Inside/Outside/Both.

[Band] – The inspection range(unit: pixel).

[Threshold] – The threshold of brightness。

Figure 646:[RIM_Window] Box

Test Research Inc.


4.10.3 COLOR CHECK METHOD AND RGB WEIGHTING

4.10.3.1 Color Check Method

The Top-View camera consists of three CCD sensor. Unlike monochrome cameras, they tend to have much better contrast in images by regulating the RGB Weighting. Inspection boxes that are specially created using the top CCD camera will have better quality sample images, and better to use for comparisons. Hence, the camera can easily detect major contrasts on failed components. This is called CCM (Color Check Method).

Using a resistor chip as an example, the image at left hand of following Figure was captured by a monochrome camera, and the image at right hand was captured by a three CCD sensor camera and regulated by RGB Weighting.

Figure 647: Resistor: Monochrome Image (left) & 3-Color CCD Image

Using an SOP designator as an example, the image at the left hand of following Figure was captured by a monochrome camera, and the image at the right hand was captured by a three CCD sensor camera and regulated by RGB Weighting.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 648: SOP Designator: Monochrome Image (left) & 3-Color CCD Image

Referring to the previous examples, the surface shape and lighting angles on solder joints may have great impact on the image quality. Therefore, images that are captured by monochrome cameras have irregular gray scale levels on solder joints. Images that are captured by three color sensor CCD cameras regulated by RGB Weighting reflect much better contrast which gives more stability to the inspection boxes.

4.10.3.2 RGB Weighting Dialog Box

Percentage input is used for RGB Weighting parameter settings. Increasing/decreasing the R, G, or B settings will obtain the desired contrast for inspection purposes. This can also eliminate unwanted color reflected by the boards for better detection accuracy.

Figure 649: RGB Weighting Dialog Box

Setting Procedure

1) Displaying the selected component image. When [Mono] is checked, the system will display the gray image; when it is not checked, the system will display the color image in this area.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 650: Gray and Enlarged Image

2) Displaying the RGB value of the cursor position in color image, and displaying the gray level value of the cursor position in the gray image.

3) Setting the RGB (R: Phase1, G: Phase2, B: Phase3) Weighting by percentage. Users can input value directly or use mouse to drag the scroll bar and move to left or right to adjust the value. Dragging the scroll bar to the left reduces the percentage and dragging it to the right to increase the percentage.

Figure 651: RGB Weighting Dialog-Weighting

4) Check [LOCK] box to save the RGB setting as the default settings. [OK] must be clicked to change the current RGB settings.

5) Display RGB Weighting as percentages.

Test Research Inc.


4.10.3.3 Example for AOI RGB Weighting

Using a missing designator as an example. The two Figures below are in color and monochrome. Within the monochrome Figure, a placed designator and a missing designator locations are surrounded by red frames. The problem with the missing designator location is that the software can easily mistake it for having a similar base color compared to an actual placed designator’s body color. The picture on the left was taken by AOI’s top color CCD camera. The picture on the right was taken by a monochrome camera.

Figure 652: Missing Designator: Color (left) & Monochrome(right) Images

In the upper-left Figure below a missing designator has a gray level of 48. The upper-right shows a placed designator with a gray level of 60, which is very close to the missing designator. This will cause unavoidable false calls or missed calls. These pictures were captured by a monochrome camera, where the gray level is analyzed within the yellow box.

The two pictures on the bottom are captured by the 3 CCD True Color Camera. The RGB weighting ratios within the yellow boxes are: RGB (15%, 17%, and 28%) for a missing designator, and RGB (30%,22%, and 31%) for a placed designator.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 653: Monochrome (above) vs. RGB Values

According to the compared Figures above, the Red value makes the most value difference. Therefore, use the RGB Color Weighting to make a better contrast between the two by raising Red percentage ratio up to 200. A much bigger gray level contrast will be visible between the two pictures after raising the Red ratio value and lowering the Blue and the Green values.

In general, the RGB Weighting function may reinforce the result of the color reflection of components, making a better contrast during the inspection. The RGB Weighting method will tremendously reduce false calls and missed calls. This method is called the “Color Check Method” (CCM).

4.10.4 STRUCTURE OF INSPECTION BOXES

Figure 654: Inspection Box Structure

Inspection boxes lying in the upper level can be used to locate an inspection box in a lower level.

Test Research Inc.


4.11 Principles for Special Plane

4.11.1 IRREGULAR PANEL

If the panel is irregular, meaning it cannot be described by MxN, we have to program by the following steps.

Step1. Load one of the CAD files first.

Step2. Set the number of boards, and choose [Manual].

Figure 655: Set Number of Boards

Step3. Right click on any board except Board 1 and choose [Load CAD] to load the other CADs.

Figure 656: Load Boards

Step4. Calculate the rotate angle by locating 2 components in Board 1.

Step5. Locate the boards other than Board 1.

Test Research Inc.


Step6. Set the panel size.

Step7. Continue using the standard steps.

4.11.2 DATA FUSION

Sometimes, panels are packaged by severl placers. In this situation, there is no CAD file which includes all the components for the panels. So, you have to combine the CAD files for AOI use. One of the problems of combining process is, different CAD files have different origins. In order to generate a new CAD file which includes all the components and has only one origin, this function has to be used. The procedure of function setting is described as below.

Step1. Load one of the CAD files first.

Step2. Input the number of the CAD files that you want to combine. And choose [Manual].

Figure 657: Set Number of CAD Files

Step3. Right click on a board other than Board 1 and choose [LOAD CAD] to load the other CADs.

Step4. Calculate the rotate angle by locating 2 components in Board 1.

Step5. Locate the boards other than Board 1.

Step6. Export the combined CAD file to an AOI file. Choose [GENERATE > MERGE TO BOARD 1] to save the file.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 658: Select Merge to Board 1

Step7. Create a new program and load the new CAD file to do programming.

4.11.3 CHANGE MULTI-BOARD LAYOUT

This function is to change the multi-board layout for a finished program. The rotate angle of all boards in the panel has to be 180 degree rotation or the same as the original board.

Step1. Open a finished program.

Step2. Enter [ATPG > Generate Multiboard CAD Data].

Step3. Choose [Set > Edit MODE]

Figure 659: [Set > Edit Mode]

Step4. Right click on the picture and choose [New] or [Delete] a column or row.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 660: Right-Click Menu

Step5. After setting the number and the rotate angle of multi-board, do the following standard process to program.

1. Find rotate angle.

2. Locate component.

3. Set Board 1 size.

4. Find Fiducial mark.

5. Skip [Merge], Click on [Next] to do FOV arrangement. The system will now

copy the parameters of Board 1 to the other boards.

6. Capture FOV image and Relocate inspection boxes.

7. After finishing ATPG, you have to choose [Utilities > Capture Panel Map].

4.11.4 DIFFERENT GAPS WITHIN MULTI-BOARDS

When the gaps between boards are not the same (for example, when many panels are put on a fixture), users can use this function to create the correct multi-board information.

Step.1 Set multi-board layout (MxN)

Step2. Find the rotate angle.

Step3. Locate the first Block to get the gap of X direction and Y direction within Block.

Step4. Choose Block 2 and Block 3 by pressing [Shift] key and left clicking on the board. Locate the board to get the gap between Blocks.

Step5. Click on [Next] and do the other standard process in ATPG.

There are three main types of multi-boards, explained below.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 661: 3 Main Types of Multi-Boards

Type 1

1) Locate the Board 6 to get the gap between boards.

2) Choose the multi-boards in Block 2 by holding down [Shift] and clicking on the block, then locate a component in Block 2 to get the X direction gap between Blocks.

3) Select the multi-boards in Block 3 by [Shift], and then locate a component in Block 3 to get the Y direction gap between Blocks. Refer to the following Figure.

Figure 662: Setting X & Y Gaps in Type 1 Boards

Types 2 and 3

1) Locate Board 2 and Board 5 to get the X and Y direction gaps 1.

Test Research Inc.


2) Choose the multi-boards in Block 2 by [Shift], and then locate a component in Block 2 to get the Y direction gap between Blocks.

3) Choose the multi-boards in Block 3 by [Shift], and then locate a component in Block 3 to get the Y direction gap between Blocks.

Figure 663: Setting X & Y Gaps in Type 2 & 3 Boards

4.11.5 CREATING A PROJECT BY BARE BOARD

When creating a project with bare board, system can [Relocate] and add [Warp] boxes automatically to save the time to fine tune by real board later.

Procedure

Step1. Load an existing Library, use [Add All] function to add [Locate Window] boxes. The algorithm of [Locate window] boxes is the same with [Lead window] boxes.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 664: Add a Locate Window

Step2. If the [locate window] uses an angle light, system will use the contrary lighting to make the image clear. Example, if the lighting of the [Locate Window] is LeftlightA, then system will use RightlightA for the [Locate Window].

Step3. Add the Pad image for a [Locate Window] for relocating use.

Step4. When merging, system will ask if the current project is created by a bare board; select [Yes].

Figure 665: Bare Board Asking Dialog

Step5. Capture FOV image－if the lighting of the FOV is an angle lighting, system will use the

contrary lighting to make PAD image clear. Example: if the lighting of the [Locate Window] is LeftlightA, then system will use RightlightA for the [Locate Window].

Step6. Relocate－system takes the image of [Locate Window] to locate the inspection box

with the same type as the [Locate Window].

Step7. Capture FOV image again－system captures FOV images again with the original

lighting.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 666: Capture FOV Again

Step8. Open [Train] mode and add a [Warp] box in FOV.

Step9. After getting the real board, user can edit or tune the project by general procedure.

Test Research Inc.


5 TRAIN MODE FUNCTION

5.1 Main Frame

After completing all ATPG steps, close the ATPG window, and the screen appear as following Figure. It displays the panel map at upper-left corner of the window. Users can mark the information of the component where your cursor located. Clicking the left mouse button on the panel map, the system will show the position of the fiducial marks.

Figure 667: Click on Panel to Show Fiducial Marks

After right clicking on this window, it is possible to select a specific component to be marked on the panel map when you move your cursor on it. Click on the window again and the system returns to the original display.

Figure 668: Find Component Dialog

If users do not open or complete the ATPG procedure first, it will not take any action after you

click on .

Test Research Inc.


5.2 Train mode

Click to enter the [Train] dialog. The screen shown below will appear.

Figure 669: Train mode Screen

5.3 Panel Map

The positions of FOVs (fields of view) are displayed in this area. Users can select the FOV on [Function Area].

Red boxes indicate the top camera FOVs. Yellow boxes signify the front camera FOVs. Orange boxes indicate the rear camera FOVs. Purple boxes indicate The left and right camera FOVs are shown in blue, respectively. The green box indicates the current FOV.

Users can switch FOV in [Saved FOV Image] and [Real-Time Image] by clicking the box on panel map.

5.4 Real FOV

Choose [Real FOV] tab then it displays the real time image. Right clicking on the FOV image to move the camera to capture the image.

Test Research Inc.


5.5 Capture FOV

Choose [Capture FOV] tab then it displays the FOV image that the system captured before. Users can click on the panel map directly to review an FOV or use [Previous> Next] button on function area to review FOVs.

If the chosen component type has different groups, the group of the component will be shown at the lower-right corner. If the chosen inspection box has specific Fail String, the specific Fail String will be shown at the lower-left corner.

Figure 670: Group and Fail String are shown in FOV Image

The system displays the weighting of the chosen inspection box at the upper-right corner of the FOV image.

Figure 671: Weighting Shown in Upper-right

Test Research Inc.


5.5.1 TOOLS

Right click on the FOV image to show the tools.

Figure 672: Tools Menu Commands

Test Research Inc.


1) View Menu

Figure 673: View Menu

[Hide All Boxes] –Select this to hide all boxes in an FOV image.

[Search Range] –Select this to show the search range in dark purple box of an selected inspection box.

Figure 674: Setting the Search Range

[Link] – Click this to show the links between inspection boxes.

Figure 675: Setting the Links

[Other Box] – Choose this to see the inspection boxes in light blue box which are in other FOVs.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 676: View Other Boxes

Right click on the light blue box then choose [Move Box] to move the inspection box to the current FOV.

Click both right and left mouse buttons at the same time on the object component to move all inspection boxes of the component to the FOV.

Figure 677: Move Inspection Boxes

[Box Side] – Show directionality of the pins with small circles. The correct direction is shown in the following Figure. If the direction is wrong, choose [Edit>Rotate Side] to change the direction.

Figure 678: Show Pin Direction

[Show Box’s Weighting Image in Multi-function box] – The image weighting in the multi-function box will be same as it in the chosen inspection box.

[Show Panel Defect Map] – A defect map will appear in the upper-left corner after each inspection.

[White Balance] – FOV will be shown with white balance enhancement.

Test Research Inc.


[Show Data Collection Chart of this Box] is enabled only when [PROGRAM > AUTO PASS LEVEL

SETTING > INLINE DATA COLLECTION] is chosen. It will show the most recent 30 data. Click left mouse button on a data point to show the result. Drag the yellow line to change the pass level (see following two Figures).

Figure 679: Data Collection Chart 1 – Selecting Data Point

Test Research Inc.


Figure 680: Data Collection Chart 2 –Change Pass Level

If [For This Box] is checked, the system only draws the results of the chosen component.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 681: Check [For This Box]

Users can click on [Mode2] button to display the results by the second method. The horizontal axis means the score, and the vertical means the counts; the drawing shows the inspection count of the specific score. Users also can drag yellow line by mouse directly to change the pass level.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 682: Mode 2 Drawing

Test Research Inc.


Figure 683: Mode 2-Change Pass Level

Test Research Inc.


Figure 684: Mode 2-The Result, 72, happens 6 times

2) Copy

Copy the size or position to the other components with same type.

Figure 685: Confirm Copy Size and>or Position

[Yes] – Copy the size and position to the inspection box with same name of same components on other boards in a multi-board panel. If the inspection box is trained, this setting will not be executed.

[No] – Copy just the size to the other components.

Test Research Inc.


[Save Image] – Saves the current FOV to the folder that the sol file is saved in. The file name is composed by date and time.

[Set Fail String] – Users can redefine the fail string of each inspection box. This is the same method used in [Library].

[Set Weighting] – The [Alternative Dialog] box will appear, and then choose [Weighting]. Set the weighting for specific image. (Refer to Section 4.10.3.2)

[Set Mask] – Set the mask for the chosen [Void] box or [Extra Blob] box. The masked area will not be inspected. The four corners of a masked box will be marked with little circles as figure below. The procedure to set mask is described in Section 4.9.8.2.

Void with Mask Void without Mask

Figure 686: Confirm Copy Size and>or Position

[Set Part Number] – After clicking this item, users can input the part number for the chosen component type. Users also can select if they want to replace the type filed with the part number for sending to [Repair Station] (Refer to Section 3.3.3.5).

[Edit Pin Name] – After selecting a Pin box, users can click this button to specify the number of the selected Pin box manually. The set pin number will be described in [Repair Station].

[Set Distance] – A function for measuring the distance between point to point, point to line, line to line and Light Bar Flatness. The detail setting is described in Section 4.9.8.8.

[Link Box] – After selecting inspection boxes those are parents and children, users can click [Link] to link them. See more about [Link] in Section 4.9.3.3

[Unlink Box] – Click [Unlink] to break the link between inspection boxes. See more about [Unlink] in Section 4.9.3.4

[Copy Box] – Copy the selected inspection box in the system.

[Cut Box] – Cut the selected inspection box.

[Paste Box] – Paste the box that was selected with the Copy or Cut command. Select a box and click [Cut Box] or [Copy Box] first, and then click [Paste Box] on the target FOV. The inspection box does not appear right away: move the cursor to the correct position and click left mouse button on the FOV image. The dialog box shown below will appear. After the component information is inputted, click [OK] and then the Pasted inspection box will become visible. If there are other components within 2mm of the newly-increased component, the inspection box cannot be pasted.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 687: Add Component Dialog Box

[Move to Left FOV] – Move the selected box to the left FOV.

[Move to Right FOV] – Move the selected box to the right FOV..

[Move All Boxes] – Users can move all the inspection boxes which are under the same camera on same board at the same time. The [Move All Boxes] dialog box will appear (see following Figure 659). Enter a positive value in [DX] will send the boxes to move right. Enter a positive value in [DY] will move the boxes down. However, some boxes will not move if they are about to be moved out of the FOV or on the edge of FOV within 8 pixels.

Figure 688: Move All Boxes Dialog

[Undelete Box] – After clicking the button, the system will undelete the last deleted box by [Del Box]

[Rotate Box Side] – Each click rotates the side of inspection box 90 degrees counterclockwise.

[Set Logic] – Set the [Logic] between boxes. See more about logic in 4.9.8.1.

[View Logic] – Review all logic settings in this project; users can also delete an existing logic setting here.

[Inverse Logic] – Choosing this item starts the Inverse Logic function. After choosing this function, the system regards an inspection box which is passing the pass level as failed or an inspection box which is not passing the pass level as passed.

Test Research Inc.


[Test] – Set the selected inspection box as [Test Box] or [Test Component]. This setting is corresponding to [Untest]

Figure 689: Train mode -- Test Function Options

[Untest] – Set the selected inspection box as [UnTest Box] or [UnTest Component]. [UnTest Box] means only set the selected inspection box as untested and the box will become blue; [UnTest Component] means set all the inspection boxes of the selected component as untested and the boxes will become gray.

Figure 690: Train mode -- UnTest Function Options

[Set to Library] – Users can send the data of [Pass Level], [Search Range], [Weighting], [Test Flag], [Inverse Logic], [Alternative], [Size and Position] and [Fail String] to component library file by this function. Only when the inspection boxes that belong to a single component, this function can be executed. [Test Flag] means the [Test] or [Untest] mark for an inspection box; [Size and Position] only enables for the child inspection boxes linked with the other inspection boxes, and that means the size and the related position of the parent inspection boxes.

Figure 691: Set to Library Menu

[Change Shape] – The function is to change the window shape from square to circle or from circle to square. It only works for [Void] or [Solder] boxes.

[Send .BMP to Repair Station] – Send the [alternative] .BMP image from the selected [Missing] box to [Repair Station]. The purpose is to preserve a better image of small components.

[Set Multi-function box Angle] – Rotate the multi-function box manually. Refer to the following Figure.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 692: Rotate Control Bo Process

[Present Win] – The multi-function box will move to the center using the default size.

[ICT Test] – Forces a component to be tested by ICT.

[Solder Shape Test] – Display the solder inspection analysis result, as shown in the following Figure.

Figure 693: Display Solder Shape

[Bad Mark] -- Under [Train] users may right-click the mouse to add bad marks in an FOV. The system will detect the bad mark each time, and the board will be labeled as [Skip] once the bad marks fail. For more than one bad mark on the board, any of the bad marks will result in the board labeled as [Skip]. Setting a bad mark will not decrease the inspection cycle time.

[Add] – Add a bad mark.

[Delete] – Delete a bad mark.

[Set Board Num] – Change the board number that the specific bad mark represents for.

[Change to Bad Mark] – The function can change an inspection box to a bad mark box.

Test Research Inc.


Function Introduction

Figure 694: Bad Mark

Step 1. Move the multi-function box on the target point to set as a [Bad Mark].

Figure 695: Set Bad Mark - 1

Step 2. Right click mouse to add a [Bad Mark]

Figure 696: Bad Mark Dialog Box

Step 3. Select the algorithm of [Bad Mark Box].

Figure 697: Select Algorithm Dialog

Step 4. Select the applied range

Test Research Inc.


Figure 698: The Applied Range

Step 5. The [Bad Mark] will show the board number inside of the inspection box

Figure 699: Set Bad Mark - 2

Step 6. You may change the search range, image, and parameters of a [Bad Mark].

Step 7. Under [Train] window, you may search for a [Bad Mark] by using [Find FOV by Type>Name] on [Function Area] and selecting [Bad Mark] under [Type].

Step 8. You may change the [Bad Mark] inspection box to inverse logic by clicking right mouse button on the inspection box and selecting [Inverse Logic].

Step 9. The bad mark can also be set to inverse logic. It means if the system finds the bad mark successfully, the system regards the board is [Skip]. Setting procedure is clicking right mouse button on the [Bad Mark] box, and then choose [Inverse Logic].

3) [Copy Alternative] – For an untrained [Missing] box, users can use this function to import alternative images from the same type trained box as this untrained box.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 700: Get Inspection Data Dialog

4) Query Modify History

Required version: TRAOI 3.6 or above

Add a new DWORD parameter [ModifyRecordEnabled] = 1 in registry to enable the function.

The system creates the log file (ProjectName.log) automatically to save some specific actions to be the basis for tracking. The system records the time, users, action, target (the selected box) and update data in the log file. The actions that users can record are as follows:

SetPassLevel Add Box Add N Box Delete Box Set Lighting

Set Fail String Train UnTrain Test UnTest

Set Fid Mark Add Warp Delete Warp Add Alternative Delete

Alternative

Edit Component Search Range RGB Weighting Mask Enhance

Link Box Unlink Box Test Skip Type

Part Number Group Angle Name Merge Name

Move Box Resize Box Set Algorithm Set Camera Set Inverse

Figure 701: Action List

Function Introduction

Step1. After opening a project, you can select an inspection box to query. (Notice: you should select an inspection box solely, then the function can be enabled.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 702: Query Modify History

Step2. Select [Query Modify History], then the following dialog box will appear.

Figure 703: Query Modify History Parameter Setting

Area 1 is to display information of the selected inspection box.

Area 2 is to set the searching conditions.

Area 3 is to list the data that conform to conditions in this log file.

Step3. Set searching conditions

Conditions are time, action and users.

[Time] – Users can click the button to set the starting time and end time of the searching.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 704: Query Modify History Parameter Setting-Time

[Action] – the system will list all actions in the log file for users to select and query.

Figure 705: By Action

[Users] – the system will list all users in the log file for users to select and query.

Figure 706: By Users

Step4. When the conditions are selected completely, you can click [GO!] button or click [Q] key on keyboard to query.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 707: Start to query

5) Re-inspection Comp -- Inspect the selected components by the collected images. After inspecting, the system outputs a report for users to be the basis of fine-tuning. The detailed function is described in 3.7.41 Quality Validation.

6) Line Difference

Select [Lead] or [Missing] box in the FOV image first, then right click on the image and select [Line Difference]; after chosen, the following dialog box appears. Check an axis that users want to test the linearity and input the tolerance of maximum shift. The system will set the components that have the same X or Y coordinates with the selected component to be in a same group. During inspecting, the system will find the maximum difference of the coordinate, if the result is over the tolerance, the result is FAIL.

Figure 708: Line Difference Setting

For Example, after selecting a component’s [Lead] box, check Y Axis and set the tolerance is 10, the system will set the components, that are on the same board and have the same Y coordinate with the selected component, to be in a same group; and the tolerance of maximum shift in the group is 10 um。

Test Research Inc.


If the inspection result is FAIL, the system will display [LINEDIFFFAIL] on the defect list. The numbers in the brackets [11>10] mean the tolerance is 10 and inspection result is 11, so the result is FAIL.

Figure 709: Line Difference-Defect Tree

7) Pad Reposition

This function is to compensate the X and Y shifts by relocating the component center (by pad).

Step.1 Right click on FOV image then select [Pad Reposition] in pop-up menu.

Figure 710: Pad Reposition

Test Research Inc.


Step.2 Select component type, the IC type should be separated because we only compensate one direction shift in IC type.

Figure 711: Pad Reposition Operation Dialog Box

Figure 712: General Component and IC Type Component

General Component: Compensates X and Y Shift

IC Type Component: Compensates only X Shift in this direction

Test Research Inc.


Pad Reposition Parameters:

[Extend]: The distance of search range extended from [Body] box. The search

range should at least cover pads.

[Weighting]: Adjusts the image weighting.

[Threshold]: Sets the parameters for image thresholding process.

[Inverse]: If the base color is white, [Pad Reposition] function cannot locate pad position because of pad color is lighter than the base color. We can check [Inverse] box to solve this problem.

[Get Parameters from Train mode]: Applies the adjusted weighting in [Function Area] to weighting in [Pad Reposition].

[Set Parameters]: Sets weighting in [Pad Reposition] to one in [Function Area] [Set As Default]: Applies current parameters to other type as default. [Apply To All]: Applies current parameters to selected type.

Step.3 The system won’t do compensation if the inspection box center is closer to the component center calculated by [Pad Reposition].

Figure 713: Pad Reposition

8) Chip Reposition

Test Research Inc.


Step.1 Right click on FOV image then select [Chip Reposition] in pop-up menu

Figure 714: Chip Reposition

Step.2 Select component type.

Figure 715: Chip Reposition Operation Dialog Box

Test Research Inc.


Parameter:

Algorithm:

Algorithm1(default): Recalculates the component center with pads can be divided at both ends.

Figure 716: Algoritm1

Algorithm2: Recalculates the component center with pads cannot be

divided at both ends

Figure 717: Algorithm2

Step.3 Finds the relocated component center.

Figure 718: Relocate the Component Center

Test Research Inc.


5.5.2 FOV IMAGE BOXES>COLORS

Purple – Multi-function box. Select a [Missing>Missing Polarity] or [Lead] box and double click on the multi-function box. The multi-function box will be moved to the selected box and resized as it.

Orange – Untrained box.

Dark blue – Untested inspection box.

Gray – Untested component.

Red – Selected box. Double-click one box and the system will automatically select all the linked inspection boxes of the component.

Light Blue – The inspection boxes in other FOVs.

Light Purple – [Missing>Missing Polarity] or [Lead] boxes.

Light Green – Inspection boxes except [Missing>Missing Polarity>Lead].

5.5.3 MOUSE FUNCTION IN FOV IMAGE

Click left mouse button once on any inspection box to select the box. Clicking twice will automatically select all the linked inspection boxes of the component.

Press and hold [Alt] on the keyboard, and click left mouse button twice to pick an inspection box, and all the boxes with the same inspection method of the component will be selected as well.

Test Research Inc.


5.6 Function Area

5.6.1 FUNCTION FRAME

Click the [Train mode] then press [F1] on the keyboard to change the characters of the buttons to hot keys. Press [F1] again will switch them back.

Figure 719: Train mode – Press [F1] to Toggle Hot Keys

Test Research Inc.


5.6.2 COMPONENT LIST

5.6.2.1 Set Range

Change the search range for inspection box [Missing>Missing Polarity>Lead>Align>Warp]. The system will find the inspection box in the search range.

Setting procedure

Step1. Right click on the FOV image area and choose [View>Search Range] to review the inspection box.

Figure 720: Select View Search Range

Step2. Adjust the multi-function box to suit the search range then click [Set Range].

Figure 721: Adjust Multi-Function Window

Step3. Select a copy condition. Refer to Section 2.12.

Step4. The system will search the range and measure the symmetrical arrangement of frame position.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 722: Symmetrical Search Range

5.6.2.2 Train

Train the selected components. It means that applies standard image, the parameter and other settlement on this component to train, the system will only inspect the components which have trained.

5.6.2.3 Autoalign

The system will automatically relocate the align box according to the selected and trained align box. Select a trained align box and click [Autoalign] to relocate the other inspection boxes with the same type. Only if the similarity is high enough can the aligned box be trained.

[Align] is an auto positioning system that records the X, Y coordinates for graying. When you [Train], the graying in the X (or Y) direction should be 10 pins but the search returns only 1 – 9 pins in alignment because there is no way to predict the unknown (e.g. more than 11 pins). Therefore, when doing [Align] fixed positioning, select more pins for searching and matching

Only untrained align windows are qualified for the [Auto alignment] function.

Figure 723: Confirm Relocate & Train Align Window

Test Research Inc.


5.6.2.4 +Alternative

Add an alternative image to a [Missing] or [Missing Polarity] box. Adding an alternative image means adds a standard image for the component. The [Missing] or [Missing Polarity] box will be regarded as pass if more than images are passed. The number of the alternative images is not limited.

Setting procedure

Step1. Move the multi-function box to the alternative image.

Figure 724: Move Multi-Function Box to Alternative Image

Step2. Press [Set] on the keyboard.

Figure 725: Press Set to Add Alternative Image

Step3. Click [+Alternative] and select the application rules.

Step4. Click [View Model] to review all the alternative images.

5.6.2.5 EditComp

Edit the component type and angle. If the inspection box is over an FOV image, users cannot change the component angel here. Check the box at the right hand side of the item that users want to change, modify the content then Click on [OK] to finish the modification. Users also can check [by type] or [by board] to modify several specific components at the same time.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 726: Edit Component Type & Angle

[Type] – Users can change the component type when checking the box at right side.

[Merge Name] – Add the beginning character of the component name to be the beginning of the component type. Example: change the component type of R5 from 402 to R402.

[Name] – Users can change the component name when checking the box at right side.

[Group] – Users can change the component group when checking the box at right side.

[Rotate] –Users can change the component angle when checking the box at right side. After the rotate angle changes, the [Missing] and [Lead] box will be set to [Untrain]. Users have to add standard image manually. If the component size is over a FOV image, the rotate angle cannot be changed here.

[By Type] – Checking means to modify the data of the same type component.

[By Board] – Checking means to modify the data of the component laid on the same position on different multi-board.

5.6.2.6 View Model

Review the standard images here or modify the images.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 727: View Standard Images

[Inspect] – Reviews the similarity between the standard image and the image that is waiting to be measured. The blue Figure at the upper-left corner represents the number of times of the enhancement.

Figure 728: Inspect Function with Magnification Shown

[Remove] – Removes the selected image.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 729: Confirm Remove Image

Figure 730: Remove Image Dialog

[Mask] – Masks the image. See more information in Section 4.9.8.2.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 731: Mask Image Dialog

[Enhance] – Enhances the brightness and contrast for an alternative image. Unselect the check box to recover the original image.

Figure 732: Enhance Image Process

[Equalize] – The other alternative image enhance method: Histogram Equalization, users can get better alternative image by adjusting parameters.

Function:

This function is to enhance the contrast by calculating gray histogram for raising up the inspection effect. There are [R Channel], [G Channel] and [B Channel] 3 Color Channels, each of them has [Enhance] and [Inverse] two parameters can be checked.

1.[Enhance]: Checks it to enhance the color in alternate image.

2.[Inverse]: Reverses the color in alternative image.

Test Research Inc.



Click (7500) or (7700) , the [E-Enhance Settings] box will appear.


Users might select different parameter combinations for different lightings or features of

inspected component.

Operation Procedure:

Step.1 Check [Enable R Channel] only and review if the images between foreground(string) and background are separated effectively.

1.Select the alternative image

2.Select [Equalize]

[Enhance] cannot be used with [Equalize]

Test Research Inc.


Step.2 Check [Enable G Channel] only and review if the images between foreground(string) and background are separated effectively.

Step.3 Check [Enable B Channel] only and review if the images between foreground(string) and background are separated effectively.

Step.4 According to the steps above, select the most obvious one.

Step.5 When you check 2 or 3 Color Channels, you might observe whether the brightness of foreground(string) and background is consistency. If not then the Color Channel inverse is recommended.

For example:

There is an alternative image we want to enhance as the following Figure.

Figure 735: Blurred Alternative Image

Step.1 Check [Enable] R Channel only.

Figure 736: Enable R Channel only

The foreground(string) is brighter

The background is darker.

Test Research Inc.


Step.2 Check [Enable] G Channel only.

Figure 737: Enable G Channel only

Step.3 Check [Enable] R Channel only.

Figure 738: Enable B Channel only

Step.4 According to the enhancement alternative Images above, we find that the R Channel and the B Channel are better because of the apparent contrast. However, the brightness of these 2 Color Channel is not consistency (R:Brighter foreground and darker background. B:Darker foreground and brighter back), so we check inverse B to get a better alternative image.

The foreground(string) is darker

The background is brighter.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 739: The Better Alternative Image

[Set to Lib] – Use this function to save the alternative image back to Package Library and Image Library. Select an image first and click [Set to Lib]. Then input the file name and click [Open] to finish setting.

Figure 740: Save Image to Library Process

[Weighting] – Setting the weighting of alternatives. See more information in Section 4.10.3.2.

5.6.2.7 Delete Box

Select an inspection box then click [Delete Box] to delete it.

5.6.2.8 Add 1 Box

Click the [Add 1 Box] button to add an inspection box for the selected component.

Setting Steps

Step1. Select a component and adjust the multi-function window to the size and position of the inspection box to be added.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 741: Adjust Multi-Function Window

Step2. Click [Add 1 Box] button and select the inspection algorithm.

Figure 742: Add 1 Box & Select Algorithm

Step3. Select the rules to apply the setting.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 743: Select Dialog Box

Step4. Finish adding an inspection box.

Figure 744: Finish Adding an Inspection Box

5.6.2.9 Add N Box

Select a box first as the standard image and the system will search in the multi-function window to find similar images and add inspection boxes.

Setting Steps

Step1. Select an inspection box as the standard and adjust the multi-function window to cover the object area.

Step2. Click [Add N Box] to finish the setting.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 745: Select Inspection Box (Red) & Adjust Multi-Function Window (Purple)

Step3. Create the other linked boxes at the same time. If there are some inspection boxes that are linked with the object boxes, the linked boxes will be created at the same time.

Figure 746: Add Linked Inspection boxes

Test Research Inc.


5.6.2.10 Set Logic

Setting the Logic between inspection boxes. See more about logic in 4.9.8.1.

5.6.2.11 Setting

Setting the pass level for selected inspection window.

Figure 747: Inspection Window Pass Level

5.6.2.12 Link

Assigning windows that are parents and children to link. See more about [Link] in Section 4.9.3.3.

5.6.2.13 UnLink

Breaking the link between inspection boxes. See more information in Section 4.9.3.4.

5.6.3 NEW COMP & RESET WIN.

5.6.3.1 New Comp.

Add a new component in the project. The component data will also be added in the AOI file..

Setting procedure

Step1. Move the multi-function window to the center of the component.

Step2. Click [New Comp.] button. Input all component information except the X and Y axis coordinates.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 748: Add Component Dialog

Step3. Click [OK] to finish the setting.

Step4. Click [Merge] to merge Library.

Step5. Capture the FOV images again.

Step6. Enter [Train] mode to edit the component.

5.6.3.2 Reset Win.

Reset the size and position of the multi-function window.

Figure 749: Reset Multi-Function Box

Test Research Inc.


5.6.4 WARP SETTING

5.6.4.1 SetWarp>DelWarp

Set a [Warp] for the current FOV. Move the multi-function box to a suitable position and adjust the size. Then click [SetWarp] to set a warp box. When the check box is selected, [Warp] will be inspected with Method 1. If the check box is not selected, [Warp] will be inspected with Method 2.

Only one [Warp] setting is allowed per FOV. After [Warp] is set, the character on the button changes to [DelWarp]. Select [DelWarp] to delete the [Warp] setting.

Setting Steps

Step1. Adjust the position and size of the multi-function box to suit the object.

Figure 750: Adjust Multi-Function Box

Step2. Select the copy rules. [By Board] means copy the setting to related multi-board FOVs. Selecting the check box means the inspection boxes will be moved a relative distance according to the [Warp] position setting when copying the [Warp] to multiple boards on the same panel.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 751: Select Warp Copy Rules

Step3. When finished setting there is a warp on the FOV image and a [WARPMODEL] component in the component list.

Figure 752: Warp Set on FOV Image

Figure 753: Warp Model in Component List

5.6.4.2 Warp Model Score

Set the similarity score. When the similarity is higher than this score, the inspection box in the FOV will be relocated according to the [Warp] setting.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 754: Warp Model Score

5.6.4.3 Warp Algorithm Modification

The function is to change the algorithm for the specific [Warp] by specific camera. Press [Ctrl] and [W] on the keyboard under the FOV with [Warp] box, a dialog box will appear as below. The unchecked icon represents Method 1 (See Section 4.10.1.1) and the checked one means Method 2( See Section 4.10.1.2)).

Figure 755: Change Warp Algorithm

5.6.4.4 Delete all Warp Boxes

Select a [Warp] box and press [Shift] and [W] to delete all the [Warp] boxes in the program.

5.6.5 ROI SETTING

ROI is an inspection box to inspect scrapes on a board’s surface.

5.6.5.1 Set ROI

Setting Procedure

Step1. Use the multi-function box to cover the area to be inspected.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 756: Enlarge Multi-Function Box

Step2. Input the name of ROI and click [Set ROI] to add an inspection box.

Figure 757: Set ROI Inspection Box

Step3. Select the copy rule.

Figure 758: Select ROI Copy Rule

Test Research Inc.


Step4. Select the mask zone – the area not to be inspected.

Figure 759: Mask Zone Options

Default Zone

Figure 760: Default Mask Zone

Mask Dark Zone

Figure 761: Mask Dark Zone

Mask Bright Zone

Test Research Inc.


Figure 762: Mask Bright Zone

5.6.5.2 ROI Parameter

Setting ROI parameters.

Figure 763: ROI Parameters Dialog

[Train] –Sets the parameter for training.

[Sensitivity] – Uses 70 as an example. If the difference of the gray level between neighboring pixels is larger than 30 (100-70) the two pixels will be regarded as edges.

[Mask Zone] – Uses 1 as an example. Next to the edge points the adjacent 1 pixel point is masked as untest.

[Inspection Parameter] – Sets the parameters for inspection. The system only inspects the area that is in the ROI box and not masked.

[Inspect Sensitivity] – Uses 60 as an example. If the difference of gray level between neighboring pixels is larger than 40 (100-60) the two pixels will be regarded as edges.

[Tolerance] – Uses 5 as an example. If a group size of edges is more than 5 the inspection box will be regarded as failed.

The [Train Sensitivity] value must be greater than [Inspect Sensitivity] or it will result in more false alarms.

Test Research Inc.


5.6.5.3 Delete ROI

Deleting all ROI boxes in the FOV.

5.6.6 TOOL

5.6.6.1 Enhance

Enhancing the brightness and contrast in the multi-function box. See the example below.

Figure 764: ROI Parameters Dialog

5.6.6.2 Enable

When this item is selected, you can use enhance function.

5.6.6.3 Angle

Inputting the angle and click [Rotate] to rotate the multi-function box.

5.6.6.4 Rotate

Rotating the multi-function box.

Test Research Inc.


5.6.6.5 2X

Clicking on this button repeatedly can review the two times, four times and original image in sequence. After clicking this button, the system display enlarged FOV image based on the position of the multi-function box. The enlarged image is only for reviewing, and users can edit the project only on the original size image.

Figure 765: 2X Image

5.6.6.6 Load

Loading a saved FOV image for review or test. The image is not saved in the project.

5.6.6.7 INSPECT

Inspecting the current FOV and display the result.

Test Research Inc.


5.6.7 SWITCH FOV

Figure 766: Switch FOV Panel

[Panel>Set] – [Panel] means to review all the FOVs in one PCB; [Set] means to review the set of FOVs for a multi-board panel.

[Top Camera] – [ON] means to review the FOVs inspected by the top camera on the panel map. The FOVs display by color boxes; [OFF] means not to review and the boxes disappear.

[Front Camera] – [ON] means to review the FOVs inspected by the front camera on the panel map. The FOVs display by color boxes; [OFF] means not to review and the boxes disappear.

[Rear Camera] – [ON] means to review the FOVs inspected by the rear camera on the panel map. The FOVs display by color boxes; [OFF] means not to review and the boxes disappear.

[Left Camera] – [ON] means to review the FOVs inspected by the left camera on the panel map. The FOVs display by color boxes; [OFF] means not to review and the boxes disappear.

[Right Camera] – [ON] means to review the FOVs inspected by the right camera on the panel map. The FOVs display by color boxes; [OFF] means not to review and the boxes disappear.

5.6.8 MERGE

Click [Merge] to merge the specific library with a component. After merging, FOV images should be captured again (refer to 3.7.3).

Merge procedure

Step1. Click [Merge] and a library window appears. The detailed functions are in 4.9.2.2. Select a library and Click on [OK].

Step2. Input the object component type or name then Click [OK].

Test Research Inc.


Figure 767: Merge Library Dialog

[Type] – Selects the objective type. The check box means merge Library to all components with the type.

[Component] – To merge Library to a single component, do not select the check box and choose a component.

[Over Write] – Selects to overwrite the data or it just merge the component do not have inspection boxes.

Step3. Capture FOV images again.

5.6.9 HISTOGRAM

The histogram curve displays the distribution of gray levels in the multi-function box. The horizontal axis is the gray level; the vertical axis refers to the pixel counts. The red line means the gray level where the mouse cursor is.

Figure 768: Histogram Curve

: It means the gray level of the position that the cursor points to is 55; and the proportion of area with gray level over 55 in multi-function box is 75%.

: Data in brackets are the coordinates of the cursor on the FOV image. The following three number represent the information of R, G and B of the position

Test Research Inc.


that cursor points to. The number in the last brackets is the gray level calculated from weighting.

5.6.10 CHANGE LIGHTING

5.6.10.1 Move to FOV Position

Selecting the check box means move the camera to the position of the FOV that is currently being viewed. Change and save the lighting.

Not selecting the check box means capture the image at the current position. The lighting can be changed for testing, but cannot be saved.

5.6.10.2 Set Lighting

Setting the lighting for the FOV. The way to set lighting is in 4.8

Figure 769: Change FOV Lighting

[For Multi FOV] -- Sets the light for related FOVs in the other boards in a multi-board panel.

[For Current FOV] -- Only sets the light for the current FOV.

Test Research Inc.


[Change By Type] -- Sets the light to FOVs that contain the component with specific type.

[For Test] -- The light just displays for testing and the FOV will be inspected by original lighting. You should click above selection to set lighting or click [Cancel] not to change and close the window.

The changed lighting will be named according to the FOV name.

If the lighting is changed with the other default lighting, the system will ask whether you want to set the lighting with a new name according to the FOV name or set the lighting with original lighting name.

Figure 770: Save Lighting Name Options

5.6.11 TRAIN>UNTRAIN>TEST>UNTEST

5.6.11.1 Train

Train the selected inspection box.

[For all FOV] – Trains all inspection boxes.

[For Untrained] – Trains all untrained inspection boxes.

5.6.11.2 UnTrain

Untrain the selected inspection box

[For all FOV] – Untrains all inspection boxes.

5.6.11.3 Test

Setting the selected inspection box as test.

5.6.11.4 Untest

Setting the selected box as untest.

5.6.12 IMAGE LIBRARY

5.6.12.1 Load

Loading a saved image to use. After loading, the image is displayed.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 771: Load a Saved Image

5.6.12.2 Save

Saving the image in the image area to [ImageLibrary] folder. Select a type to save it as.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 772: Save a New Image from Image Area

5.6.12.3 Rotate

Rotating the current image. It rotates 90 degree per click.

5.6.12.4 Mask

Setting the mask for covering the component image. See more information in Section 4.9.8.2.

Test Research Inc.


5.6.12.5 Relock

The system will relocate the inspection box according to the image in the image area.

If the check box next to [Relock] is selected, the following dialog box appears. The system will change the type name when the similarity is up to the score, Then the system will display the number of components that were changed.

Figure 773: Auto-Search & Change Type

5.6.12.6 Set Image

Grabbing the image in the multi-function box and displaying the image area.

5.6.13 FIND FOV BY TYPE>NAME

5.6.13.1 Type

Setting the inputted or selected type as the searching condition.

5.6.13.2 Name

Setting the inputted or selected name as the searching condition.

5.6.13.3 Trained

Setting the trained components as the searching condition.

5.6.13.4 Untrained

Setting the untrained components as the searching condition.

Test Research Inc.


5.6.13.5 Test

Setting the tested components as the searching condition.

5.6.13.6 UnTest

Setting the untested components as the searching condition.

5.6.13.7 Single Void>Pin

Setting the FOVs with single [Void] or [Pin]box which needs to add [Warp] as the searching condition.

5.6.13.8 Previous

Going back to the previous FOV based on the searching condition setting.

5.6.13.9 Next

Going forward to the next FOV based on the searching condition setting.

5.6.14 CHANGE FOV

5.6.14.1 Previous

Going back to the previous FOV based on the searching condition setting. It has the same function as the item in 5.6.13.8.

5.6.14.2 Next

Going forward to the next FOV based on the searching condition setting. It has the same function as the item in 5.6.13.9.

5.6.14.3 [OK]

Closing the [Train] dialog box.

Test Research Inc.


5.6.15 INFORMATION BAR

Figure 774: Information Bar

5.6.15.1 Size of Multi-Function Box

[W] indicates the length in the horizontal direction, unit is pixel; unit of the number in brackets is mm.

[H] indicates the length in the vertical direction, unit is pixel; unit of the number in brackets is mm.

[Di ] indicates the length of the diagonal line, unit is pixel, and unit of the number in brackets is mm.

5.6.15.2 Size of the Selected Inspection Box

Display the length, width and length of diagonal line of the selected inspection box.

5.6.15.3 FOV Number and the Current Light Setting

F1-3-6 means the serial numbers of the FOV image.

ToplightA means the light name this image use.

6-3 means the third image in board 6.

Referring to the Figure above, [W] is the horizontal width of the multi-function box. The first number (100) is pixels, and the second (1.50) is the unit of the measurement in millimeters. [H] is the vertical height of the multi-function box and [Di] is the diagonal length.

The [Info] section displays the width and height of the inspection box.

The field at the lower displays first, the [FOV Image Label] number (F1-3-6). [Toplight A] is the lighting method of the FOV. The last numbers (6-3) refers to board 6 image 3.---------

5.6.16 WEIGHTING

After checking [Mono] or [Phase 1, Phase 2, Phase 3], the image in the multi-function box displays according to the setting. This is for users’ reference.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 775: Original Image.

Figure 776: Displays the Binary Image in Multi-Function Box

Figure 777: Checks Desired Phase and Adjusts the Weighting

Test Research Inc.


6 INSPECTION DIALOG FUNCTION

Figure 778: Inspection Function Dialog Box

Image Diagram

Functions

Result Dialog

Panel Defect

Map

Test Research Inc.


6.1 Image Diagram Functions

Figure 779: Image Diagram Functions-1680x1050

[Alternative ]– Adds an alternative to a component.

[Edit COMP.] – Edits component name, type, group and angle.

Test Research Inc.


[Set Range] – Sets search range for an inspection box by adjust the size of multi-function box .

[View model] – Reviews the standard images

[Setting] – Sets the pass level.

[Setwarp>Delwarp] – Sets or deletes [Warp] box.

[Delete box] – Deletes selected box.

[+Box] – Adds one box to selected component.

[Test>UnTest] – Sets selected inspection box to tested or untested.

[Train>UnTrain] – Sets selected inspection box to trained or untrained.

[2X] – Shows the double-sized FOV image. The display area is the multi-function box location and the image is reviewed for test.

[Save] – Saves the image to the folder where you saved the project file to.

[Rotate] – Rotates the multi-function box counterclockwise according to the angle users input.

[Lighting] – Changes the lighting for inspection.

[Insp.] – Inspects the current FOV.

[Visible] – Checks this displays the inspection boxes.

[Mono > Phase1(R )> Phase2(G) > Phase3(B)] – Let the image in the multi-function box display according to the weighting.

[Prev>Next] – Goes to the next or previous failed FOV.

Status bar at lower-right corner

– Data in brackets is the coordinates of the cursor on the FOV image. The following three number represent the information of R, G and B of the position that cursor points to. The number in the last brackets is the gray level calculated from weighting.

– Displays the width and length of the selected inspection box, unit is pixel; unit of the number in brackets is mm.

Test Research Inc.


6.2 Panel Defect Map

Left click on the panel defect map, the system will display double size of the panel. All the defects will be shown on the map. Also, the defect type will be provided. See the example below.

Figure 780: Displaying Panel Defect Map

If you want to open the closed panel defect map, input [map] and then press [Enter] on the keyboard to recall it.

Test Research Inc.


Right click on the map to display pop-up menu as below.

Figure 781: Panel Defect Map

[Search Component] – Selects this button, then specify a component to be marked on the map.

[Show NG Map] – Checks this item to display the panel defect map after the next inspection; otherwise, the map will not display after the next inspection.

[Show defect by FOV] – The system will display all defects on the panel when this item is not selected. When selected, the system will only display the defects that are reviewed in FOV images.

[Top Most Display] – When the item is selected, this [Panel Defect Map] will be displayed at the top from the next inspecting.

Test Research Inc.


6.3 Results Dialog

Figure 782: Test Results Dialog

[Confirm PASS] – Confirm the board passed.

[Confirm FAIL] – Confirm the board failed.

[Display Test>Display Fail] – Select whether to display [TEST] or [PASS] and [FAIL] Figure.

[Save .PRJ] – Save the project

[Yield Statistic] – List the result counts of board.

[Total Test Board Count] – Total test board count, counting with the single board.

[PASS Board Count] – Total PASS board count.

[FAIL Board Count] – Total FAIL board count.

[Fail-to Confirm-PASS Board Count] – The number of boards that are tested FAIL but are confirmed as PASS by operator.

[Alarm Setting] – Alarms the failed yield rate according to setting [By Panel], [By Board], or [By Component]. The setting dialog box is shown as below. You can input the wanted number in [Alarm after test count] column.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 783: Alarm Setting Dialog Box

[Repair mode] – Select to link with Repair Station and display the data that is confirmed and calculated on Repair Station. Note: For Repair Station, [Setting>Other>SPCOutPut] has to be set as [True]. It shows the DPMO field, only when you confirm the data by Window on Repair Station.

Figure 784: PPY Defect Statistics

[PPY Yield] – (Board inspected PASS Count + Board that is false alarm Count)> (Total Test Board Count) *100%

[PPY DPPM] – [(Component confirmed FAIL Count + Component that is false alarm Count) > (Total Component Count)]*1000000

Test Research Inc.


[PPY DPMO] – [(Inspection Box confirmed FAIL Count + Inspection Box that is false alarm Count)>(Total Test Board Count*Total Inspection Box Count)]*1000000

Figure 785: FPY Defect Statistics

[FPY Yield] – Board inspected PASS Count >Total Test Board Count *100%

[FPY DPPM] – [(Component confirmed FAIL Count)>Total Component Count]*1000000

[FPY DPMO] – [(Inspection Box confirmed FAIL Count)>(Total Test Board Count*Total Inspection Box Count)]*1000000

[#] – Click [#], the blank fields appear for users to input numbers of [Total Test Board Count], [FAIL Board Count] and [Fail-to Confirm-PASS Board Count].After clicking [#] again to complete setting, the system will recalculate the results and show them in statistics fields

Figure 786: Blank Fields

[Inspection time] – Displays inspection time and time to finding fiducial marks.

[Fail Statistic] – Lists the rank of failed component type, defect counts and the rate.

[Fail Rank]– Lists the rank of failed component. Users can rank according the component or component type. If the parameter [SaveTop10FailImage] is set to 1 in registry, the system will save the last fail image of the top 10 components. Users can click on the component name directly to review the saved fail image at FOV image area.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 787: Fail Rank

[Defect tree] – Lists the details of components.

Component name, (Type), Defect kind [Parameter, inspected score/tolerance]

Display

Inspection box name, Defect kind, [Parameter, inspected core/tolerance]

Figure 788: Example: Defect Tree

[Reset Yield Count] – Resets the number [Yield Statistic] to 0.

[Disable Yield Count] – Does not display the [Yield Statistic] field.

[Disable Fail Count] – Does not display the [Fail Statistic] field.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 789: Results Screen with Yield & Fail Statistics Hidden

[Reset Fail Count] – Resets the number of [Fail Statistic] to 0.

[Close&Stop] – Closes the window.

Users can add a [dbc.bmp] file under [C:\aoi] folder, so that the [TEST] Figure on [Results Dialog] will be change to the Figure of [dbc.bmp]. The setting only work when [Display Test] is clicked.

Add a DWORD parameter named [ConfirmPassIsPassBoard] and set the value to 1 in registry; then if users click on [Confirm Pass] button after inspecting, this inspection will be regarded as a pass board, and the statistical result will be changed automatically.

Under [Confirm Mode], when finishing inspection, users can press [F7] on the keyboard to inspection the board again without sending the board out.

Users can press [F3] on the keyboard and then a dialog box will appear as below. It is to select items that users want to show in the [Results Dialog].

Test Research Inc.


Figure 790: Results Screen with Yield & Fail Statistics Hidden

[Yield Statics] – Displays or hides the specific statistics.

[Fail Statistic] – Displays the [Fail Statistic] field.

[Fail Rank .Amount]: Sets how many component should be display in Fail Rank.

[Inspection Box Fail Rate] – Displays the proportion of error box on Result Tree.

[Show Group] – if display the group on Result Tree.

Test Research Inc.


7 SPECIAL FUNCTIONS

7.1 Warning Shift

Setting the range for defining the shift level of the failed components in Repair Station.

7.1.1 PROCEDURE OF SETTING

Users can set the warning values in the [Shift] column under the main program.

Create a text file under the folder [C:\AOI] to save the mapping relation between [Type] and [Fail Shift]. If the file exists in the computer, the system will enable the function automatically. The content should include as below:

The format of the file name must be [shiftwarning.txt].

Column 1: Type

Column 2: Fail value of ShiftX

Column 3: Fail value of ShiftY

C0603 200 500 C0805 300 800

After inspection has finished, the system will judge if the test components belong to [Shift Warning]. Then, the system will transfer the test results to the Repair Station.

7.1.2 EXAMPLE

Assume that the [Warning Shift] of C0603 is 200 and [Fail Shift] is 300, the setting methods are:

1) In main program, set the Pass Level to ShiftX = 200, ShiftY=200.

2) Add the following data in the shiftwarning.txt file under the folder [C:\AOI].

C0603 300 300

3) After the inspection, there are three results as below.

If the Shift is under 200, the system will transfer the test result “PASS” to the Repair A.Station.

If the Shift is between 200 and 300, the system will transfer the test result warning B.to the Repair Station.

If the Shift is over 300, the system will transfer the test result “FAIL” to the Repair C.Station.

4) If the Repair Station receives the warning message, it will highlight the test components in yellow.

Test Research Inc.


7.2 Save All FOV Images During Inspection

7.2.1 ENABLE AND SETTING

Press [F4] on the keyboard to open the setting dialog box.

Figure 791: Save JPG FOV Image Dialog

[Enabled Save JPG Fov Image]: After this item is selected, the system will save FOV images during inspection.

[Enabled Load JPG Fov Image]: After this item is selected, the system will load the specific FOV images from the specified path in the Train mode box.

[By Barcode]: After input barcode data in the text input field and click button [By Barcode], the system will find the mapping path automatically.

[Select Folder]: Specifies the folder to load files. The inspected image will be saved in the folder named [jpgfovimage] under the same folder as the project files.

Test Research Inc.


7.3 Login System by Reading Barcode on Employee ID Card

7.3.1 CONSTRAINT

The Login function should be enabled, See Section 3.7.24 Users Manager.

The mode should be set in[Confirm-Pass]. See Section 3.6.2 Confirm-Pass Mode.

Users only can use log in> out function under NG Dialog box.

7.3.2 PROCEDURE

1) Use [administrator] account to login the system.

Figure 792: Save JPG FOV Image Dialog

Test Research Inc.


2) Choose [Utilities> Users manager].

3) Click [new] to add a new users.

Figure 793: Users Manager Dialog

4) Click […] button at right side of [Users Name] to specify the path of the barcode on employee ID card.

Figure 794: Users Data Update Dialog

5) Press [F4] on the keyboard in [NG Dialog] to enable the barcode reader. Then, you can login to the corresponding system based on the barcode on the employment card. For example, if the you are [Engineer] level, the system will login to [Engineer] mode after the barcode scanning process. After the project has been tuned by the engineer, you can press [F4] again to return to the previous login status. (if the previous users are [Operator] level, then the system will return to [Operator] Mode).

NOTICE: All login or logout data will be saved in the log file.

Test Research Inc.


7.4 Multi-Language Method

7.4.1 DEFINITION OF LANG FILE

Search the file named [English.lang] under the folder [C:\AOI] first, and then open it as a .txt file. The detail of the file contents is described below.

Example :

Search.Caption=Search=Search Component

Coding index in program=Characters to display on interface (abbreviation)= Details to describe the function

The three items are described below:

1) Coding index in program

The programing code only for TRI engineer use. Don’t modify it.

2) Characters to display on interface (abbreviation)

Sets the name of the functional button. The words inputting here will be displayed on the functional button directly. Because of the limited space in a button area, it is better to use the abbreviations of the words. For example, “Field of View” cannot fit the space in a functional button, so users can use “FOV” to replace “Field of View”.

Tips: Use search tool to find the words which can’t be displayed completely in the functional button area. Then, replace the original words by the abbreviation.

3) Details to describe the function

This item provides an extra box(hint) for users to describe the functional button.

Notice: If the descriptions in Details to describe the function are the same as the words in Characters to display on interface, the hint function will not work.

7.4.2 RESULT DISPLAY

See the example below.

1. Set a hint “Test Hint” for the functional bottom “Set Range”.

Figure 795: Set a Hint in Language File

Test Research Inc.


2. When you move the cursor to the functional button “Set Range”, the system will display the hint “ Test Hint”.

Figure 796: Display Hint

Test Research Inc.


7.5 Read Special Characters by Barcode Reader

In default setting, AOIs filter out the special characters such as [%], [$] or [*] in the barcode string. If there is a special character in barcode string, the system will show decode error and the barcode will not be read in. If users want to read in the special characters, they should modify the text file ([C:\AOI\Barcode.config]).

AOI uses [@] to separate multi-barcode, so there should not be [@] in a barcode string; otherwise the [@] will be taken as the separator and the barcode will be wrong.

The special characters can be used currently are listed below:

1) Space [ ]

2) dash [-]

3) semicolon [;]

4) underline [_]

5) @

6) Number 1~9

7) Capital letters [A, B, ... , Z]

8) Small letters [a, b, ... , z]

Modified Method

1) Query the Ascii Table, and then find out the wanted ASCII code.

2) Open [C:\AOI\Barcode.config] file as a .text format.

3) Input the ASCII code in a new line following the existing format; such as [CodeX CodeY]. (that means all the characters from CodeX to CodeY are accepted.)

Example

1) Open the file named barcode.config under the folder[C:\AOI\], and then check the current setting. See the example below. In this table, the acceptable characters are 45 (45 = ‘-‘), 46 – 57 (46 = ‘.’ to 57 = ‘ ‘), and so on.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 797: Barcode.config

2) If users want to add [ > ](ASCII = 47) to be an acceptable character, add [47 47](separated by [Tab] key) in a new line and then save the file.

Figure 798: Add a New Code in Barcode.config

3) Restart the AOI main program. The setting will be enabled.

ASCII Table

Character HTML Explanation

00; - 08; Unused

09; Horizontal tab

10; Line feed

11; - 12; Unused

13; Carriage Return

14; - 31; Unused

Space 32; Space

! 33; Exclamation mark

" 34; Quotation mark

# 35; Number sign

$ 36; Dollar sign

% 37; Percent sign

& 38; Ampersand

' 39; Apostrophe

( 40; Left parenthesis

) 41; Right parenthesis

Test Research Inc.


* 42; Asterisk

+ 43; Plus sign

, 44; Comma

- 45; Hyphen

. 46; Period (fullstop)

> 47; Solidus (slash)

: 58; Colon

; 59; Semi-colon

< 60; Less than

= 61; Equals sign

> 62; Greater than

? 63; Question mark

@ 64; Commercial at

[ 91; Left square bracket

\ 92; Reverse solidus (backslash)

] 93; Right square bracket

^ 94; Caret

_ 95; Horizontal bar (underscore)

` 96; Acute accent

{ 123; Left curly brace

| 124; Vertical bar

} 125; Right curly brace

~ 126; Tilde

127; - 129; Unused

‚ 130; Low single comma quotation mark

ƒ 131; Function sign

„ 132; Low double comma quotation mark

… 133; Ellipses

† 134; Dagger

‡ 135; Double dagger

ˆ 136; Caret

‰ 137; Per mile sign

Š 138; Capital S Hacek

‹ 139; Less-than sign

Œ 140; Capital OE ligature

141; - 144; Unused

‘ 145; Single beginning quotation mark

’ 146; Single ending quotation mark

“ 147; Double beginning quotation mark

” 148; Double ending quotation mark

• 149; Dot, middle

Test Research Inc.


– 150; En dash

— 151; Em dash

˜ 152; Tilde

™ 153; Trademark symbol

š 154; Small s Hacek

› 155; Greater-than sign

œ 156; Small oe ligature

157; - 158; Unused

Ÿ 159; Capital Y, diesis > umlaut

160; Non-breaking Space

161; Inverted exclamation

162; Cent sign

163; Pound sterling

164; General currency sign

165; Yen sign

166; Br[OK]en vertical bar

167; Section sign

168; Diesis > Umlaut

169; Copyright

170; Feminine ordinal

171; Left angle quote, guillemot left

172; Not sign

173; Soft hyphen

174; Registered trademark

175; Macron accent

176; Degree sign

177; Plus or minus

178; Superscript two

179; Superscript three

180; Acute accent

181; Micro sign

182; Paragraph sign

Figure 799: ASCII Table

Test Research Inc.


7.6 Do Not Display [Communicate Table Wait] Message

Users can add a new DWORD parameter, [hidewaitboardinmsg] = 1, in the Windows Registry. After the setting, the system will not show the [Communicate Table wait] message when the system waits for the board in. Generally, this function is used for the Desktop machine. This function can avoid the situation that the inspecting screen of the second project will be switched to the main screen when the second project function is enabled,.

7.7 Limiting the Number of Alternative Images

Users can set the DWORD parameter, [alternativecount], in the Windows Registry to control the number of alternative images。

7.8 Sending Signals to Hella-Samlip Magazine

When the test result is “Fail”, the system will send signals to Hella-Samlip Magazine.


1) Function Description:

When the test result shows “Fail” in the AOI program, the system will send three signals to the Halle-Samlip Magazine (Korean machine).

1. N.G PCB Out Signal(R702) On (PCPLC)

%01#WCSR07021**\r

W represents “Write” 1 represents “On”

Read the written code to confirm the setting.

%01#RCSR0702**\r R represents “Read” PLC should recall %01#RC120，

1 represents “ON”

2. N.G PCB Information Data Set (DT10000 ~10099) (PCPLC)

%01WDD1000010003YYYYMMDDHHMMSS99**\r

W represents “Write”

10000 > 10003 represent PLC register (10000~10003),

YYYYMMDDHHMMSS represent the test time(Year>Month>Day>Hour>Min>Sec)

Read the written code to confirm the setting.

%01RDD1000010003**\r

Test Research Inc.


R represents “Read”

3. N.G PCB Out Finish (R702) Off (PCPLC)

%01#WCSR07020**\r

W represents “Write” 1 represents “On”

Read the written code to confirm the setting

%01#RCSR0702**\r

R represents “Read”

PLC PLC should recall %01#RC020 ，

0 represents “OFF”

2) Notice:

If users want to use this function:

Set ConnectToMagazine = 1 in Windows Registry

Set ConnectToMagazineComport = 9 in Windows Registry

According to the client’s Magazine RS232 COM to set the value. The default setting is 9.

Do not use the Magazine RS232 COM Port that AOIs have already used. For example: COM2 (PLC), COM3 (H>WBarcode), COM4 (Dual H>W Barcoder), COM6 (Handy Barcoder) and COM8 (PLC).

3) Setting Procedure:

Step1. Choose [Start > Setting > Control Panel > System > Hardware > Device Manager > Ports > Communnication Port (Com2) >Poart Settings].

Step2. Set the communication protocol of RS232 COM Port between Magazine and AOI as below: BaudRate = 19200, Data Bits = 8, Parity = Odd, Stop Bits = 1.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 800: Communication Port Setting

Step3. Set [ConnectToMagazine =1] to enable the connection function.

Step4. Set [ConnectToMagazineComport ] to connect with Magazine.

Step5. If the connection setting is successful, a dialog box will appear as below.

Figure 801: The Dialog Box for the Successful Communication Setting

Step6. If the connection setting is failed, a dialog box will appear as below.

Figure 802: The Dialog Box for the Failed Communication Setting

Test Research Inc.


If the connection process keep failing, please set [ConnectToMagazine_LogAnswer ] to 1 in the Windows Registry and run the connection setting again. Then, send the Log file under the folder [C:\\AOI\\Log] to TRI.

7.9 Saving Support Pin Height Data to a Project

Required version: TRAOI 3.9 or above (PLC version 2.35 or above)

1) Function description:

Enable the Support Pin function in PLC.

When opening a file in the AOI program, the system will ask if users want to apply the Origin and Height values in the project file (*.PRE) to PLC.

When saving a file in the AOI program, the system will ask if users want to apply the Origin and Height values in the project file (*.PRE) to PLC.

Test Research Inc.


2) The flow charts of the AOI programing: (Opening and saving a project file)

Figure 803: The Flow Chart of Opening a Project in Support Pin Function

Test Research Inc.


Figure 804: The Flow Chart of Saving a Project in Support Pin Function

Test Research Inc.


3) PLC interface description:

Step1. Quick press upper-left corner and then right corner of the PLC human machine interface screen (In 2 seconds).

Figure 805: Saving the Height of Support Pin – PLC Setting 1

Step2. Press [Board Lock] button.


Step3. Press [Support Pin] button.


Test Research Inc.


Step4. Press [Open] button.


Step5. A dialog box will appear as below. Press [Y] to enable the Support Pin function or press [N] to close Support Pin function.


Step6. The Procedure of Setting Start Position:

1. Board In: After PLC’s Support Pin function is enable, put the test board in the entrance (S1) and then press [Board In].

2. Setting the lower limit (SENSOR position)：Press [Origin](highlighted). If

SUPPORT PIN does not locate in the SENSOR position, it will descend to the SENSOR position automatically and then rise to the higher place than the SENSOR position.

3. Setting the X-Y table origin (Start point) ：Press [Up] to X-Y table origin (Start

point), and then press [Enter] to save the position.

4. Setting the upper limit：After setting the X-Y table origin, rise the Support Pin to

the upper limit position by pressing [Up] and then press [Return]. The system will save the position setting automatically and then return to the previous page.

Test Research Inc.



Description:

Hold [Up] and [Down] on the left side to keep moving the Support Pin. Then, release the buttons to stop the action.


Press [Up] and [Down] on the right side to move the Support Pin. (It will move 100 pps per press)


After each setting change in PLC, users must return to the reset interface in order to apply the new setting.

4) AOI Main Program Description:

If the origin setting of opened project file(*pre) is different to the origin setting in PLC, a dialog box will appear as below. Click [Y] to accept or click [N] to cancel the change.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 813: Applying Origin Value to PLC

If the height setting of opened project file(*pre) is different to the origin setting in PLC, a dialog box will appear as below. Click [Y] to accept or click [N] to cancel the change.

Figure 814: Applying Height Value to PLC

After click [OK], all the change will be saved to the project file.

Figure 815: Saving Support Pin Data to the Project

7.10 [New Multi-Panel] function :Setting a multi-panel as a single board

Setting Dword [newmultipanel]=1 in the Windows Registry to enable the function.

7.11 Adding component leads automatically by epac files

Users can use the PIN data in epac files to add the component leads automatically.



After AOI program loads epac files, the system will generate component leads automatically according to the setting in epac files. Epac files are transferred from Isis component Library(LF

Test Research Inc.


Data). The format is XML. The component name of AOI program is the item “key” in <PackageMapping>. It should correspond to the name in <Package>。


<Packages>

<Package name="pkgnoname_" locked="false">

<Body>

<Centre x="0" y="0" >>

<Height value="0" >>

<>Body>

<Pins>

<Pin name="1" used="true" x="-1950" y="-2875" >>



<Pin name="4" used="true" x="0" y="-2875" >>



Test Research Inc.



<Pin name="8" used="true" x="1950" y="2875" >>




<Pin name="12" used="true" x="-650" y="2875" >>



<>Pins>

<>Package>

<>Packages>

<PackageMapping name="DefaultPackageMapping">

<Map type="PN" key="C100R" target="pkgnoname_" >>

<>PackageMapping>

If the coordinate of Pin is (0,0) , it will be ignored.

2) Setting procedure:

Step1. Before loading a epac file, the [Auto Add Pin] function is disable.

Figure 817: Adding Pin Information According to the Epac File-Library

Test Research Inc.


Step2. Load a epac file.

Figure 818: Loading a File For Auto Add Pin

Step3. Specify a file。

Figure 819: Selecting an Epac File

Test Research Inc.


Step4. After loading, the [Auto Add Pin] function will be enable.

Figure 820: Auto Add Pin Enabled

Step5. Prepare for generating the leads automatically.

1. Select a component.

2. Click icon to add pins.

3. Drag the mouse to draw a box。

4. Click icon [Auto Add Pin]。

Figure 821: The Process of Creating the Pins

If there is no data in epac files related to the selected component, a dialog box will appear as below.

Notice: The [Body] box influences the position where the leads will be generated, so the [Body] box should fit the real component size.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 822: A Warning Message, “ Cannot Find Matching Componant”

Step6. The leads will be generated automatically.


7.12 Combining Several Projects


Because [New Multi Panel] function only works on a same panel, this function provides another approach to solve the multi-board panel problem. This function allows users to combine several PRE files to be a single PRE file. Moreover, after the combination, each board still keep its own fiducial marks.

2) Setting Procedure:

Step1. Create new a *.pre file for each single board which will be set on the multi- board panel.

Notice: the old PRE files which have FOVs cannot be used.

Step2. After setting the fiducial marks, you should click [Next] button to enter the

Test Research Inc.


[Merge] dialog box. Don’t do the merge process and then save the file.

Step3. After opening the AOI main program, choose [File > Open multi-program]. Hold [Ctrl] key to select multiple PRE files.

Figure 824: File/ Open Multi-Program

Figure 825: File/ Open Multi-program/ File Selection

3) Notice:

If a warming dialog box, [Warning: NON-REGULAR Panel, the system will dispatch fov by single board mode!!], appears, it means the test panel is irregular. The system will reallocate FOV images based on the board direction.

Do not revise the fiducial mark 0 on the old Pre files and then use the revised PRE files in the program.

Test Research Inc.


7.13 Displaying Instant PLC Status

Set [Show_PLCStatus] = 1 in the Windows Registry.

There are four types of PLC status.

Waiting: Waits for the board-in.

Loading: Is doing the board-in process and waits for the barcode.

Inspecting: Starts to inspect.

Unloading: Is doing the board-out process。

The inspection result will be displayed on the upper-right corner of the screen.

Figure 826: Display Real Time PLC Status

Inspection Screenshot

Figure 827: Result Dialog Screen

Test Research Inc.


7.14 Displaying the cycle time of previous waiting board


Displaying the cycle time of previous waiting board (From board-in to board-out).

Screenshot:

Figure 828: the Cycle Time of the Previous Board

2) Notice:

During the inspection, two items should be set in PLC:

Connection mode is enable.

Next station is existent.

7.15 Sending Board Width Information to the Plate Turnover Machine in the Next Station



When loading a PRE file or adjusting the board width, the system will send the board width information to the next station through RS232. The command description is shown below.

Don’t need to wait the feedback from the next station.

The procedure of setting the board width in production line: When a host send a string called [*B1234#] to connected units, connected units have to send back a signal [*B1234#].( [*B1234#] represents the board width setting is 123.4mm.) After the board width of connected units has been set to 123.4mm, the connected units will send

Test Research Inc.


another string called [*RDY1234#] back to the host. ( The first character of the string should be *, and the last character of the string should be #.

The procedure of querying the board width from connected units: After the host sends a signal called [*?B#] to the connected units, the connected units will send back a string which shows the broad width. For example, a string called [*B2345#] represents the board width is 234.5mm.

Notice:

It is based on the RS232 COM.setting between the host and the next station. Currently, users can set it manually.

Do not set the Magazine RS232 COM Port to the following COM Port: COM2 (PLC), COM3 (H>WBarcode), COM4 (Dual H>W Barcoder), COM6 (Handy Barcoder), COM8 (PLC)

This function should work with [Auto Conveyer Width] Setting. If the board-in method is one step style, set AutoConveyerWidth = 1. If the broad-in method is two step style, set AutoConveyerWidth = 2。

Accessories for auto convonveyer width function are necessary.

2) Preprocess:

Because this function relates to the equipment in the next station, users have to check the following requirements. When the following requirements are attained but the next station equipment still have problems, the problem cause must come from AOI software.

Check if the RS232 connection is [OK] (Make sure the hardware is [OK])

Make sure the protocol settings in both AOI and RS232 COM ports are the same. (BaudRate = 19200, Data Bits = 8, Parity = Odd, Stop Bits = 1.)

Test Research Inc.


Figure 829: Port Settings for Sending Board Width Information to the Plate Turnover Machine in the Next Station

Make sure the next station equipment can receive the signal. (Make sure the message format is [OK])

Use (Hyper Terminal) to check if the hardware connection is [OK]. (Make sure the next station equipment can receive the signal and send the feedback.)

Step1. Choose [Program] > [Accessories] >[Communication] > [Hyper Terminal] to create a new connection.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 830: Hyper Terminal

Step2. Select a COM Port.

Figure 831: Select Com Port

Test Research Inc.


Step3. Set Com Port communication protocol.

Figure 832: Com Port Properties

Step4. Disconnect the link.

Figure 833: Disconnect the Link

Test Research Inc.


Step5. Choose [Content]。

Figure 834: Viewing the Contents

Step6. Move to [Setting] page and click [ASCII Setting].

Figure 835: Properties Settings

Test Research Inc.


Step7. Set ASCII parameters.

Figure 836: ASCII Settigs

Step8. Test the connection.

Key in the command [“B1234#”], then wait for the feedback [*RDY1234#]. If there is no feedback, it means there is a hardware problem. You should check if the link has failed or the command is wrong.

Figure 837: ASCII Settigs

Test Research Inc.


3) Procedure:

Step1. Depends on the track mode to set [AutoConveyerWidth]. If the conveyer is one step

track, set [AutoConveyerWidth] = 1 in the Windows Registry. If the conveyer two

step track, set [AutoConveyerWidth] = 2 in the Windows Registry.

Step2. Choose [Auto Conveyor Width Output] to send the board width information to the next station.

Figure 838: [Auto Conveyor Width Output/ Send Width to Next Station]

Test Research Inc.


Step3. Choose [Add] to add a new RS232 device.

Figure 839: Adding a New RS232 Device

Step4. Click the [COM Port] column and input the number. Then, select [BaudRate],[Parity], [StopBits] or [DataBits] values from the pull-down menu.

Figure 840: RS232 Information

Test Research Inc.


Step5. You can click [Remove] or [Modify] to remove or modify the RS232 Device setting. After the setting, click [Save Current RS232 Setting]. The system will save the current setting to the file C:\AOI\RS232.xml。

Figure 841: RS232 Information

If the added RS232device cannot be set up, a dialog box will appear as below. You have to reset the hardware communication protocol.

Figure 842: An Error Message of RS232 Device

Test Research Inc.


Step6. Select a Com Port in the next station equipment from RS232 Device List and then check [Auto Conveyor Width Output] function.

Figure 843: Enable the [Auto Conveyor Width Output] Function

Step7. After this function is enable, it will influence two things:

Click [Send], AOI program will measure the board width of current PLC and send the board width information to the next station.

When opening a project, the system will send the board width information of PLC to the next station.

7.16 Using “Synchronic PLC inspection ” function

Function description：When users click the “Inspection” button in TRAOI, PLC will start to

inspect simultaneously.

Action description：When click [Inspection] button, the system will reset PLC first and then

start the PLC inspection automatically in the setting time.

Procedure：

1. Set DWORD [TRAOIConnectPLC] =1 in the Windows Registry

Test Research Inc.


2. Set DWORD [TRAOIConnectPLC_WaitTime] in the Windows Registry. The default setting is 5000. (unit: ms)

Notice：This function only works in [Connection] mode.

7.17 Using “New Void UI” Function

Set [NewVoidUI] =1 in the Windows Registry

Principle (in Train mode)：Users can set two threshold values instead of one. The area

where gray level value is higher or lower than the setting range will be filtered. Only the area where gray level value is between high ratio and low ration can pass the inspection. Moreover, High>Low Ratio will replace Bright>Dark Ratio in the function dialog box. See the example below.

Figure 844: The Comparsim of Old and New Void UIs

7.18 Setting “Lot Serial Number Requirement” Function

Add [showlot]=1 in the Windows Registry. Also, when [Companyname]=Quanta, users must input a serial number when opening a PRJ file. Otherwise, the system will not do the inspection process.

Test Research Inc.


7.19 Using “Polar Shift” Function

After adding [UsePolarShift]=1 in the Windows Registry, the system will display the Polar Coordinate System. The system can inspect the [Missing] or [Lead] boxes’ shift of the component with the angle which are not 0, 90, 180 or 270 degree. ( The angle uses the counterclockwise rules, (Right x+, Donw y+) to define the component position.

7.20 Sending Signals to Halle-Samlip Magazine

1) Function introduction: AOI can send signal to NG Buffer in the next station


When TRAOI get the inspection “FAIL”, the system will send following signals to Korean machine, Halle-Samlip Magazine：

1. N.G PCB Out Signal(R702) On (PCPLC)

2. N.G PCB Information Data Set (DT10000 ~10099) (PCPLC)

Test Research Inc.


3. N.G PCB Out Finish (R702) Off (PCPLC)

3) Setting Procedure：

(1) Set the communication protocols in both Magazine and AOIs’ RS232 COM Port as below: BaudRate = 19200，Data Bits = 8，Parity = Odd，Stop Bits = 1

Figure 845: Port Setting for Sending Signals to Halle-Samlip Magazine

(2) Set [ConnectctToMagazine] = 1 in the Windows Registry. (It means the connection function between AOI and Magazine is enable.)

(3) Set ConnectToMagazineComport to the Magazine COM Port

Test Research Inc.


If the function is enable but AOI can connect to the Magaine successfully, a dialog box will appear as below.

Figure 846: A Successful Message of Sending Signals to Halle-Samlip Magazine

If the function is enable and AOI can connect to the Magaine successfully, a dialog box will appear as below.

Figure 847: An Error Message of Sending Signals to Halle-Samlip Magazine

4) Notice：

(1) Set [ConnectToMagazine] = 1 in the Windows Registry.

(2) Set [ConnectToMagazineComport] = 9

Users can reset the value based on the client, Magazine RS232 COM. The default setting is 9. When setting Magazine RS232 COM Port, avoid to use the same COM port that AOI has already used.

The list of RS232 COM that TRAOI has already used:

COM2 (PLC),

COM3 (H>WBarcode),

COM4 (Dual H>W Barcoder),

COM5 (Camera Virtual COM Port),

Test Research Inc.


COM6 (Handy Barcoder),

COM8 (PLC)

5) Trouble shooting：

If the system still has problems after the setting, please set [ConnectToMagazine_LogAnswer] to 1 and repeat the process again. Then, send back the Log file to TRI.

7.21 Offline Fine-tuning New Feature

1) Function introduction：

After users enable “Offline Fine-tuning” function, they can review the inspection results and fine-tuning the inspection setting in Offline PC.

2) Function description：

(1) When this function is enable, users can see whole information of Inline machines in Offline PC. For example, Machine ID, connection status (including if the function is enable), inspection result, pre path and so on.

(2) Put all files which are necessary for Offline Fine-tuning process to the folder under C：\AOI_Offline_Data in Offline PC and make them in order by “machine id”.

(3) After connection process is successful, Inline machine will copy light setting to batch file in Offline machine.

(4) Provide Inline machine an interface which can turn on or turn off the system. (5) When AOI is turned on, the system will create a connection automatically. (6) Only when Inline machine is doing Fine-tune process, the system will not allow the

Mode switch.

3) Setting Procedure：

(1) Inline Machine Setting: (Set: [Offline] = 0, [NewOfflineFeature] = 1 in the Windows Registry) i. Enable the function:

Check [Parameter> User Mode > Link Offline >Enable] and [Connecting]

Connection status: ( If the connection setting is correct, the system can access the data transfer between Offline PC folder. Also, Fine-tuning function can be used. )

Test Research Inc.


Figure 848: Connecting Status Setting

Fine-tuning status: (Offline PC is using Fine-tune function)

Check [User Mode > Link Office> Enable] and [Fine-tuning]

Figure 849: Fine-Tuning Status Setting

After the setting, users cannot change the inspection mode.

Figure 850: The Locked Status in Inspection Mode

Abnormal connection: ( Check if the connecting function is checked in Offline

PC. If the connection still has problems, please refer to the trouble shooting part.)

Test Research Inc.


Figure 851: Abnormal Connection Status

Check if Inline machine can access the data transfer between Offline PC and

AOI_Offline_Data folders. Make sure the action work and then choose [ReConnect].

Figure 852: Reconnecting Setting

ii. Resend the light setting to inline machine: Choose [Parameter > User Mode > Link Offline > ReConnect]

Figure 853: Resending the Light Setting to Inline Machine

iii. Close the function:

Check [Parameter > User Mode > Link Offline > Disable]

Test Research Inc.


Figure 854: Closing Offline Fine-Tuning Function

(2) Offline Machine Setting: (Set [Offline] = 1 and [NewOfflineFeature] = 1 in the Windows Registry.) (3) Other settings are the same as the previous version.

a. Check [Utilities > Offline Monitor > Enable] .

Figure 855: Different Offline Fine-Tuning Function Setting

b. Choose [Utilities > Offline Monitor > Show Offline Monitor] .

All the Inline machine information will be displayed.

Figure 856: Showing Offline Monitor

Test Research Inc.


Status Explanation: [Disable]: Represents the Inline machine has not enabled the functionor or

the data access control has problems. [Enable] :Represents the connection between the Inline machine and

Offline PC is correct。

[Loading]: Represents the opened file(. Pre) is preparing to do the fine-tuning process.

[Fine-tuning]: Represents the Inline machine is doing the fine-tuning process. Users can use [disconnect link] function to cancel this status.

c. [Offline Setting]: Sets [Max Fail Board Count] and [Max Fail Image Count] values

It represents the upper limitations of Fail Board and Image.

Figure 857: Offline Setting

d. [Alarm Setting]: Sets alarm parameters

After the inspection in Inline machine, the system will send a “Fail Rate” signal. If the failed inspection results are over the setting, the background will be red.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 858: Alarm Setting (1)

For example, check [By Panel] and input 20 in the column. When fail rate of Inline machine [By Panel] is 20%, Offline Monitor will show a “warming’ message.

Figure 859: Alarm Setting (2)

e. [Open Link]: Opens the connection to the specified machine, and prepare to do fine-tuning process.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 860: Clicking Open Link

If the connection is successful, a dialog box will appear as below.

Figure 861: A Dailog Box of Succesful Open Link

g. [Disconnect Link]: Cancels Fine-tuning status

Test Research Inc.


Figure 862: Disconnecting the Selected Link

4) Notice：

1. For Inline Machine:

a. Set [Offline] = 0 and [NewOfflineFeature] = 1 in the Windows Registry.

b. The login account and password should be the same in Inline machine and Offline PC.

2. For Offline PC:

a. Set [Offline] = 1, [NewOfflineFeature] = 1 in the Windows Registry

b. The user authority function should be enabled in C:\ AOI_Offline_Data Folder. So, Inline machine can access the data transfer process to the folder.

c. The login account and password should be the same in Inline machine and Offline PC.

3. The ID of Inline machine cannot repeat.

5) Trouble Shooting：

1. The number of Max Fail Board Count and Max Fail Image Count influence the coherence of the inspection results between Offline PC and Inline machine.

Test Research Inc.


2. When both Inline and Offline machines can connect to the internet and the communication protocol setting is correct , but they still cannot connect to each other. Please check the fire wall setting.

Figure 863: Firewall Setting

3. Choose [Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Local Security Policy > Local Policies > Security Options > Network access: sharing and security model for local accounts > Classic –local users authenticate as themselves] and click [OK].

4. The folder [C:\AOI_Offline_Data in Offline PC] is used for data transfer process. So, the security setting of this folder should be “Full Access, Read, Write”. If there is any problem during the connection process, please check if Inline machine can access the data transfer to the folder in Offline PC.

5. The functions of the applied folders are described as follows:

a. C:\AOI_Offline_Data:

Saves all the necessary files

b. C:\AOI_Offline_Data\AOI_2

Generally, each machine data is sorted out by the machine id. When the connection is successful, Inline machine will save light setting file and .pre file in this folder. After light setting file is copied to the Offline PC, the system will generate a MoveLrt file. Users cannot run “Fine-tuning” process without this file.

Test Research Inc.


c. C:\AOI_Offline_Data\AOI_2\x_xxx_xxx_xxx

The characters of x_xxx_xxx_xxx is based on the Pre Path name. During the “Fine-tuning” process, Inline machine will save the “Failed” data to this folder for Offline machine use. Moreover, the Offline PC will save the “Tune” setting results in this folder for Inline machine use.

7.22 Using “Check Result” System

1) Function Introduction：

After AOIs connect to the Control Center and enable “ Repair Confirm” function, the AOIs will send the inspection results of each board to the Repair Station. The test board will be sent out until the AOIs receive the confirmation from the Repair Station. When this function is enabled, the system will display the confirmation from the Repair Station.

2) Function Description：

After AOIs connect to the Control Center and enable “ Repair Confirm” function, the AOIs will send the inspection results of each board to the Repair Station. When dual unloaders activate the [Pass>Fail] function, good and bad boards will be sorted to different magazines based on the inspection result. If users have a second monitor, the test result will be displayed in the second monitor.

Figure 864: Displaying the Result in the Sencond Monitor

Test Research Inc.


3) Interface description：

Figure 865: Check Result Dialog Box

Set [COMPANYNAME] = Hyupjin in Windows Registry.

4) Notice：

a. Set [COMPANYNAME] = Hyupjin in Windows Registry b. The Repair Station should be connected and the Control Center function should

be enabled. c. Make sure if the second monitor can work

7.23 Saving Library data to an Excel file

1) Function description：

Saves Library data to an Excel file including library type, image group, image and so on.

The format of the Excel file is shown as below：

Test Research Inc.


Figure 866: Showing Inspection Results in Excel Format

2) Setting：

In [Merge] step of ATPG mode, choose [File > Save Library to Excel].

`

Figure 867: Selecting Save Library to Excel Function

3) Notice：

Excel is required.

Test Research Inc.


8 START TO INSPECT

WARNING: Risk of electric shock and mechanical injury. Only fully-trained personnel should be allowed to install, operate or maintain the system.

8.1 Power On

1) Open the upper cover and confirm that there is no foreign matter inside. Be sure the front and back emergency stop switches are released, and the interlock is set to [ON]. Then close the upper cover.

2) Be sure that the power cable is connected to 220V single phase power.

3) Turn on the breaker that is on the back door.

Figure 868: Breaker

4) Turn on the power switch clockwise to start the machine.

5) Press [RESET] on the HCI to start the X-Y table.

Figure 869: Push Reset on HCI to Start X-Y Table

8.2 Open Program

1) Double click on the shortcut of the AOI main program.

2) Open a project file (*.PRJ)

Test Research Inc.


Figure 870: Click on Open File Icon, Select Project to Open

3) During loading the project, system asks if users want to use the [Auto Conveyor Width] function. If the machine has the optional auto conveyor width module and users have saved the conveyor width during creating the project, users can select [Yes]; then system will adjust the width of the conveyor automatically. If there is no optional auto conveyor width module, users have to set the conveyor width manually.

Figure 871: Auto Conveyor Width?

4) Click on [Inspect] button to start inspecting.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 872: Click Inspect Button

5) Press [TEST] on the HCI to let board in and start to inspect.

8.3 Check Barcode

1) Choose [Parameter > Panel > Barcode > Barcode Setting]

2) Check [Parameter > Panel > Barcode > Check Bar Code]

8.4 Link to Repair Station

1) Choose [Parameter > User Mode > Link to Repair Station]

2) Set the path in [Parameter > Panel > Repair Station] to the [C:/AOI_Repair_Data] directory.

3) Choose [Utilities > Resend Image Data for Repair]

4) Save the project and start to inspect.

8.5 Inspect on Another Machine

1) Copy the project (*.PRJ ) and panel map to another AOI machine.

2) Choose [Utilities > Fiducial Mark Alignment]

Figure 873: Select Fiducial Mark Alignment

3) To set the [Fiducial0] position if the system cannot find the fiducial mark. Choose [UTILITY/FIDUCIAL MARK SETTING] to set the position of [Fiducial0]. (See 3.7.7)

Test Research Inc.


Figure 874: Select Fiducial Mark Setting

4) Start to inspect.

8.6 Stop Testing and Shut Down

1) Press [ESC] on the keyboard to stop the project that is testing.

2) Click [ ] button to close the AOI main program. Then the system asks if you want to save the project. Choose to save or not according to your preference.

Figure 875: Close System & Save File

3) Select [Start > Shut Down] to close down the AOI main computer.

4) Turn the power switch counterclockwise to shut down the machine.

5) Turn off the breakers.

Test Research Inc.


9 OFFLINE EDITOR

9.1 Software

1) Sapera LT

2) Coreco Process

3) Cognex Driver

4) AOI main program. Must be the same version as the linked AOI machine.

9.2 Setting

1) Choose [Start > Run] and input [regedit] in the path [\\HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\TRI]

2) Add a DWORD parameter named [offline] and change the value to 1.

9.3 Procedure

There are two sections the offline editor can be used. One is editing the component library and the other is training in the main program.

9.3.1 EDITING COMPONENT LIBRARY

1) Start to create a project according to Chapter 1.5 Optional Equipment

2) Barcode system -- the selections includes 3 types: one dimension, two dimensions or software (only can read barcode from the top side).

OCR – The abbreviation of Optical Character Recognition. It is a character recognition system which has a font library. The library can verify the characters according to the character features

Auto Conveyor Width System–A system can record conveyor widths and adjust the widths automatically after loading a project. It can save time for adjusting conveyor width.

Support Pin System– A system provide a mechanical support to the measuring PCB>PCBAs. It can support the warpage measurement.

Repair Station – A system for repairing the inspection results. It includes the Repair Station software, the SPC software, a PC and a monitor. The detail functions of Repair Station are listed in the Repair Station Manual. After installing this system, AOI will transfer the inspection results to the Repair Station. It helps users to confirm the test results or modify the inspection conditions. In addition, the SPC software can generate many different kind of statistical reports from the collected inspection data.

Test Research Inc.


3) Offline Editor -- AOI Offline Editor includes software, a PC and a monitor. It allows users to edit projects without connecting to the AOI testers. Refer to Chapter 8- AOI Standard Project Creation. After finishing setting fiducial mark, enter the [Edit Component Library] box. (Click on [Tune] page below the ATPG flow chart then choose [Library]. Double click on the [Component Type] item.)

4) Choose [TOOL > CAPTURE IMAGE > ALL TYPE] button then the system captures the first

component (ranked by name) images for all type. Ten images will be captured for every first component. These are captured by top camera with [ToplightA] and [ToplightB], front camera with [FrontlightA] and [FrontlightB], rear camera with [RearlightA] and [RearlightB], left camera with [LeftlightA] and [LeftlightB], and right camera with

[RightlightA] and [RightlightB].

5) The system will create a new folder named [OfflineImage] in the folder that the project file is in. The images are named by type and component name.

6) Save the project (*.PRE).

7) Copy the whole folder where the project saved to the offline editor. To continue editing the existing component library, you must copy the [TRI_USER_LIB] folder to the offline editor.

8) Execute the main program on the offline editor and load the *.PRE file.

9) Choose [Program > ATPG] to enter the ATPG editing window. Click on the [Tune] page below the ATPG flow chart then choose [Library]. Double-click on the [Component Type] item. Start to edit the component library according to Chapter 4.9 Edit Component Library .

10) When the size of the component is greater than the range of a FOV, you still have to edit this type on AOI.

11) Save the component library (*.pgl).

12) Copy the [TRI_USER_LIB] folder back to the AOI. The default path is [C:\AOI\TRI_USER_LIB].

13) Continue the ATPG process to finish: [Merge][FOV Generate][FOV Verify].

14) Save the *.PRE file.

9.3.2 TRAIN MODE

1) Copy the entire folder where the project is saved to the offline editor.

2) Execute the main program on the offline editor and open the *.PRE file.

3) Train the inspection boxes according to the procedure in section 2.10. Because images cannot be captured on the offline editor, the system only execute editing with existing images and the lighting cannot be changed.

Test Research Inc.


4) Trying to perform [Merge] then editing results in the system might display a dialog box reminding you that the system cannot get images. So you have to get FOV images again with returning to the AOI.

5) Users can click [Inspect\ Inspect FOV Image] to inspect all the images saved in [FOV Image] and to tune the project.

6) Save the project and copy the project back to the AOI system. Inspection or fine tuning can be performed there.

Test Research Inc.


9.3.3 NEW OFFLINE EDITOR EDITING FLOW

Figure 876: Offline Editor Editing Flow

Test Research Inc.


Start a new project on an inline AOI machine. Use the general procedure to create a project until finishing the Fiducial Mark Setting.

Step1. Choose [Merge/ Capture Offline ATPG Data] in Merge screen.

Figure 877: Capture Offline ATPG Data

Step2. The system will clear the data first, choose [Yes].

Figure 878: Clear All data

Step3. Capture panel map, click [OK].

Figure 879: Capture Panel Map

Step4. Capture FOV images. This system will capture all FOV images. If the setting is two phase, the system will capture twice; there should be enough hardware space.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 880: Capture FOV Images.

Step5. Select the phase that you want to capture.

Figure 881: Select Phase

Step6. After scanning a board, system will ask if you want to scan the next board. You should send the board out and put the next board in then click [Yes]; if you don’t want to scan another board, click [No].

Figure 882: Continue to Capture FOV Image

NOTE: The above is the operation on an AOI machine.

Step7. Save the project.

Step8. Copy the entire folder where the project (*.pre) is saved to the Offline Editor.

Step9. Open the project.

Step10. Create Library.

1. Select a component, then system displays the FOV image first.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 883: An FOV size Image

2. If the image is not large enough, you can use [Tool/ Offline ATPG Editor/ Set body size in map] function to set the size of Body and the range to display image.

Figure 884: Offline ATPG Editor/ Set Body Size in Map

Test Research Inc.


3. System displays the position of the component with a red cross line. You can use cursor to frame the size of the body directly for system to display the image again.

Figure 885: Frame the Body Size

4. For angle cameras, because of the images can’t be pieced together, you have to create Library on different FOV images. Clicking on the four sides of the image, such as shown in the following Figure, system will display the neighbor FOV image.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 886: Angle Camera Display

After creating Library, merge the project in general procedure.

Figure 887: Merge

Test Research Inc.


Generate FOV.


Fine tune the project in Offline Editor as described below.

Figure 889: Tune Project on Offline Editor

Test Research Inc.


Confirm Pass–After clicking this, you can inspect the next board. When all images are inspected completely, the button will be disabled; you can close then click [Inspect] again to inspect from the first board again.

Confirm Fail–System will inspect the same board again.

Test Research Inc.


9.4 Auto Feedback Function

9.4.1 OBJECTIVE

AOI will send the test results to the Offline Editor software program located on the system PC. The result can be edited and compared with [Pass Level] parameters and sent back to the AOI for further inspection. This function allows use of one Offline Editor to access multiple AOI machines.

9.4.2 SETTINGS

9.4.2.1 Related Figure

Figure 890: Connect AOI with Offline Editor PC

9.4.2.2 Hardware

Connect the AOI machine and the Offline Editor with a crossover cable.

9.4.2.3 Offline Editor

1) Be sure to use the same version of the AOI software on both the AOI system and the PC.

2) Choose [Parameter\ User Mode\ Link To Machine].

3) Choose [Parameter\Panel\Offline Station] and set the path link to the specific folder. For example, if you want to save the offline data in repair station, the path has to be appointed to a folder in repair station pc. If use this computer as an Offline Editor, user needs to create a [AOI_Offline_Data] folder under [C:/] and redirect the path to this folder .

Test Research Inc.


Figure 891: Select Offline Editor Path

4) The [Machine] option will have a list of AOI machine. The user may link any machine by using the drop-down menu. However, sometimes the user may not be able to connect to the AOI. In this case, user needs to check and complete the connection between AOI and Offline Editor in order to select another AOI machine.

Image Management of Offline Editor

The images tuned in Offline Editor will not be deleted, and they will be saved in the [backup] folder under the path users set before. In [backup] folder, system will saved data in different subfolders according to the different model names.

In Offline Editor, if [Link To Machine] is selected, the management function, [Inspection/ Inspect Offline Backup FOV Images], will be enabled. The interface is described below.

Figure 892: Inspect Offline Backup FOV Images

Test Research Inc.


Figure 893: Inspect Offline FOV Image Dialog

Component List–Defect count of component sent from AOI machine, users can select components they want to inspect. If no component is selected, that means all components should be inspected.

Fov Image List–The backup FOV images. System saved them in different folders by date. Users can multi-select to specify the folder they want to inspect.

Remove Image–Users can delete the folder selected in [Fov Image List].

Refresh–Generate the data in [Component List] and [Fov Image List].

Inspect–After setting, users can click [Inspect/ Inspect Fov Image] to start to inspect; if users want to see the next inspection result, just click [Confirm Fail]. If users want to reset, they should click [Inspect/ Inspect Fov Image] again.

9.4.2.4 AOI Machine

Load the project that is the same with the Offline Editor.

Choose [Parameter > User Mode > Link To Offline Station]

Choose [Parameter > Panel > Offline Station] and set the path link to the specific folder. This path must link to the folder that is the same as what the offline editor is set to (refer to Section 9.4.2.3).

Test Research Inc.


Input [Max Fail Board Count] and [Max Fail Image Count]. Refer to 3.3.3.6.

9.4.3 OPERATION INSTRUCTIONS

9.4.3.1 Result Dialog Box

1) Copy the testing project file and the [FOV Image] folder to the Offline Editor.

2) When the AOI has tested one time, the failed images and [*.pnl] file are transferred to the [AOI_Offline_Data] folder of the Offline Editor.

3) Open the main program and load the [*.PRE] file that is the same as the inspection project on the AOI main machine.

4) The software will create an authorized flag called [AOI ID.run] to set a flag to the other AOI machines in order to avoid jammed communication. The authorized flag will control the connection traffic of all systems and save unsent data back to the original machines for the next available connection to [Offline Editor].

5) Choose [Inspection > Inspect FOV Images] then the system starts to inspect the existing FOV images. If the AOI has sent a failed image, the system uses these failed images in place of the saved images and inspects them. Set the search range, pass level or add alternative images according to the inspection result.

6) Click [Confirm PASS] or [Confirm FAIL] then this data is canceled and the next result appears.

7) When the settings are changed at the Offline Editor, the system saves a [*.fbk] file in the [AOI_Offline_Data] folder. When AOI is transferring data to the Offline Editor, it reviews the [*.fbk] file at the same time and the inspection parameters are modified at the next inspection.

9.4.3.2 Train Mode

1) Click [Train] to enter the [Train] dialog window.

2) Click on an inspection box to review the result.

3) Right click on the inspection box and choose [View > Show Data Collection Chart of this Box]. The system shows the latest 1000 data of this box.

4) Change the search range, pass level or add an alternative image in this window.

Test Research Inc.


10 APPENDIX 1 LIGHTING COMPENSATION

10.1 Lighting Compensation

This function can compensate the brightness of each camera through software. The compensation standard is, when the lighting range is set 60mA and the intensity is set 128 in all inspection areas, the gray level on the gray card image will be compensated to 150.

Step1. Click [START > RUN]. Input “regedit” to open the Windows Registry. Choose “HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\TRI\” and check if there is a DWORD variable named “LightingCompensation”. If the variable does not exist, open the AOI main program. Then, the variable will be created automatically.

Step2. For executing lighting compensation, set the value of the variable to “1”.

Step3. When the lighting is executed at the first time, the system will create four parameters: [Central>Gray] (the objective gray level for the four side-view cameras) , [CentralGrayRGB0], [CentralGrayRGB1], and [CentralGrayRGB2] ( the objective gray level for R, G, B sensors).

Figure 894: Lighting Compensation Parameters

Step4. Open the AOI main program and enter [UTILITIES > CAMERA ALIGNMENT].

Test Research Inc.


Figure 895: Camera Alignment Dialog

Step5. Move the camera to the gray card center manually or click [MoveTo] button.

Step6. Select the [GrayLevel] to show the gray level distribution in the current image.

Step7. Click [Lighting Balance] button and input the password “7100” to do lighting compensation. (Note: Make sure all the FOVs of the 5 cameras should focus on the gray card.)

Test Research Inc.


10.2 Lighting Decay Auto Check

This function uses software to test the difference between the current value (before compensating) and the objective value for all five cameras.

Step1. Open the AOI main program and choose [UTILITIES > CAMERA ALIGNMENT].

Step2. Move the camera to the gray card center manually or click [MoveTo] button.

Step3. Click [Light-Decay Check] button.

Step4. If it is the first time to use this function, a dialog box will appear as below. Click [Yes] to save the X – Y coordinate positions (The data will be saved to the Windows Registry and named “GrayCardPosX” and “GrayCardPosY”). If you want to change the positions, move the cameras to the gray card again and then click [Teach Position] button.

Figure 896: Confirm Save Gray Card Position

Step5. After clicking the [Light-Decay Check] button, the system will display a dialog box as below. The numbers in this box represent the current gray level decay of each camera. See the Figure below to see the corresponding positions between the numbers and the cameras. Select if you want to do lighting compensation later according to the light decay value.

Figure 897: Confirm Perform Lighting Compensation 1

Step6. If any of the cameras has more than 10% decay, a dialog box will appear as below. Click [Yes] to do the lighting compensation process.

Test Research Inc.



Step7. After checking [Auto Check] button, the system will check the lighting decay automatically when opening the program.

A. If the lighting decay of the gray card has problem such as light uneven or interference from foreign matters, a dialog box will appear as below. Click [Yes] to continue the light-decay check. If not, continue executing.


B. If the lighting decay is less than 10%, the system will execute the lighting compensation process. However, If the decay is greater than 10%, the warning dialog will appear as Figure 774.

Test Research Inc.


11 APPENDIX 2 OCR OPERATION

11.1 Flowchart to Create an OCR Window

Figure 900: Create an OCR Window Flowchart

Test Research Inc.


11.2 Buttons Related to the OCR Function in Train mode

Several parts associated with TRI’s OCR function are described below. We train, set and test the OCR inspection window in Train mode.

Figure 901: Select OCR Dialog Train Process

1) Select a component for displaying on OCR window. Click on a component in FOV image directly or select a component in [Component List] field.

2) Frame the string by Multi-Function Window.

3) Click [Add 1 Box] button.

4) Select [OCR> DateCode] in [Algorithm Selection] dialog box and then click [OK].

5) Do [Auto-Train] or [Manual-Train] for OCR window. ( The process is not shown in the figure.)

6) After the OCR window finishes training process, click [Inspection] to test it.

Test Research Inc.


7) To delete an OCR window, select it and click [Del Box] to delete it.

11.3 Creating OCR Box by Auto-Train

1) Before clicking [OCR] to create an OCR Component, adjust the multi-function window to cover the date code string first. The rules for the boundaries are shown in the following pictures.

Figure 902: Tolerance of OCR Boundaries

Figure 903: Examples of OCR Boundaries

2) A font selection window appears after creating an OCR window. A font selection window appears after creating an OCR window. Key in the current string to help the system to find the font, then click [OK].

Figure 904: Select Font Type

Test Research Inc.


3) Suppose we search in the standard font group with “TRI_” as beginning and see if it can find the matching font library.

Figure 905: Auto-Train Progress Meter

4) After recognition, it shows a [Train Result Verify] dialog and asks if the results including [Code] and [Angle] are correct.

Figure 906: Confirm Train Results

Test Research Inc.


5) Some characters are found because of the high similarity with standard font. Some characters are not found since the font does not match the date code. When the result is not correct, select [No] and input the correct date code string or angle (The system usually judges the angle automatically unless there are exceptional situations). After you input the string and click [Auto Learning], the system will train the existing font and save in the font library. After this, the date code will be recognized automatically.

Figure 907: Set Date and Click on Auto-Learning

Figure 908: Auto-Learn Progress Meter

Test Research Inc.


6) After auto training, confirm if the result is correct. If it is successful, click on [OK] to complete the “OCR Train”.

Figure 909: Confirm Auto-Training Result

7) If the result is still wrong, it is because the inspection box does not cover the characters or the image is not clear enough. There are three ways to solve the problem:

If the image is indistinct or there is too much noise, you can train the same date code A.on another board with a clearer image.

Select [Manual Train] to enter an internal train window. Train the details of each B.character to reach the demand.

When the inspection box does not cover the characters completely, the system cannot C.find the correct character boundary. Click on the [Cancel] button and readjust the size of the inspection box. Enter the [Auto Train] window and train again.

Test Research Inc.


11.4 Menu Introduction

11.4.1 OCR - AUTO TRAIN MODE

The window is to Auto Train and Auto Learning font library. After an OCR box is created in Train mode, the system will recognize and train the framed string.

There are 3 kinds of fonts that can be selected. The object is to search the string from an existing font.


The three choices are to reduce the time for searching.

If the font of the string is known, users can directly specify the font.

If the system cannot find the corresponding font from all existing fonts, users can skip the [Auto Train] process and enter the [Training Result Verify] dialog to do [Auto Learning] directly.

After finishing selecting a font, click [OK] to search characters. The initial searching result will display on the image. If the initial result is wrong, select the correct string and angle in [Result is correct?] window.

Test Research Inc.


11.4.2 TRAINING RESULT VERIFY DIALOG INTERFACE

Figure 911: Training Result Verify Dialog

1) [Result is correct?] - If the result displayed on the image is correct, select [Yes]. If the result is wrong, select [No] and input the correct information in the [Setting correct data] field.

2) [Setting Correct Data] - If the result is wrong, input the correct string and select correct angle and color here.

3) [Auto Learning] - After this item is checked, the system will train the OCR box again according to the information that users inputs in the [Setting Correct Data] field.

4) [Cancel] - Stops creating the OCR box.

5) [Manual Train] - Enters the [manual train] dialog. When [Auto Train] fails, users can use the manual function to do the further setting.

6) - Saves the image

7) [OK] - Confirms the results.

Manual Train is based on the core auto-training technology of TRI OCR, which includes font auto searching, Artificial Intelligence for auto-cutting characters, auto-alignment of string and so on.

In [Training Result Verify] window, when selecting [No] in [Result is correct?] frame, users should input the correct string and select the correct angle. The counterclockwise is positive.

After inputting the correct string and angle, click [Auto Train] to learn the font library and check sum setting.

Test Research Inc.


After training completely, the system displays the result on the image. If the result is correct, users should click [OK] to finish the OCR setting.

If training failed, users should click [Manual Train] button to manually train font library and manually set check sum.

Test Research Inc.


11.5 OCR - Manual Train mode

The Manual Train mode is used when the OCR window cannot be trained well by auto-train function. In this dialog we can set all the OCR parameters manually, such as OCR box training, font management and so on.

Figure 912: Manual Train mode

1) [Training] - Train the OCR window manually using four processes: drawing boundary box, select a font, recognize the string and confirm the result.

2) [Run-Time Test] - After training the OCR string, users could use this function to test under off-line mode. The result would be the result of run-time test.

3) [Tools] - The [Font Library] and [Check Sum] button could be changed each other.

4) [Font Library Manager] - According to the [Tools] that users selects, the [Font Library Manager] function or [CheckSum Manager] function could be shown.

5) Image Area: This area is to draw the string boundary box or to show the result of recognition.

Manual Train is based on the core recognition technology of TRI OCR, which includes font auto searching, auto sizing the character size, auto recognizing rotate angle, white character-black background or black character-white background recognition, auto pass level setting and so on. The details are described below.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 913: Training Command Details 1

Test Research Inc.


Figure 914: Training Command Details 2

Test Research Inc.


11.6 Training

When creating an OCR component, define the angle, font type and [CheckSum] information.

Follow these four steps to train

1) String boundary box －Use the box to cover the string to be

recognized. When you enter the training dialog, the system starts this function automatically. Cover the string by framing it tightly; it is easier to cut and recognize the string.

2) Font Selecting－ Users can use the font image browse function or font list box to select

the font type. Users also can select “All” to judge the font that the character belongs to. Users can review the font there and select the font by clicking [OK].

3) Cutting and recognizing for string － The system calculates

the direction and angle automatically. It also can calculate the proportion of scale between character and font to get the width and height of recognized characters automatically

4) String confirming button －When the above steps are complete, the recognized

characters will be filled to the edit frames automatically. When the recognition is wrong, edit the string to be the actual content and click on this button to save the data with calculated characters information to the [CheckSum] function. When the recognition is not correct and the reason is that there is no suitable font in library, enter the [Font Library Manager] function to train the characters.

When there are errors for recognition, we have to train characters individually in [Font Library Manager] dialog to build the font library. This is probably because of no corresponding font or a serious variation of the image.

Test Research Inc.


11.7 Run Time Test

After the training result is confirmed, use this function to test and have the result at run time.

Follow the two steps below:

1) Run Time String boundary box － Use the box to cover the string to be recognized.

2) Run Time Inspect － Inspect the OCR window according to calculated height,

width and the font to reflect the real inspected result.

11.8 Tools

The two pages, [Font Library Manager] and [CheckSum Manager], can be changed by this button.

11.8.1 FONT LIBRARY MANAGER

Before inspecting the date-code, you have to build a library or use an existing library to do recognition. The system supports four angles, 0°, 90°, 180°and 270° and you should train the code individually to raise the recognition rate. The main functions are: train, add, delete, modify, load and manage the font file.

Teach Single Font

1) Click to start the font training frame.

2) Adjust the size of the font training frame.

Figure 915: Font Training Frame

Test Research Inc.


The standard of size:

Train all characters with same height. For example, the heights of the characters on A.image above are all 59.

Train the characters which have same angle in same size, such as the characters B.above are W=43, H=59.

Reserve the space on both left and right sides for thin characters. C.

The numbers, “023456789” are normal width otherwise “1” belong to thin character. D.So it is better to reserve the space and have the same size with other characters for “1” image. The following picture shows the situation.

Figure 916: Framing Thin Character “1”

The English characters, except the characters with normal width, “Q” and “W” belong E.to the wilder characters, it needs to be enlarged the width when training; “I” and the other small letters are like the thin characters. But it also has to divide the characters according the real situation.

Figure 917: Framing Alphanumeric Characters Together

Test Research Inc.


3) Input the character definition

4) Input font type

5) Input angle

6) Select the character and background color. (Black ground white string or reversed)

7) Click [Add] to add a new font.

Figure 918: Steps to Add New Font

Teach Multi Font

1) Input the string that has to be taught font.

Figure 919: Input String to Be Taught

Test Research Inc.


2) Click the multi font teaching button .

3) Locate the teaching box individually.

4) Input the font.

5) Input the angle.

6) Select the character and background color. (Black ground white string or reversed)

7) Click [Add] to add a new font.

Figure 920: Add Multi-Font

11.8.2 CHECKSUM

After training the system defines every character checksum condition. The default is the character itself. You can add several conditions to be the base for “Pass” or “Fail”. The default setting for the function is disabled.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 921: Checksum Conditions

Modify the content of date code

1) Edit the date code string in code-editing window.

Test Research Inc.


2) Click switch button to modify.

3) Click [List] to review the result.

Figure 922: Date-Code List

Modify the font type and angle

You can modify the font type and angle in the [font type] editing window.

Test Research Inc.


11.9 Show Font Library Dialog

When the button is selected, the following dialog will be shown. The dialog is to manage the

font according to different font type. The details are described below.

Figure 923: Show Font Library

11.10 Font Delete Dialog

Under [Font Lib] dialog, when users click , the following dialog is shown to delete the

font by specific item.

Test Research Inc.


Figure 924: Delete Font Options

Test Research Inc.


11.11 Notice of In-Line >Run-Time Inspection

11.11.1 BUILD AN OCR INSPECTION WINDOW

1) When creating an OCR box, users should add a [Warp] box to help locate the OCR box. The Warp box is suggested to add on the top of the component so that the Warp box can be moved together with the OCR box.

Figure 925: Sample Warp Box

2) It is better to leave a 3~5 pixel space between the string and the boundary, as shown in Figure 903: Examples of OCR Boundaries.

3) When using Auto-Train, it is better to have a clear background.

Figure 926: Uniform Background

Test Research Inc.


11.12 Constraints of TRI-OCR

1) There must be more than 2 characters of a string and more than 4 characters of Date-Code.

2) The size of a character has to be larger than 20x20 pixels.

3) When training, there must be a number in a string, the contrast between black and white must be strong (it can be achieved by using ring light). In run-time recognition, the constraint mentioned above does not have to be cared.

4) In run-time test, if there are two different kinds of components available, and they are with different font or size, users has to build two OCR inspection boxes. And set logic “OR” to these two OCR window.